Pre-Employment Training for Engineers

Q: What are the technical standards necessary for the maintenance and operation of transformers?

Technical standards for the maintenance and operation of transformers include checking and maintaining cooling systems, ensuring proper lubrication of bearings, and calibrating temperature indicators . Regular checks on transformer supports, connections, oil levels, and bushings are also essential. These checks prevent leaks and ensure alignment and proper function . Maintenance can be preventive, condition-based, or corrective, with routines scheduled daily, monthly, and yearly based on manufacturer recommendations . It is crucial to use quality materials and maintain a detailed record of inspections and maintenance activities to ensure reliability and efficiency . Additionally, tests like insulation resistance, winding resistance, and dielectric tests are important to assess transformer condition .

Q: How do different tariff schedules regulate electricity consumption for agricultural pumps?

Tariff schedules for agricultural pumps vary based on the pump's horsepower. For example, IP sets up to 10 HP are not subject to fixed charges, while energy charges follow a tariff determined by the Commission. For larger sets above 10 HP, fixed and energy charges apply per unit of horsepower. These tariffs also include provisions for the use of electricity in ancillary activities like lighting or agricultural processing, often with energy consumption limits .

Q: What measures can be implemented to reduce the risks associated with handling electricity?

To reduce risks associated with handling electricity, specific safety measures should be implemented. Use of safety gadgets such as rubber hand gloves, safety belts, helmets, and insulated tools is crucial for workmen handling electricity to minimize the risk of injury . Establishment of safety zones and ensuring positive isolation of mains can help in preventing accidental electrical contacts . Regular safety training and planning to avoid negligence and overconfidence are essential . Moreover, grounding systems and the use of devices such as Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB) and Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCCB) are mandatory for ensuring electrical safety . Conducting inspections and maintaining clearances as per regulations can prevent accidents due to snapping or sagging wires . Regular audits and consultations with appropriate authorities for the specification of safety standards and procedures further aid in reducing risks ."}

Q: What are the procedures for handling dishonored checks in electricity distribution operations?

In electricity distribution, dishonored checks are recorded in the cheque dishonor register. Any credits afforded to the consumer due to the check's initial acceptance are reversed in the consumer ledger. Following this, checks from individuals with a history of dishonor are not accepted. Proper documentation ensures financial accountability and maintains the integrity of financial transactions .

Q: How does the Central Transmission Utility (CTU) support inter-state electricity transmission?

The Central Transmission Utility (CTU) undertakes the transmission of electricity through inter-state transmission systems. Its functions include planning and coordinating with State Transmission Utilities, the Central and State Governments, generating companies, and other notified entities to ensure an efficient, coordinated, and economical system. The CTU facilitates the smooth flow of electricity from generating stations to load centers and provides non-discriminatory open access to its transmission system for licensees or generating companies .

Q: What principles guide the classification of transformers based on their application?

Transformers are classified based on several principles related to their application: 1) Electrical configuration (single or three phase) 2) Voltage changes (Step-up or Step-down) 3) Core construction (Core type or shell type) 4) Winding construction (Two or three winding, or Auto) 5) Cooling media (Oil, gas-SF6, or dry type) 6) Voltage systems (Distribution, Power, or EHV-extra high voltage) 7) Capacity ratings (e.g., 100 KVA, 10 MVA, 100 MVA) 8) Application (e.g., Grounding, Welding, Furnace, Traction, Instrument transformers like CT and PT) 9) Location (Indoor or outdoor) 10) Reactors . In electrical utilities, classification also depends on the system voltage: Distribution transformers (4.6-11-13.2 KV \ 400-250V), Power transformers (33-66-110 KV \ 13.2-11-4.6 KV), and EHV transformers (220 KV and above).

Q: Discuss the importance of open access in electricity transmission systems.

Open access in electricity transmission systems is vital as it allows for the efficient use of the grid by enabling various entities, including consumers and generating companies, to access the transmission infrastructure by paying stipulated charges and surcharges. This facilitates competition, optimizes grid utilization, and reduces overall costs. It also supports the reliable distribution of electricity across different states while maintaining flexibility in supply .

Q: In what ways does the Electricity Supply Code ensure protection and efficiency in electricity distribution?

The Electricity Supply Code established by the State Commission provides guidelines for recovering electricity charges, billing intervals, supply disconnection for non-payment, and measures against tampering or damage to equipment. It also ensures appropriate entry and actions by licensees during maintenance, replacing, or altering electric services. These codes safeguard consumer rights and maintain the integrity and efficiency of service delivery .

Q: How can distribution licensees optimize asset utilization while engaging in other businesses?

Distribution licensees can engage in other businesses for optimum asset utilization by informing the Appropriate Commission in advance. A portion of the revenues from such businesses is used to reduce wheeling charges as specified by the concerned State Commission. It's imperative that distribution operations do not subsidize or encumber these business undertakings, ensuring separate accounting for each business endeavor .

Q: What role does the State Load Dispatch Centre (SLDC) play in ensuring the efficiency of the power system operation?

The State Load Dispatch Centre (SLDC) is responsible for ensuring that every licensee, generating company, generating station, and any other person connected with the power system comply with its directions. The SLDC must also comply with directions from the Regional Load Dispatch Centre (RLDC). In cases of disputes concerning the quality of electricity, or safe, secure, and integrated operation of the State grid, these must be referred to the State Commission. Compliance with SLDC directives is mandatory even while disputes are pending decisions. Failure to comply could result in a penalty .

50% found this document useful (2 votes)

408 views297 pages

The Electricity Act 2003 was passed to reform the Indian power sector. It repealed several older acts governing the sector including the Indian Electricity Act of 1910 and the Electricity Su…

Uploaded by

ಶ್ರೀಕಾಂತ್ ತಿಪ್ಪೇರುದ್ರಪ್ಪ

PRE-EMPLOYMENT TRAINING

PROGRAM FOR ASSISTANT

ENGINEERS/JUNIOR ENGINEERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Contents Page No.
No.

1 Over view of Power sector 1-4

Electricity Act 2003 and Functioning of
2 5-26
KERC.
3 Preparation of estimates 27-43
4 HT/LT LINES 44-52
5 Transformers 53-70
6 Sub Station 71-101
7 Electrical Accidents-Prevention & Safety 102-114
8 Concepts of LDC, ABT Mechanism and SCADA 115-126
IT initiatives in power sector-general over
9 127-143
view
10 Energy Meters 144-162
Transmission line- Survey, approvals &
11 163-170
Construction
12 Earthing Practice 171-181
13 Hot line technics 182-183
14 Tariffs 184-208
15 BESR 209-223

16 Inspection of cash book 224-230

17 Demand Side Management 231-244

18 Procurement contracts and CVC Guidelines in 245-255

Procurement Contracts
19 Material Management and Store Accounts 256-276
Energy Accounting and Auditing in Power
20 277-289
Distribution System.
21 Power Purchase 290-294
22 DAS 295-300
23 RTI 301-307

24 Yoga 308-331
.

CHAPTER -1

Over View of Power Sector

In this Session

•Vision of GoI
•Reforms in Power Sector
•Generation
•Transmission
•Distribution
•Trading
•Statutes
•Statutory Bodies
•Regulatory Regime
•Tariffs
Government of India Vision

POWER FOR ALL BY 2012

- Life Line Consumption

Reforms In Power Sector

•Economic Reforms – Globalization

•Functional Separation – Unbundling
•Generation – Transmission – Distribution – Trading
•Economic Reforms – Globalization
•Functional Separation – Unbundling
•Generation – Transmission – Distribution – Trading
Reforms In Karnataka Power Sector
•Reform Legislation – KER Act 1999
•KEB restructured
First Phase – 1.8.99
KPTCL and VVNL
VVNL Merged with KPCL
Second Phase – 1.6.02
KPTCL
Electricity Supply Companies – ESCOMs
BESCOM, MESCOM, HESCOM, GESCOM
CESC – 1.4.05
PCKL
RPCL

1
.

Generation Sources

Hydro
Thermal
Nuclear
NCE
- Bio mass
- Wind
- Solar
- Co Gen
-Mini Hydel
CPP

Karnataka Scenario INSTALLED CAPACITY (mw)

Number of Capacity
Power Station Type Total
Units (MW)

Raichur Thermal Power station Thermal 7+1 210x7+250x1 1720

Bellary Thermal Power station Thermal 2 500 1000

Sharavathi Hydel 10 103.5 1035

Nagjhari-2 Hydel 4 150 600

Varahi River Hydel 4 115 460

Almatti Dam Hydel 5+1 5x55 + 1x15 290

Nagjhari-1 Hydel 2 135 270

Gerusoppa Hydel 4 60 240

Kadra Dam Hydel 3 50 150

Kodasalli Dam Hydel 3 40 120

Supa Dam Hydel 2 50 100

MGHE-2 Hydel 4 21.6 86.4

Linganamakki Dam Hydel 2 27.5 55

MGHE-1 Hydel 4 13.2 52.8

Bhadra right bank-1 Hydel 1 7.2 7.2

Bhadra right bank-2 Hydel 1 6 6

Bhadra left bank-1 Hydel 2 12 24

Bhadra left bank-2 Hydel 1 2 2

2
.

Number of Capacity
Power Station Type Total
Units (MW)

Mani Hydel 2 4.5 9

Ghataprabha Hydel 2 16 32

Almatti-1 Hydel 1 15 15

Shivanasamudra-1 Hydel 4 6 24

Shivanasamudra-2 Hydel 6 3 18

Shimshapura Hydel 2 8.6 17.2

Munirabad-1 Hydel 2 9 18

Munirabad-2 Hydel 1 10 10

Mallapura Mini 2 4.5 9

Sirwar Mini 1 1 1

Kalmala Mini 1 0.4 0.4

Ganekal Mini 1 0.35 0.35

Kappadagudda-1 Wind 9 0.225 2.025

Kappadagudda-2 Wind 11 0.230 2.53

Yalesandra Solar PV Plant, Kolar Solar

1 3 3
Dist Project

Solar
Itnal Solar PV Plant, Belgaum Dist 1 3 3
Project

Yelahanka DG Station Diesel 6 21.32 127.92

5975.91
Total -- -- --

3
.

ELECTRICITY TRADING

•Buying and Selling of power

•Licensed Activity
•Open Access
•Power Exchanges IEX & PXIL
•PCKL Coordinator
STATUS

•ELECTRICITY ACT 2003

•ENERGY CONSERVATION ACT 2001
•KARNATAKA ELECTRICITY REFORM ACT 1999
- IE ACT 1910
-ELECTRICTY SUPPLY ACT 1948
-CERC ACT 1998
-Above are Repealed Acts

STATUTORY ENTITES

•Central Electricity Regulatory Commission ( CERC)

•Central Electricity Authority ( CEA)
•Appellate Tribunal for Electricity ( ATE)
•Bureau of Energy Efficiency ( BEE)
•State Electricity Regulatory Commission (SERC)
Regulatory Regime in Karnataka

•KERC – 15.11.1999
•Three Member Commission
•Frames Regulations
•Tariff Determination
•Licensing
•Standards of Performance Regulations
•Conditions of Supply of Electricity
Tariffs
•Tariff Determination Process
•Transmission Tariff
•Retail Supply Tariff
•Multi Year Tariff ( MYT)

4
.

CHAPTER -2

Electricity Act 2003 and Functioning of KERC.

POWER SECTOR EVENTS

1887
 The Electricity Act 1887 was first legislation on the subject of Electricity.
Commercial Electrical supply started direct to customer.

1903
 The Electricity Act 1887 was repealed and replaced by Indian Electricity Act

1910 -
 Indian Electricity Act 1910
 Licensing act was passed.

1948
 Electricity Supply Act 1948 Power System / Grid Development Interstate power
system development was mooted/Establishment of State Electricity Boards/
Central Electricity Authority

1956
 Indian Electricity Rules 1956
 Rules regulations under section 37 of the 1910.

1962
 Atomic Energy Act 1962 Develop Sound and Adequate National Policy in regard to
Atomic Power.

1975-76
 Amendment facilitated the entry of Central Sector Generation.

1991
 The Electricity laws (Amendment) Act 1991 Opening up of the power sector was
started - most of them were directed towards Generation and that too only
thermal plus system operation and development.

1992-97
 Several Amendments/ Notifications were issued by Government of India to
facilitate entry of IPP. But there was no real progress.

1996-97
 Rekha committee was created for consolidating all laws but it failed.

5
.

1998
 Electricity Regulatory Commission Act 1998 Establishment of Central Electricity
Regulatory Commission / State Regulatory Commission Rationalization of
Electricity Tariff/ Transparent policies regarding subsidies etc.

NATIONAL ELECTRICITY POLICY AND PLAN

National Electricity Policy and Plan:-

1. The Central Govt. shall from time to time, prepare National Electricity Policy in
consultation with State Governments and the authority for development of
power system Coal, natural gas, substances, hydro and renewable sources of
energy.

2. Central Government shall publish the National Electricity policy and tariff policy
from time to time.

3. Revision in policy and tariff in consultation in state.

4. Authority prepares a National Electricity Plan in accordance to NEP and notify

once in five years.
a) Approval of the Central Government for notify the plans.

5. Non conventional Energy and Rural areas.

6. National Policy on Electrification and local distribution in Rural areas.

7. Obligations to supply Electricity to Rural areas (Appropriate Government

shall endeavor supply electricity to all areas including villages and hamlets).

Generating company and setting up of Generating Station.

Hydro – electric generation

• Approval of the state Govt.:
• Clearance from CEA -
• Dam safety and optimum utilization of water resources

Captive Generation: –
• Construct, Maintain and Operate
• Dedicated Transmission line .
• Right to open access .
• No licensing.

6
.

DUTIES OF GENERATING COMPANIES:

• Establish Operate and Maintain Generating Stations.
• Tie lines
• Sub-Stations
• Dedicated Transmission lines.
• Supply Electricity to any licensee.

• Technical Details to appropriate commission and central Electricity authority.

• Co-ordinate with central transmission utility or state transmission utility.

Directions to Generating Companies:

• Appropriate Government may direct the Generating stations to operate and

maintain any generating stations and maintained in accordance

LICENSING:

AUTHORIZED PERSON TO TRANSMIT, SUPPLY ELECTRICITY

• Transmit Electricity or
• Distribute Electricity or
• Undertake trading in Electricity.
• Unless authorized by the licence.

GRANT OF LICENCE:
The appropriate commission may, on an application grant a licence to any person.
• To Transmit electricity as a transmission licence or
• To Distribute electricity as a distribution licence or
• To undertake trading in electricity as an electricity trader.

Appropriate Commission may grant licence to two or more persons for distribution of
electricity through their own distribution system within the same area.

PROCEDURE FOR GRANTING LICENCE

• Application made in such manner as specified by the Appropriate Commission

accompanied by the fees.

• The applicant shall notify within 7 days for objections.

• Person intending to act as a Transmission licensee immediately on making

application, forward the application to C.T.U or S.T.U. The C.T.U or S.T.U within 30
days shall send recommendations to Appropriate Commission.

• Before granting licence Publish a notice in two such a daily newspaper, stating the
name and address of the person.

7
.

Consider suggestion and objections recommendations of C.T.U and S.T.U

• Person makes a application the Commission shall clear in 90 days.
Issue licence
Reject the application
Reasons recorded in writing.

• The Appropriate Commission shall issue a licence forward a copy to Appropriate Govt.
authority.

• A licence shall continue to be in force for a period of twenty – five years. Unless it is
revoked.

Transmission of Electricity
• Inter State, Regional and Inter- Regional Transmission:
Central Government – Region wise demarcation of country time to time for efficient,
economical integrated transmission and supply of electricity to facilitate inter
connection and co - ordination.

• National Load Despatch Centre:

Establish a National Load Despatch Centre optimum scheduling despatch to Regional
Load Despatch Centres.
Constitution and functions of NLDC as per Central Government.
NLDC shall not engage in trading.
NLDC operated by Government Company or Authority or Corporation by any
Constitution, Central Act as notified by the Central Government.

• Constitution of Regional Load Despatch Centre (RLDC)

The Central Government establish a Centre for each region known as Regional
Load Despatch Centre - Territorial Judiciary Section – Central Government.
RLDC – Government Company or Authority or Corporation by any Constitution Central
Act as notified by the Central Government.

Functions of Regional Load Despatch Centre :-

• RLDC – Apex body to ensure integrated operation of the power system in the
concerned region.
• RLDC comply with - Principles, Guidelines and Methodologies in respect of
wheeling and optimum schedules- despatch of electricity as Central Commission
may specify in the Grid Code.
• a) RLDC shall be responsible for optimum scheduling and despatch of electricity
within the region, in accordance to contracts – licensees or generating companies
operating in the region.
b) Monitor the Grid Operations .
c) Keep accounts of the quantity electricity transmitted through the Regional grid.
d) Exercise supervision and control over inter - State transmission system.
e) Responsible for carrying out the real time operations for grid control and despatch
of the electricity – Grid code and Grid Standards.

8
.

• RLDC may levy and collect such fees and charges from the generating companies
or licensees engaged in inter State transmission and electricity as specified by the
Central Commission.

Compliance of Directions :

• RLDC may give such direction and exercise such supervision and control as may be
required for ensuring stability of grid operations and for achieving the maximum
economy and efficiency in the operation of power system in region under its control.

• Every licensee, Generating Company, Generating Station, Sub-Station and any other
person connected with operation of power system shall comply with the directions of
RLDC.

• All Directions issued by RLDC to any transmission licensee of State transmission

lines or any other licensee of the State or Generating Company or Sub- Station in the
State shall be issued through the State load Despatch Centre and the SLDC shall
ensure such directions are duly complied by the licensee or Generating Company or
Sub- Station.

• If any dispute arises with reference to quality of electricity or safe, secure and
integrated operation of the Regional grid or in relation to any direction given shall be
referred to Central Commission for decision.

• Any licensee, Generating Company etc., fail to comply with direction issued by
RLDC shall be liable to a penalty not exceeding Rs. 15 Lakhs.

Transmission within the State

• The State Commission shall facilitate and promote transmission, wheeling and
interconnection arrangements within its territorial Jurisdiction for the transmission and
supply of electricity economical and efficient utilization of the electricity.

Constitution of the State Load Despatch Centre

• The State Government shall establish a Centre as State Load Despatch Centre for
exercising the powers and discharging the functions.

• The SLDC shall be operated by the Government Company or any authority or

corporation established or constituted by or under any State Act, as may be notified by
the State Govt.

Provided that until a Govt. Company or any authority or Corporation is notified by the
State Government., the State Transmission utility shall operate the SLDC. NO
SLDC shall engage in the business of trading in electricity.

9
.

Functions of State Load Despatch Centre:

• SLDC is apex body to ensure integrated operation of the power system in the State.
• SLDC shall
• Be responsible for optimum scheduling and despatch of electricity within the State in
accordance with the contracts of licensees or Generating Companies operated in the
State.
• Monitor Grid Operations
• Keep accounts of quantity of electricity through the State Grid.
• Exercise Supervision and control over the intra state transmission system.
• Responsible for carrying out Real time operation of Grid control and despatch of
electricity within the state. Secure and economical operation of the State grid in
accordance to Grid Standards and Grid code.
• SLDC may levy and collect such fee from Generating Companies and licensees
engaged in intra - State transmission of electricity as may be specified by the State
Commission.

Compliance of Directions:

• SLDC in the State may give directions and exercise supervision and control for
ensuring integrated Grid operation and achieving maximum economy and the
efficiency in the operation of Power system.- State
• Every licensee, Generating Company, Generating Station, and any other person
connected with the operation of Power system shall comply with the directions issued
by SLDC.
• The SLDC shall comply with the directions of RLDC.
• Any dispute arises with quality of electricity or safe, secure and integrated operation
of the State grid or in relation to any direction – referred to State Commission for
decision.
• Providing that Pending the decisions of the state Commission, the directions of SLDC
shall be complied by the licensee or Generating Company.
• Licensee, Generating Company fails to comply the directions of liable to penalty of
not exceeding to 5 lakhs.

Grid Standards:

• Technical Standards - operation & Maintenance – Authority.

10
.

Direction by Appropriate Government:

• The Appropriate Govt. may issue the directions to RLDC or SLDC, as the case may be,
to take such measures for necessary maintaining smooth and stable transmission and
supply of electricity to any region or State

Central Transmission Utility and Functions:

• The Central Government may notify any Government Company as the Central
Transmission Utility.
• Central Transmission Utility shall not engage in the business of generation of
electricity or trading in electricity.
• Central Govt. may transfer, and vest any interesting property, rights and liabilities
connected with, and personnel involved in transmission of electricity and such
transmission utility to a Company or Companies to be incorporated under the company
act 1956 to function as transmission licensee through a transfer scheme to be
effected in manner specified under part 13 ( Reorganization of the Board ) shall be
deemed to be transmission licensees under this act.

The functions of the Central Transmission Utility shall be:

• To undertake transmission of electricity through inter - State transmission system.
• To discharge all functions of planning and co-ordination relating to inter-State
transmission system with-
• State Transmission Utilities
• Central Government
• State Governments
• Generating Companies
• Regional Power Committees.
• Authority
• Licensees
• Any other person notified by the Central Government in this behalf.
• Development of an efficient, co-ordinate & economical system of inter-state
transmission lines for smooth flow of electricity from generating stations to the load
centers.

Non-discriminatory open access to its transmission system for use by –

• Any licensee or Generating Company on payment of the transmission charges
or
• Any consumer as and when such open access is provided by the State
Commission under sub-section (2) of section 42, on payment of the transmission
charges and a surcharge thereon, as may be specified by the Central
Commission.
• Surcharge for utilised for the purpose of meeting the requirement of current
level cross subsidiary.
• Surcharge and cross subsidies reduced and eliminated in the manner as may
be specified by the Central Commission.

11
.

• Surcharge may be levied till such time the cross subsidies are not
eliminated.
• Payment and utilization of surcharge shall be utilized by the Central
Commission.
• Surcharge shall not be leviable in case open acess is to be provide to a person
who has established a captive generating plant for carrying the electricity to the
destination of his own use.

State Transmission Utility and Functions:

• The State Government may notify the Board or a Government company as the State
Transmission Utility.

• State Transmission Utility shall not engage in the business of trading in electricity.

• State Government may transfer, and vest any property, interest in property, rights
and liabilities connected with, and personnel involved in transmission of electricity, of
such transmission utility, to a company or companies to be incorporated under the
companies act, 1956, to function as transmission licensees through a transfer
scheme.

The functions of the State Transmission Utility –

• Transmission of electricity through intra - State transmission system.

• Functions of planning and co-ordination relating to intra - State transmission system
with-
• Central Transmission Utilities
• State Governments
• Generating Companies
• Regional Power Committees
• Authority
• Licensees

• Development of an efficient, co-ordinated and economical system of intra State

transmission lines for smooth flow of electricity from Generating station to load
centres.
• Non - discriminatory open access to its transmission system for use by –
• Any licensee or Generating company on payment of the transmission
charges or
• Any consumer as and when such open access is provided by State Comm.
under sub section of (2) of section 42 on payment of transmission
charges such on thereon as specified by the State Commission.
• Surcharge utilized for meeting the requirement of current level of cross subsidy

Duties of Transmission licensees:

12
.

The duty of transmission licensee.

• To build, maintain and operate an efficient, co-ordinated and economical inter
State transmission system or intra state transmission system as the case may be.
• Comply directions of RLDC and SLDC as the case may be.
• Non-discriminatory open access to its transmission system for use by
• Any licensee or generating Company on payment of transmission charges.
• Any consumer as and when such open access is provided by the State Commission
under Sub- Section (2) of section 42 on payment of transmission charges and
surcharge thereon specified by the State Commission

Other Business of Transmission Licensees:

• The transmission licensee with prior intimation to Appropriate Commission
engaged in any business for optimum utilization of its assets. Provided proportion of
revenues derived on such business shall be specified by Appropriate Commission,
be utilized for reducing its charges for transmission and wheeling.

• Maintain separate account for each business under take to ensure transmission
business either subsidiaries in any where such business under taking nor-
encumbrance its transmission assets in any way to support such business.

• Transmission licensee shall enter into any contract or otherwise engage in the
business of trading in electricity.

DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRICITY:

Duties of Distribution Licensees and Open Access:

• Develop, maintain an efficient co-ordinated an economical Distribution system in his

area of supply and to supply electricity.

• The State Commission shall introduce an open access in such phases and subject to
conditions (Cross Subsidies and operational Constraints) Specified within one year on
appointment date, specifying the extent of open access in successive phases and in
determining the charges for wheeling It shall have due regard to all relevant factors
including cross subsidies and operational constraints.

• Provided – Open access may be allowed before the cross subsidies are
eliminated on payment surcharge in addition to charges for wheeling as determined
by the State Commission.

• Surcharge shall be utilized to meet the requirement of current level of cross

subsidy within the area of supply of distribution licensee.

• Surcharges and cross subsidies shall be progressively reduced and eliminated as

specified by the State Commission.

13
.

• Surcharge shall not be leviable in case open access is provided to a person who
has establish captive generating plant for carrying electricity to a
destination of his own use.

• Person whose premises are situated within the area of supply of Distribution
licensee (Not being a local authority engaged in business of distribution of
electricity before the appointed date) requires supply from the Generating company
or any licensee other than such distribution licensee, such person may, by notice,
require the distribution licensee for wheeling such electricity in accordance with
regulations made by the State Comm. and duties of the Distribution licensee with
respect to such supply shall be a common carrier providing non discriminatory open
access.

• Where the State Commission permits a consumer or class of consumers to receive

supply of electricity from a person other than the distribution licensee of his
area of supply consumer shall be liable to pay an additional surcharge on the
charges of wheeling, as may be specified by the State Commission, to meet the
fixed cost of such distribution licensee arising out of his obligation to supply.

• Every distribution licensee shall,within six months from the appointed date or date
of grant of licence, whichever is earlier, establish forum for Redressal of Grievance of
the consumers with the guidelines as may be specified by the State Commission.

• Any consumer, who is aggrieved by non- redressal of his grievances under sub -
section (5), may make a representation for the redressal of his grievance to an
authority to be known as Ombudsman to be appointed or designated by the State
Commission.

• The Ombudsman shall settle the grievance of the consumer within such time and in
such manner as may be specified by the State Commission.

Duty to supply on request:

• Every distribution licensee, shall, on an application by the owner or occupier of any

premises, give supply of electricity to such premises, within one month after receipt of
the application requiring such supply.

• Provided that supply requires extension of distribution mains, commissioning of

new Sub – Stations, distribution licensee shall supply electricity to such premises
immediately after commissioning or period specified by Appropriate Commission.
In village or hamlet no provision of supply of electricity exist. The commission
may extend the exact period still electrification of such village or hamlet or area.

• Every distribution licensees shall provide required electric supply to the premises as
per section (1).

14
.

• Provided that no person shall be entitled to demand or continue to receive,

from a licensee supply of electricity for any premises having a separate
premises having a separate supply unless he has agreed with licensee to pay him
such price determined by the Appropriate Commission.

• If a distribution licensee fails to supply electricity within the period specified in the
sub- section (1) he shall liable to penalty which may extend to Rs 1000/- for each
day of default.

• Exceptions for duty to Electricity:

• The distribution licensee in pursuance to section 43, in according to such tariffs

fixed from time to time and conditions of his licensee.
• Charges of electricity supplied by Distribution licensee shall be
• Fixed in accordance to principles by the concerned State Commission.
• The charges may be published in an adequate publicity for such charges and
prices.
• The charges for electricity supplied by the distribution licensee may include
• Fixed charges in addition to charge for actual electricity supplied.
• Rent or other charges in respect of electrical meter or electrical plant provided by
distribution licensee.
• The distribution licensee shall not show undue preference to any person or
class of persons or discrimination against any person or class of persons.
• The charges fixed by distribution licensee shall be in accordance to the provisions
of this act and regulations made by on behalf of the concerned State Commission.

Power to Recover Expenditure:

• State Commission by regulations, authorize a distribution licensee to charge from
person requiring a supply of electricity in pursuance of section 43 any expenses
reasonably incurred in providing any electric line or electric plant used for the purpose
of giving the supply.

Power to Recover Security:

• Subject to provisions of this section a distribution licensee may require any person
who require supply of electricity in pursuance of section 43, to give him reasonable
security as may be determined by the regulations for payment to him of all money
which may become due to him.
• In respect of electricity supplied to such person or
• Where any electric line or electric plant or meter is to be provided for supply of
electricity to such person, in respect of provision of such line or meter or plant.

Persons fails to give such security the distribution licensee may if he thinks to fit,
refuse to give supply of electricity or to provide a line or plant or meter for the period
during which failure continues.

15
.

• Where any person has not given such security as is mentioned in sub-section (1) or the
security given by any has become invalid or insufficient, the distribution licensee may,
by notice, require that person, within 30 days after the service of the notice, to give him
reasonable security for the payment of all monies which may become due to him in
respect of the supply of electricity or provisions of such line or plant or meter.

• If the person referred to in sub-section (2) fails to give such security, the distribution
licensee may, if he thinks fit, discontinue the supply of electricity for the period during
which the failure continues.

• The distribution licensee shall pay interest equivalent to the bank rate or more, as may
be specified by the concerned State Commission, on the security referred to in sub-
section (1) and refund such security on the request of the person who gave such
security.

• A distribution licensee shall not be entitled to require security in pursuance of clause

(a) of sub-section (1) if the person requiring the supply is prepared to take the supply
through a pre payment meter.

Additional terms and supply:

• A distribution licensee may require any person who requires a supply of electricity in
pursuance of section 43 to accept-

• Any restrictions which may be imposed for the purpose of enabling the
distribution licensee to comply with the regulations made under section 53.
• Any terms restricting any liability of the distribution licensee for economic
loss resulting from negligence of the person to whom the electricity supplied

Agreements with respect to Supply or Purchase of electricity:

• Where the Appropriate Commission has allowed open access to certain consumers
under section 42, such consumers not withstanding the provisions contained clause (d)
of sub-section (1) of section 62, may enter into agreement with any person for supply
or purchase of electricity on such terms and conditions (including tariff) as may be
agreed upon by them.

The Electricity Supply Code:

• The State Commission shall specify Electricity supply code to provide for recovery of
electricity charges, intervals for billing of electricity charges, disconnection of supply of
electricity for non-payment thereof, restoration of supply of electricity, tampering,
distress or damage to electrical plant, electric lines or meter, entry of distribution
licensee or any person acting on his behalf for disconnecting supply and removing the
meter, entry for replacing, altering or maintaining electric lines or electric plant or
meter.

Other business of distribution licensees:

• A distribution licensees may, with prior intimation to the Appropriate Commission,
engage in any other business for optimum utilization of its assets.

16
.

• Provided that a proportion of the revenues derived from such business shall, as may
be specified by the concerned State Commission, be utilized for reducing its charges for
wheeling.
• Provided further that the distribution licensee shall maintain separate accounts for
each such business undertaking to ensure that distribution business neither subsides
in any way such business undertaking nor encumbers its distribution asserts in any
way to support such business.
• Provided also that nothing contained in this section shall apply to a local authority
engaged before the commencement of this Act in the business of distribution of
electricity.

Electricity trader:
• Without prejudice to the provisions contained in clause (c) of section 12 , the
Appropriate Commission may, specify the technical requirement, capital adequacy
requirement and credit worthiness for being an electricity trader.

• Every electricity trader shall discharge such duties, in relation to supply and trading in
electricity, as may be specified by the Appropriate Commission.

Safety and electricity supply:

• The Authority may, in consultation with the State Govt. specify suitable measures for –

• Protecting the public including the persons engaged in the generation,

transmission or distribution or trading of electricity, or use of electricity supplied
or installation, maintenance or use of any electric line or electric plant.

• Eliminating or reducing the risks of personal injury to any person, or damage to

property to any person or interference with use of such property.

• Prohibiting the supply or transmission of electricity except by means of a system

which conforms to the specifications as may be specified.

• Giving notice in the specified form to the Appropriate Commission and the
Electrical Inspector, of accidents and failures of supplies or transmissions of
electricity

• Keeping by a Generating company or licensee the maps, plans and sections relating to
supply or transmission of electricity.

• Inspection of maps, plans and sections by any person authorized by it or by Electrical

Inspector or by any person on payment of specified fee.
• Specifying action to be taken in relation to any electric line or electrical plant, or any
electrical appliance under the control of a consumer for the purpose of eliminating or
reducing the risk of personal injury or damage to property or interference with its use.

17
.

Control of transmission and use of electricity:

• Save as otherwise exempted under this Act, no person other than the Central
Transmission utility or a State Transmission utility, or a licensee shall transmit
or use electricity at a rate exceeding two hundred and fifty watts and one
hundred volts.

• In any street, or
• In any place

• In which one hundred or more persons are ordinarily likely to be assembled ; or

• Which is a factory within the meeting of the Factories Act, 1948 (63 of 1948) or
a mine within the meaning of the Mines Act, 1952 (35 of 1952) or

• To which the State Govt. by general or special order, declares the provision of this sub-
section to apply, without giving, before the commencement of transmission or use of
electricity, not less than seven days notice in writing of his intention to the Electrical
inspector and to the District Magistrate or the Commissioner of police , as the case may
be, containing particulars of the electrical installation and plant, if any, the nature and
the purpose of supply and complying with such of the provisions of part XVI of this Act,
as may be applicable.

• Provided that nothing in this section shall apply to electricity used for public carriage
of passengers, animals or goods, on, or for the lighting or ventilation of the rolling
stock of any railway or tramway subject to the provisions of the Railway Act, 1989
(24 of 1989).

• Where any difference or dispute arises as to whether a place is or is not one in which
100 or more persons are ordinarily likely to be assembled, the matter shall be referred
to the State Govt. and the decisions of the State Govt. thereon shall be final.

• The provisions of this section shall be binding on the Government.

Use, etc., of meters:

• No licensee shall supply electricity, after the expiry of two years from the appointed
date, except through installation of a correct meter in accordance with the regulations
to be made in this behalf by the Authority.

• Provided that the licensee may require the consumer to give him security for the
price of a meter and enter into an agreement for the hire thereof, unless the
consumer elects to purchase a meter.

• Provided further the State commission may, by notification, extend the said period
of two years for a class or classes of persons or for such area as may be specified in
that notification.

18
.

• For proper accounting and audit in the generation, transmission and distribution or
trading of electricity, the Authority may direct the installation of meters by a
Generating company or licensee at such stages of generation, transmission or
distribution or trading, of electricity and at such locations of generation, transmission
or distribution or trading, as it may deem necessary.

• If a person makes default in complying with the provisions contained in this section or
the regulations made under sub-section(1), the Appropriate Commission may make
such orders as it thinks fit for requiring the default to be made good by the Generating
company or licensee or by any Officers of a company or other association or any other
person who is responsible for its default.

Disconnection of supply in default of payment:

• Where any person neglects to pay any charge for electricity or any sum other than a
charge for electricity due from him to a licensee or the Generating company in respect
of supply, transmission or distribution or wheeling of electricity to him, the licensee, or
Generating company may, after giving not less than fifteen clear days notice in writing,
to such person and without prejudice to his rights to recover such charge or other sum
by suit, cut off the supply of electricity and for that purpose cut or disconnect any
electric supply line or other works being the property of such licensee of the Generating
company through which electricity may have been supplied, transmitted, distributed or
wheeled and may discontinue the supply until such charge or other sum, together with
any expenses incurred by him in cutting off and reconnected the supply, are paid, but
no longer:

Provided that the supply of electricity shall not be cut off if such person
deposits, under protest –

• An amount equal to the sum claimed from him. Or

• The electricity charges due from him for each month calculated on the basis of a
average charge for electricity paid by him during the preceding six months,
whichever is less, pending disposal of any dispute between him and the
licensee.

• Not withstanding anything contained in any other law for the time being in force, no
sum due from any consumer, under this section shall be recoverable after the
period of 2 yrs from the date when such sum became first due unless such sum
has been shown continuously as recoverable as arrear of charges for electricity
supplied and the licensee shall not cut off the supply of the electricity.

Standards of performance of licensee:

• The Appropriate Commission may, after consultation with the licensees and persons
likely to affected, specify standards of performance of a licensee or a class of
licensees.

19
.

• If a licensee fails to meet the standards specified under sub-section (1) without
prejudice to any penalty which may be imposed or prosecution be initiated, he shall be
liable to pay such compensation to the person affected as may be determined by the
Appropriate Commission.
• Provided that before determination of compensation, the concerned licensee shall be
given a reasonable opportunity of being heard.
• The Compensation determined under sub-section (2) shall be paid by the concerned
licensee within ninety days of such determination.

Different standards of performance by licensee:

• The Appropriate Commission may specify different standards under sub-section (1) of
section 57 for a class or classes of licensees.

Information with respect to levels of performance:

• Every licensee, shall within the period specified by the Appropriate Commission,
furnish to the Commission the following information, namely:-
• level of performance achieved under sub-section (1) of section 57.
• The number of cases in which compensation was made under sub-section (2) of section
57 and the aggregate amount of the compensation.
• The Appropriate Commission shall at least once in every year arrange for the
publication, in such form and manner as it considers appropriate, of such of the
information furnished to it under sub-section (1).

Market Domination:

• The Appropriate Commission may issue such directions as it considers

appropriate a licensee or a Generating company if such licensee or Generating
company enters into a agreement or abuses its dominant portion or enter into a
combination which is likely to cause or causes an adverse effect on competition
in electricity industry.

Tariff

Tariff Regulations: The Appropriate Commission shall, subject to the provisions of

this Act specify terms and conditions for determination of tariff and doing so shall be
guided by the following.

• Principles and Methodologies specify by the Central Commission for

determination of tariff applicable to Generating companies and transmission
licensees.
• The generation, transmission, distribution and supply of electricity are
conducted on commercial principles.
• The factors which would encourage competition, efficiency, economical use of
the resources good performance and optimum investments.

20
.

• Safe guarding consumers interest and at the same time recovery of the
cost of electricity in a reasonable manner.
• The principles regarding efficiency in performance
• Multi year tariff principles
• Tariff progressively reflects the cost of electricity and also reduces and
eliminated the cross subsidies within the period to be specified by Appropriate
Commission.
• The Promotion of cogeneration and generation of electricity from renewable
source of energy
• National electricity policy and tariff policy
• Provided terms and condition for determination of tariff under electricity
supplied at 1948 (54 of 1948) the electricity regulating commission Act
1998 ( 14 of 1998 ) and the enactments specified in the schedules as they
stood immediately before the appointed date shall continue to apply for period
of one year or until the terms and condition for tariff are specified under this
section, which ever is earlier.

Determination of Tariff

• The Appropriate Commission shall determine the tariff in accordance with the provision
of this Act for

• Supply of electricity by a Generating Company to a distribution licensee.

• Provided the Appropriate Commission may in case of shortage of supply of

electricity fix the minimum and maximum ceiling of the tariff for sale or
purchase of electricity in pursuance of an agreement, enter to between
Generating company and the licensee or between the licensees, for a
period not exceeding 1 year to ensure reasonable prices of electricity:

• Transmission of electricity
• Wheeling of electricity
• Retail sale of electricity
• In case of distribution of electricity in same area by two or more distribution
licensees the App. Commission may for promoting competition among distribution
licensee fix only maximum ceiling of tariff for retail sale of electricity.
• The [Link] may require a licensee or a Generating company to furnish
separate details, as may be specified in respect of Generation. Transmission and
Distribution for determination of tariff.
• The App. Comm. Shall not. While determining the tariff under this Act show undue
preference to any consumer of electricity but may differentiate according to the
consumers load factor, power factor, voltage, total consumption of electricity during
any specified period or the time at which the supply is required or the Geographical
position of any area, the nature of supply and the purpose for which the supply is
required.

21
.

• No tariff or part of any tariff may ordinarily be amended more frequently than once in
any financial year, except in respect of any changes expressly permitted under the
terms of any fuel surcharge formula as may be specified.

• The Commission may require a licensee or Gen. com to comply such procedure as may
be specified for calculating the excepted revenues from the tariff and charges which
he or it is permitted to recover.

• If any licensee or [Link]. Recovers a price or charge exceeding the tariff determine
under this section, the excess amount shall be recover by the person who has paid
such price or charge along with interest equivalent to the bank rate without prejudice
to any other liability incurred by the licensee.

Determination of Tariff by bidding process

• Not withstanding anything contained in section 62, the [Link]. Shall adopt the
tariff if such tariff has been determined through transparent process of bidding in
accordance with the guidelines issued by the Central Govt.

Procedure for tariff order:

• An application for determination of tariff under section 62 shall be made by a

[Link]. or licensee in such manner and accompanied by fee, determined by
regulations.
• Every applicant shall publish an application, in such abridged form and manner, as
specified by App. Comm.
• The App. Comm. Shall, within 120 days from a receipt of an application under
subsection (1) and after considering the suggestion and objections received from the
public.
• Issue tariff order accepting the application with modifications or such conditions as
may be specified in the order.
• Reject the application for reasons to be recorded in writing if application is not in
accordance to provisions of this Act and rules and regulations made their under the
provisions of any other law for time being in force.
• The applicant can be given reasonable opportunity or being heard before rejecting
his application.
• The Appropriate Commission Within 7 days of the order, shall send a copy to App.
[Link] Authority and the concerned licensees and to the person concerned.
• Not withstanding anything contained in part X, the tariff for any inter State supply,
transmission or wheeling of electricity, as the case may be, involving the territories of
two states may, upon application made to it by the parties intending to undertake
such supply, transmission or wheeling, be determined under this, section by the State
Commission having jurisdiction in respect of the licensee who intends to distribute
electricity and make payment there for.
• A tariff order shall, unless amended or revoked, continue to be in force for such period
as may be specified in the tariff order.

22
.

Provision of subsidiary by State Government:

• If the State Government requires the grant of any subsidy to any consumer or class
of consumers in the tariff determined by the State Commission under section 62, the
State Govt. shall not withstanding any direction which may be given under section 108
pay, in advance and in such manner as may be specified, the amount to
compensate the person affected by the grant of subsidy in the manner the State
Commission may direct, as a condition for the licensee or any other person
concerned to implement the subsidy provided for the State Govt.

• If no direction of State Government shall be operative if the payment is not made

in accordance to the provisions contain in the section and the tariff fixed by the
State Commission shall be applicable from the date of issue of the orders by the
commission in this regard.

Development of the Market:

• The App. Comm. Shall endeavor to promote the development of market including
Trading in power in such manner as may be specified and shall be guided by National
Electric policy referred to section 3 in this regard.

CENTRAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY

• There shall be a body to be the Central Electricity Authority exercise such functions
and perform such duties as are assigned to it under this Act.

• The Authority shall consists of not more than fourteen Members including its
Chairperson of whom not more than eight shall be full–time Members to be appointed
by the Central Government.

• The Members of the authority shall be appointed from amongst persons of ability,
integrity and standing who have knowledge of, and adequate experience and capacity
in dealing with problems relating to engineering, finance, commerce, economics or
industrial matters, and at least one Member shall be appointed from each of the
following categories namely:-
• Engineering with specialization in design, construction, operation and
maintenance of generating stations;
• Engineering with specialization in transmission and supply of electricity.
• Applied research in the field of electricity.
• Applied economics, accounting, commerce or finance.

Functions and Duties of Authority:

• Advise the Central Govt. on the matters relating to the national electricity policy,
formulate short-term and perspective plans for development of the electricity system
and co-ordinate the activities of the planning agencies for the optimal utilization of

23
.

resources to sub serve the interests of the national economy and to provide reliable
and affordable electricity for all consumers.
• Specify the technical standards for construction of electrical plants, electric lines and
connectivity to the grid.
• Specify the safety requirements for construction, operation and maintenance of
electrical plants and electric lines.
• Specify the Grid Standards for operation and maintenance of transmission lines.
• Specify the conditions for installation of meters for transmission and supply of
electricity.
• Promote and assist in the timely completion of schemes and projects for improving
and augmenting the electricity system.
• Promote measures for advancing the skill of persons engaged in the electricity
industry.
• Advise the Central Govt. on any matter on which its advice is sought or make
recommendation to that Govt. or any matter if, in the opinion of the Authority, the
recommendation would help in improving the generation, transmission, trading,
distribution and utilization of electricity .
• Collect and record the data concerning the generation, transmission, trading,
distribution and utilization of electricity and carry out studies relating to cost,
efficiency, competitiveness and such like matters.
• Make public from time to time the information secured under this Act, and provide from
the publication of reports and investigations.
• Promote research in matters affecting the generation, transmission, distribution and
trading of electricity.
• Carry out or cause to be carried out, any investigation for the purpose of generating or
distributing or transmitting electricity.
• Advise any State Govt. licensees or the Generating company on such matters which
shall enable them to operate or maintain the electricity system under their ownership
or control in an improved manner and where necessary, in co-ordination with any
other Govt. licensee or the Generating company owning or having the control of another
electricity system.
• Advise the App. Govt. and the App. Comm. On all technical matters relating to
generation, transmission and distribution of electricity and
• Discharge such other functions as may be provided under this Act.

Function of Central Regulatory commission

• Regulate tariff generating companies owned or controlled by Central Govt.

• Regulate tariff other than owned or controlled by Central Govt. and sale of electricity
for more than one state.
• Regulate inter State transmission of Electricity .
• Determine tariff for inter state transmission of Electricity.
• Issue licenses to persons to function as transmission licenses and Electricity trader
with respect to inter state operations.
• Adjudicate disputes involving generating and transmission licenses (Refer any dispute
for arbitration.)
• To levy fees for the purpose of the act.

24
.

• Specify Grid Code having regard to Grid Standards.

• Enforce standards for quality, continuity and reliability service by the licenses.
• To fix trading margin – inter state trading of electricity
• Discharge other functions as may be assigned under this act

Advice Central Govt.

• Formulation of National Electricity policy and tariff policy.

• Promotion of competition , efficiency and economy in activities of the electricity
industry.
• Promotion of investment in Electricity industry.
• Any other matter referred to the central commission by the Govt.

Functions of state commission

Determine the tariff – Generation, Supply, Transmission and wheeling of Electricity,

wholesale, bulk or retail within the state.
– Open access permitted to the category of consumers shall determine the
wheeling charges and surcharge.
• Regulate electricity purchase and procurement process of Distribution licensees
including prices electricity procured from Generating companies or licensees or from
other sources to agreement of purchase of power for distribution within the state.
• Facilitate intra – state transmission and wheeling of electricity
• Issue licences to persons seeking to act as transmission licensees, distribution
licensees and electricity traders with respect to operations within the state
• Promote co generation and generation of electricity for renewable sources of energy
providing suitable measures for connectivity with gird and sale of electricity to any
person, specify the purchase of electricity from such sources, a percentage of the total
consumption of electricity in the area of distribution licensees
• Adjudicate disputes between the licenses and generating companies refer any dispute
for arbitration.
• Levy fee for the purpose of this act.
• Specify the state grid code consistent with grid code under central gird code.
• Enforce standards respect to quality, continuity and reliability of service by licensees.
• Fix trading margin for intra – state trading of electricity
• Discharge any other function assigned under this act.

THE SCHEDULE ENACTMENTS

1. The Orissa Electricity Reform Act, 1995 (Orissa Act No. 2 of 1996)
2. The Haryana Electricity Reform Act, 1997 (Haryana Act No. 10 of 1998)
3. The Andhra Pradesh Electricity Reform Act 1998 (Andhra Pradesh Act No. 30 of 1998)
4. The Uttara Pradesh Electricity Reform Act, 1999 (Uttara Pradesh Act No. 24 of 1999)
5. The Karnataka Electricity Reform Act, 1999 (Karnataka Act. No. 25 of 1999)
6. The Rajasthan Electricity Reform Act, 1999 (Rajasthan Act No. 23 of 1999)
7. The Delhi Electricity Reform Act, 2000 (Delhi Act No. 2 of 2001)

25
.

8. The Madhya Pradesh Vidhyut Sudhar Adhiniyam, 2000 (Madhya Pradesh Act No. 4 of
2001)
9. The Gujarat Electricity Industry (Reorganisation and Regulation) Act, 2003 (Gujarat Act
No. 24 of 2003).
• Re-organization of Board
• Appellate Tribunal for Electricity
• Theft of Electricity and penalties
• Miscellaneous
• The Electricity Rules, 2005.

26
.

CHAPTER -3

Preparation of Estimates

TYPES OF ESTIMATES

MAJOR CAPITAL WORKS:-

1) GENERATING STATIONS
2) TRANSMISSION LINES
3) MAIN RECEIVING STATIONS
4) SUB STATIONS
5) ALL OTHER HIGH VALUE WORKS
6) CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDING

MINOR CAPITAL WORKS

1) SERVICE CONNECTION ESTIMATES

2) SELF EXECUTION WORKS
3) IMPROVEMENT WORKS
4) EXENSION WORKS
5) SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT WORKS
6) BHAGYA JYOTI WORKS/KUTEER JYOTHI
7) R E C WORKS
8) ELECTIFICATION OF VILLAGES,HAMLETS,HARIJAN BASTHIES,TRIBAL COLONIES &
TOWNS, TANDAS
9) GANGA KALYANA YOJANE
10) ENERGISATION OF I.P SETS
11) RAJIV GANDHI GRAMINA VIDYUDI KARANA
12) NIRANTHARA JYOTI YOJANE
13) DEPOSIT CONTRIBUTION WORKS

MAINTENANACE & REPAIRS, RENEWAL & REPLACEMENT WORKS.

(Revenue Expenditure works)

To maintain all major capital & minor capital works

FOR DEPOSIT CONTRIBUTION WORKS:- As per the Format enclosed Typical cost Data
Sheet - D.

FOR OTHER WORKS:- As per the Format enclosed Typical cost Data Sheet - A,B,C.

ELECTRICAL INSPECTORATE CHARGES TO BE ADDED TO THE FOLLOWING.

27
.

All H.T lines, All transformer centers, All M.S Buildings having more than 15 mtrs(500)
height,lift,D.G sets more than 10 KVA.
DEPOSIT CONTRIBUTION WORKS

In this case the work will be carried out buy collecting necessary cost of the estimate from the
parties/any local bodies carried out departmentally as per the party request such as shifting
of assets, providing new lines etc.
Cost of the materials
Cost of labour
Employees cost @ 20% on cost of materials & labour charges
Contingencies @ 5% on total
As for as possible when requested for shifting of 111KV line care should be taken to form
new 11KV line & then to release the existing line to minimize the interruption .If possible
shifting can be made by using old and new materials for LT lines.

SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT WORKS

In this case system losses will be reduced & reliability of power supply will be increased.
Regrouping of transformers centers
Shifting of transformers to load centers
Inter linking of 11 KV lines
Conversion of 4.6KV lines/13.2KV lines
Installation of capacitor
Drawing of new lines/link lines
Express feeders for shortening of routes & bifurcation of loads
Increase the size of the conductor
Installations of new TCs to reduce the over on existing TCs
(Resulting in voltage improvement & reduction of line losses)

IMPROVEMENT WORKS

Following works will be involved in improvement works

Replacement of baliga poles
Replacing of copper conductor
Replacement of transformer by higher capacity
Renovation of sub-stations
Renovation of transformer centers

EXTENSION & IMPROVEMENT WORKS

Augmentation of station to meet the load demands

Construction of sub transmission lines
Extension of distribution system
Augmentation of capacity of pole mounted S/S to make availability of additional power
supply to new development areas

28
.

EXTENSION WORKS

Extension of 11KV lines

Extension of LT lines
Installation of transformers to meet the anticipated loads
Extension of new lines for new connections (not for service connection)

BHAGYA JYOTI SCHEMES

The beneficiaries will be identified by concern village

panchayats/municipals/corporation.
In this case only 15 meters service main will be allowed
Only 18 unit's current benefit will be given, for the consumption above normal tariff will
be charged.
Spiral earthling will be allowed.

RAJIV GANGHI GRAMEENA VIDYUDI KARANA (RGGVY)

This programme started during April 2005.90% of the subsidiary will be given by govt
of India & the balance of 10% will be given by R.E.C.
The aims of this programme are
All living places in the village to be electrified
Necessary infrastructure to be made to electrify all the houses in the village
To extend the free electricity to the people those who are in the below the poverty line
To supply all the basic amenities
To provide sufficient capacities sub stations at necessary places(33/11KV or 66/11KV
sub stations)
To provide sufficient capacities of distribution transformers.

REVENUE EXPENDITURE WORKS/REPAIR/MAINTENANCE

Replacement of faulty transformer

Damaged insulators
Cutouts
Gang operating switches
Deteriorated service mains
Damaged supports
Equipments
Maintenance works
Shifting of assets with in the division
Replacement of faulty equipments
Dismantling of assets
Repairs to electrical equipments & buildings

29
.

RAJIV GANDHI GRAMINA VIDYUDIKARANA YOJANE

1) RGGVY, was launched in April 2005 by merging all out going schemes.
2) 90%grant will be provides by central Govt & 10 5 grant will be provided by R E
C to the state Govt.
3) R E C is the nodal agency for this Scheme.

AIMS OF R G G V Y

1) Electrification of all village & habitation as per new definition

2) Supply of electricity to all rural house holds
3) Free electricity to B P L families

INFRASTRUCTURE

1) R E D B is the back bone to provide 33/11KV or 66/11KV sub stations

2) Village Electrification Infrastructure(VEI) with provision of adequate capacity of
distribution transformers
3) Decentralized Distributed Generation(DDG) System based on conventional & non
conventional energy source where grid supply is not feasible

IMPLEMENTATION & CONDITION

1) Preparation of district detail project report for execution on turn key basis
2) involvement of central public sector of power ministry in implementation of projects
3) certification of electrified villages by the concerned Gram Panchayats
4) Deployment of franchise for the management for better consumer service & reduction
in losses
5) Undertaking by the state Govts to supply the electricity minimum 6-8 Hrs to RGVVY net
work
6) Making provision of requisite revenue subsidy by the state
7) Release of funds linked to achievement of pre determined mile stones
8) Electronic transfer of funds right up to the contractor level
9) Notification of R E plans by the state Govts

L.T. INDUSTRIAL & COMMERCIAL POWER INSTALLATIONS

Applications to be Registered at Sub Division Office Industrial Layouts,

KIADB/KSSIDC/KEONICS/Others, the entire work will be carried out by self Execution 10%
supervision charges will be collected.

Applicable to HT/EHT
Application to be registered at division office Applicant should furnish the name plate
details/Layout plan (If the applicant not willing to avail p/s & agreement not executed

30
.

amount will be refunded after deducting 10%) Work to be completed with in 90 Days after the
intimation, otherwise treated as cancelled
If requested for extension may be granted. The applicant shall be installed GOS/HG Fuse
unit, circuit breaker, inter locking arrangements to be made to Isolator circuit breaker shall be
installed where the CD is above 1000 KVA
All materials and equipments shall be approved/ISI make and proof
To be furnished for having purchased
After servicing the entire service line and other accessories taken by the licencee for
maintenance purpose.
12 months guarantee to be given to licencee for the materials and accessories after service
CL should not exceed CD, this condition will not apply for Transformer
Test and commision certificate to be obtained by the electric inspectorate
In case EHT consumer HT Electronic type trivector meter you be provided for recording
PF/CD/Consumption
HT/EHT consumer permitted to use the P/S with in his permises for bonafide use.

COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL/COMPLEXES/[Link]
Requisitioned Load -------- 25 kw or MORE
Built up area more than 500 Sq. mtrs.
Space to be given for providing T/C
ISD & MSD to be p[aid by the applicant based on requisition load if requisition load is 75KW,
100 KVA Transformer can be permitted
Work to be executed on self execution basis
Pannal board should be 0.6 mtrs. up to 1.6 mtrs. from the ground level
2 Nos. service cables to be provided along with C.O.s
Master metering cubical/Master meter, MCCB, ELCB for individual houses
Approval from the electrical inspectorate is required.

VILLAGE ELECTRIFICATION UNDER SPECIAL SCHEME

Electrification of Harijan/Basthies/Tribal/Colonies/Thandas etc.,

ARRANGING TEMPORARY POWER SUPPLY

To be serviced only by fixing the meter
To applied at Sub Division or section office
No Reg. Fee and processing fee is required
Only service charge @ Rs.550/- per installation + ACC
Estimated consumption Charges 12 Units/Day/KW
(If the load is 50 kw/67hp consumer has to pay fixed + acc)
Permission from electrical inspectorate is required where 100 or more people gathered
Up to 5 HP DOL Starter
Above 5 HP up to 30 HP --- Star/Delta/Auto Transformer Starter
Above 30 HP ---- Squirrel cage --- Auto Transformer starter
Would Rote ---- Rotor Resistance starter

POINTS TO BE OBSERVED FOR ESTIMATE

S.R. is not applicable to REC Works
Squirrel conductor should not be used
Minimum size of the conductor is Rabbit
In urban both LT/HT lines to be Rabbit
In Rural Rabbit for HT & Weasel for LT
For Break down works 25% more L/C can be given

31
.

Material code to be mentioned

ISI Materials to be used
Guy Sets
Common Guy 'A' Type Guy, Self Stay Guy, 'Y' Guy, Flying Guy, Strut Guy, Strom Guy.
[Link] for 11 KV Lines
Conductor Requirement
Inspectorate charges
Acual EST for Below 1 KM line
Concreting of Poles
GOS/HG Fuse for all Trans centres
LT Protection Kit up to 100 KVA TC & LT DB with MCCB at Rural Areas
L.E.C. Can purchase as per rates in the EST up to 25%
Releasing of L/C and cost of Released materials
Square section RCC 9 Mtrs. long single pole T.C. Kit up to 100 KVA TC
11 Mtr. SPUN pole T.C. Kit for 100 KVA TC & above
25% Extra cost on materials for galvonised items
90% labour for releasing the materials
Contengencies @ 3% on total
All 11 KV Lines & TCs, Lifts in [Link], BLDGS Height more than
15Mtrs. [Link] above 10 KVA

LT Supply ------- Supply Voltage 650 Volts & Below

HT Supply ------- Supply Voltage above 650 Volts up to 33,000 Volts
EHT Supply ------ Supply voltage above 330000 Volts
Assesed Loads -- Lighting -- 40W Each outlet, in case CGL Actual Load shall be taken -- Each
W.P. Taken as 40W & 30% of Such W.P.
Heating -- Actual Load connecting to out let each W.P. taken as 1 KW & 10% such W.P
L.T. Supply ---- Single phase 230V, 3 PH 400 Volts
H.T Supply ---- 3 PH 11 KV/13.2 KV/33 KV
EHT Supply --- Upto 5 KW, Motive power upto 4 KW, Public Lighting upto 10 KW
3 Phase ------ 50 KW/59 KVA/67HP
(If consumer want HT supply within 50 KW the CD should be 25 KVA)

H.T --- CD Above 50 KW upto 2000 KVA on 11 KV

CD above 2000 KVA upto 7500 KVA on 33 KV
CD above 2000 KVA upto 20000 KVA on 66 KV
CD above 7500 KVA upto 35000 KVA on 110 KV
CD above 20000 KVA ------------ on 220 KV

Special Scheme by Govt ---- Bhagya Jyothi/Kuteer Jyothi

Poorer classes of Society as per approved scheme
Approval of the Commission & Financial Implication on the
Revenue Dept. by the Govt.

I.P. Sets ---- To be serviced with the meter

Estimate, Power Sanction, CR, WD, Agreement & Payment of Security Deposit.
Appln to be registered at S/D along with the water
Right Certificate, Khata Certificate, Records of Rights (Geni & Phani Pathrike) From the
Competent
Authority, NOC from Irrigation Dept/PWD/Revenue Dep.

32
.

In the Water lift from river/Channal/Sub Channal/Nallah ETC. The Feasibility for A/P/S to
IP Sets shall be prescribed by the Licencee with the with the
approv of the commission No P/S will be arranged to IP Sets
DUG with in RADI 250 MTRS of Drinking water supply bore
wells of local authority
The P/S will be arranged as per the Directive of Govt of Karnataka
Capoacitors to be fixed to all IP Sets with Required capacity.

Current Carrying capacity of ACSR Conductors

[Link]. Conductor AMPS @ 30 30*C AMPS @50*C Rest OHMS/KM
1 SQURREL 70 97 1.374 (1.403)
2 WEASEL 100 123 0.9116 (0.9352)
3 RABBIT 148 183 0.5449 (0.5560)
4 CAT 229 285 0.3020
5 DOG 254 311 0.2475 (0.2810)
6 OWL 315 378 0.212
7 COYOTE 286 367 0.2214
8 PATRIDGE 358 445 0.213
9 WOLF 343 423 0.1844 (0.1884)
10 LYNX 385 475 0.1589
11 PANTHER 427 526 0.1375 (0.1400)
12 KUNDHA 696 863 0.07434 (0.07359)
13 ZEEBRA 780 890 0.06723 (0.06915
14 DEER 726 896 0.06786
15 DRAKE 710 875 0.0715
16 MOOSE 830 1028 0.05517 (0.05633
17 FALCON 1150 1410 0.0358

CONDUCTOR CONSTANTS
Conductor %Reg/100 KVA KM @ 0.8 P.P.

Conductor Constant 415 Volts 11000 Volts

Sqirrel 88.637 0.1294

Weasel 62.915 0.093

Rabbit 42.305 0.0636

Coyote ------- 0.041

%VR= KVAKM*CNDR CONSTANT

---------------------------------------
DF*100

[Link]:
For [Link] ± 6%
For HT Lines ± 9%
For EHT Lines ± 12.5%

33
.

A. Typical Cost Data Sheet for preparation of estimates on LABOUR CONTRACT

[Link]. Particulars Amount (In Rs.)

1 Materials Cost
2 Labour Charges
3 Locality Allowance @ ----% on Labour
Charges (Applicable for areas mentioned
in page No......)
4 Service Tax @ 10.30% on Total Labour
Charges (2+3)
5 Contribution towards Employee Provident
Fund charges & ESI on Total labour
charges at 13.61%
6 ** Transportation cost from stores to site
(Wherever applicable at 2% on material
cost)
7 * Contingencies @ 2% on total material &
labour
8 Employees cost @ 10% on total labour
charges (2+3)
9 Staturoty charges as per actuals
(Inspectorate charges, civic body charges
etc.,)
10 Compensation cost for free cutting etc., as
per approved norms
11 Total cost of estimate in Rs.

Note :

* 1) All the materials reqired for execution of works are included in the cost date sheet.
The contingency at 2% provisioned is only to take care of unforseen material and labour and
when applicable shall be paid after the specific approval of the Executive Engineer by way of
issue of an O.M.

** 2) This is to cover the admissible transportation charges, labour for loading and
unloading and for carrying the materials by head load, which shall be limited to actuals.

3) It shall not be construed that all the above amounts mentioned in the estimates has to
be paid to the contractor. The payment shall be restricted to the quantum of work done.

4) The LEC's carrying out works on labour contract basis are authorised to purchase
small items other than poles, contractors, transformers, lightning Arrestors, [Link],
meters and GOS at SR rates wherever the execution of the work is held up due to non
availability of such materials provided the cost of such purchase is limited to 5% of the total
estimated amount and after the specific approval of the Executive Engineer by way of O.M.

34
.

B. Typical Cost Data Sheet for preparation of Estimates for TOTAL TURNKEY

[Link] Particulars Amount (in Rs.)

1 Material cost
2 Labour charges
3 Service Tax @ 10.30% on labour charges

Contribution towards Employee Provident Fund

4 Charges & ESI on Total labour charges at
13.61%

Transportation cost from stores to site @ 2% on

5
material cost

6 Contingencies @ 2% on material + labour cost

7 Watch and ward cost @ 1% on material cost

Insurance cost against theft & accident @ 1%
8
on material cost

Performance guarantee and loss of interest on

9
margin money of BG @ 2.5% of the value of BG

Stuatory charges as per actuals (Inspectorate

10
charges, civic body charges etc.,)

Compensation cost for tree cutting etc., as per

11
approved norms.
12 Total Cost in Rs.

Note:
1) While preparing the estimate provision has to be made specifically for the conductor
accessories such as Wedge/PG clamps, Alkathene Tube, etc., duly assessing the
quantity.
2) The contingency at 2% provisioned is only to take care of unforeseen material and
labour and is not payable to the contractor at 2% but payable at actuals.
3) The materials to be produced by the agency shall conform to ESCOMs specifications
and got inspected before execution of work. The materials shall be procured by the
agencies from the approved vendors only. (Please see circular No. BESCOM/BC-20/F-
1111/2008-09/Dtd.24-06-2010)
4) Value of the Bank guarantee is 10% of material and labour.

35
.

C. Typical Cost Data Sheet for preparation of Estimates for PARTIAL TURNKEY

[Link] Particulars Amount (In Rs.)

Material cost
1 a. BESCOM portion
B. Agency portion
2 Labour charges
3 Service Tax @ 10.30% on labour charges
Contribution towards Employee Provident
4 Fund Charges & ESI on Total labour charges
at 13.61%
Transportation cost from stores to site @ 2%
5
on material cost on both 1a. and 1b.
Contingencies @ 2% on material + labour
6
cost
7 Watch and ward cost @ 1% on material cost
Insurance cost against theft & accident @
8
1% on material cost
Performance guarantee and loss of interest
9 on margin money of BG @ 2.5% of the value
of BG
Stuatory charges as per actuals
10 (Inspectorate charges, civic body charges
etc.,)
Compensation cost for tree cutting etc., as
11
per approved norms.
12 Total Cost in Rs.

36
.

D. Typical Cost Data Sheet for preparation of estimates on Deposit

contribution work

[Link] Particulars Amount (In Rs.)

1 Material cost
2 Labour charges

Locality Allowance @ …..% on labour

3 charges (applicable for areas mentioned in
page no.396)

4 Service Tax @ 10.30% on labour charges

Contribution towards Employee Provident

5 Fund Charges & ESI on Total labour charges
at 13.61%

Transportation cost from stores to site @ 2%

6
on material cost wherever applicable

% *Contingencies @ 2% on Total material &

7
labour

Employees cost @ 20% on total material +

8
labour Charges (1+2+3)

Statutory charges such as Road cutting

9 charges payable to BBMP or local authorities
as per actuals

Government electrical inspectorate charges

10
as per actuals

Compensation cost for tree cutting etc., as

11
per approved norms

12 Total Cost in Rs.

Note:
1) The estimate is only provisional
2) The final cost of the work shall be workedout after complition of the work and
difference amount as to be collected from the applicant before commissioning.

37
.

E. Typical Cost Data Sheet for preparation of estimates on Self execution work

[Link] Particulars Amount (In Rs.)

1 Material cost

2 Labour charges

Locality Allowance @ …..% on labour

3 charges (applicable for areas mentioned in
page no.398)

*Contigencies @ 2% on Total material &

4
labour

Employees cost @ 20% on total labour

5
Charges (2+3)

Statutory charges such as Road cutting

6 charges payable to BBMP or local authorities
as per actuals

Government electrical inspectorate charges

7
as per actuals

Compensation cost for tree cutting etc., as

8
per approved norms

9 Total Cost of Estimate in Rs.

Note: Supervision charges shall be collected at 10% on all the items from [Link]. 1 to 4.
1) All the matetials required for execution of works have to be arranged by the agencies.
2) No material shall be supplied by ESCOMs.
3) The materials shall conform to ESCOMs specifications and shall be got inspected
before execution of work. The material shall be produced by the agencies from the
ESCOM approved vendors. Bills and Test Certificate in respect of the materials
procured shall be furnished to ESCOms. (Please see circular [Link]/BC-20/F-
1111/2008-09/Dtd. 24-06-2010.

38
.

ACCOUNT CODES & ACCOUNT HEADS

10.1010 To 10.9040. FIXED ASSETTS. Land & Rights, buildings, Ancillary Buildings, Hydraulic
Works, other civil works, Plant & machinery, Miscellaneous equipments, Lines Cables network etc.,
Vehicles, Furnitures & Fixtures, Offices Equipments.

11.1010 TO 11.5090. OTHER CAPITAL EXPENDIRURE FIXED ASSETS. Roads mon Municipal land,
Spare/Service units, Capital spares at Generating stations, Assets taken over from licensees,

12.1000 TO 12.9040. DECLARATION ON FIXED ASSETS (As above items)

13.1000 TO 13.9050. DECLARATION ON OTHER CAPITAL EXPENDITURE.

14.1000 TO 14.9250. CAPITAL WORKS IN PROGRESS (C W I P). Transmission lines,

Step down Stations, LDC & Communication, Transmission Lines, Transformers, Extensions,
Oromoted Vanished Layouts, 11KV Lines Transformers, LT Lines, Improvements, Urban
Distribution Improvement Schemes, Street lights in Towns/cities/villages, Reduction in Line
losses, Installation of Capacitors, Replacement of Distribution Transformers by similar
copacities, REC, SPA Schemes, SI works, Village Electrification, P/S to IP Sets & IP Sets
Under SFS Schemes, P/S to new IP Sets, Sub merged IP Sets of same consumers, Tribal Area
Electrification, Bhagya Jyoti Schemes, Kuteer Jyoti Schemes, Service Connections, Generating
Stations, Diesel DG Cell, Buildings Vehicles, Furniture & Fixtures, Office Equipments, Tools &
Tackles.

15.1200 TO 15.6520. OTHER ACCOUNTS FOR ASSETS AT CONSTRUCTION STAGE. Contract

in progress; Transmission Lines, REC Plan Schemes, Village Electrificaton, Buildings Other Civil Works.
Revenue Expenses pending allocation over Capital
Works, Repair & Maintenance, Administration & General Expenses, Depriciation, Interest, Supervision
Charges, Provision for Completed works, Construction facilities.
16.1020 TO 16.2090. WDV of scrapped assets, WDV of Buildings, Hydraulic works, Other civil works,
Plant & Machinery, Lines Cable Network etc, Vehicles Furniture & Fixtures, Office equipments, WDV of
faulty/dismantled assets (For the items mentioned above).

17.2000 TO 17.3030. Deffered Accounts.

18.1000 TO 18.2000. Intangible assets.
19……………………… .NOT MENTIONED.
20.1100 TO 20.3000. INVESTMENTS.
21……………………… NOT MENTIONED.
22.2100 TO 22.8200. MATERIAL STOCK & RELATED ACCOUNTS.
23.1010 TO 23.9850. RECEIVEABLES AGAINST SUPPLY OF POWER.
24.1100 TO 24.9950. CASH AND BANK.
25.1010 TO 25.5050. ADVANCE TO SUPPLIERS.
26.6010 TO 26.6040. ADVANCE TO CONTRACTORS.
27.1010 TO 27.9000. OTHER LOAN AND ADVANCES.

39
.

28.1010 TO 28.9350. SUNDRY DEBTORS & TRADING ACCOUNT.

29--------30------------- NOT MENTIONED.
31-32-33-34-36-37. INTER UNIT ACCOUNTS.
38-39-40………….. NOT MENTIONED.
41.1010 TO 41.1240. LIABILITY FOR PURCHASE OF POWER.
42.1010 TO 42.5010. LIABILITIES FOR SUPPLIES/WORKS.
43……………………. NOT MENTIONED.
44.1100 TO 44.3300. STAFF RELATED LIABLITIES & PROVISIONS.
45…………………… NOT MENTIONED.
46.1010 TO 46.9090 OTHER LIABILITIES & PROVISIONS.
47………………….. DEPOSITS FOR ELECTRIFICATION/SUPERVISION CHARGES ETC,
DEPOSITS FOR SERVICE CONNECTION
47.3010 TO 47.6090. Advance power charges, New service connection deposits, all types of
DC Works, Deposit works, Ganga Kalyana Scheme, Service connection of
LT/HT consumers, other deposit from consumers.
48.2000 to 48.3500. SUNDRY DEPOSIT FROM CONSUMERS, INTEREST PAYABLE ON
CONSUMER DEPOSITS.
49…………………… NOT MENTIONED.
50.1100 TO 50.3010 BORROWINGS FOR WORKING CAPITAL.
51.1010 TO 51.2320. PAYMENTS DUE ON CAPITAL LIABILITIES.
52.1100 TO 52.5000 & 53.1000 TO 53.9750. CAPITAL LIABILITIES.
54.1000 TO 54.5000. FUND FROM STATE GOVERNMENT.
55.1000 TO 55.4000. CONTRIBUTION, GRANTS & SUBSIDES TOWARDS COST OF CAPITAL
ASSETS.
56.1000 TO 56.6300. RESERVES.
57.1300 TO 57.2000 RESERVE FUNDS.
58.1000 TO 58.2000. SURPLUS.
59 & 60------------- NOT MENTIONED.
61.1010 TO 61.9060. REVENUE FROM SALE OF POWER.
62.2100 TO 62.9180. OTHER INCOME.
63.1100 TO 63.2000 SUBSIDIES & GRANTS.
64---------------------- NOT MENTIONED.
65.2000 TO 65.9000. PRIOR PERIOD OF INCOME.
66-67-68-69---------- NOT MENTIONED.
70.1010 TO 70.9000. POWER PURCHASE ACCOUNT.
71.1500 To 71.9000 Cost of Generation of Power
72-73---------------- Not Mentioned
74.1010 To 74.9000 Repair & Maintenance

40
.

Repair & maintenance to plant & Machinery, MRT, R&D, Telecommunication, Other, power
transformer, Building, Civil works, Hydraulic works, Lines, cables net work, Temporary power supply,
Vehicles & Fixture, office equipment, capital works.

75.1100 to 75.9000 Employment costs.

76.1010 to 76.9000 Administration & General Expenses.
77.1100 to 77.9000 Depreciation & other costs relating to fixed asset.
Amortisations of lease hold articles, building, hydraulic
Works, Civil works, plant & machinery, lines cables net
Works etc, vehicle, Furniture & Fixture, Office Equipment
On capital expenditure, spare units/service units, capital on
Generating station.
Asset decommissioning cost.
-------------------------------------------
Site restoration, Building, Civil works, Generating plant,
Transmission lines, Sub stations,--small & low value of
Assets,losses on scrapping of transformers, plant & Machinery ,fixed
assets,lines cables net works etc vehicle, furniture 7 fixture,office
Equipments.

78.1000 to 78.9100 INTEREST & OTHER FINANCE CHARGES.

79.1100 TO 79.000 OTHER DEBITS TO REVENUE ACCOUNT
80------------------- NOT MENTIONED
81.1000 PROVISION FOR INCME TAX
82------------------- NOT MENTIONED
83.1000 TO 83.8500 PRIOR PERIOD EXPENSES/LOSSES.

IMPORTANT ACCOUNTING HEADS

------------------------------------------------------

Accounting heads are six digit code

First & second ----------------Account group
First, second & third---------Main account code
Fourth & fifth ----------------Sub account with in each main account code.
Sixth ---------------------------General/Voltage class.
0---General (1)400KV (2)220KV (3)110KV (4)66KV (6)33KV (7)11KV& Below.

Example:-

41
.

A/C Group
General/Voltage Class

10.5 417

Sub A/C Code

Main A/C Code

1. 14.110------Expenditure incurred on Transmission lines.

2. 14.120------Step down station(GP)
3. 14.126-------Step down station(NP)
4. 14.140-------Transmission lines, transformer etc(GP)
5. 14.141------- Transmission lines, transformer etc(NP)
6. 14.142--------Vanished layout 11KV lines Transformers, LT lines(GP)
7. 14.150--------Trans lines, Transformers etc Improvement(GP)
8. 14.151-------- Trans lines, Transformers etc Improvement(NP)
9. 14.155-------- Additional Street lights, &SL in cities,Towns,Village etc
10. 14.160--------Reduction of lines losses,lines etc.
11. 14.170--------Replacement of distribution of transformers by same capacity
12. 14.200--------REC plan schemes.
13. 14.240--------SI works in REC.
14. 14.300--------Village Electrification (GP)
15. 14.320---------Power supply to IP sets n(GP)
16. 14.321--------- Power supply to IP sets under self financing schemes.
17. 14.340---------Tribal area electrification(GP)
18. 14.350---------Bhagya jyoti schemes
19. 14.360---------Kteer jyoti schemes
20. 14.400---------Service connections
21. 14.607---------Vehicles
22. 14.708---------Furniture & Fixtures
23. 14.809--------office Equipments
24. 14.810---------Tools & Tackles
25. 15.202---------Revenue expenditure allocation over capital works, Repair & Maintenance
26. 16.102---------Obsolute scrapped assets
27. 16.105--------- Obsolute scrapped assets plant & manchinery
28. 16.106--------- Obsolute scrapped assets lines cables net work etc.
29. 16.107--------- Obsolute scrapped assets Vehicles
30. 16.108--------- Obsolute scrapped assets Furniture & Fixtures
31. 16.109--------- Obsolute scrapped assets office Equipments
32. 16.205---------Dismantled assets plant & manchinery
33. 16.206--------- Dismantled assets lines cables net work etc
34. 16.207-------- Dismantled assets Vehicles
35. 16.208-------- Dismantled assets Furniture & Fixtures
36. 16.209--------- Dismantled assets office Equipments
DEPOSITS FOR ELECTRIFICATION/SERVICE CONNECTIONS etc.
37. 47.303----------Deposit from new service connection etc.
38. 47.305----------DC Works Govt/local/private/corparartes.
39. 47.306----------Deposit works
40. 47.307 to 47.310---Ganga kalyana schemes

42
.

41. 47.311-----------Deposit contribution works, Electrification to water supply

(Tatkal Schemes)
42. 47.313------------Dc works, Service connection ,HT/LT consumers
43. 47.6 Other Deposit from consumer
44. 47.601------------Deposit received from burnout meters
45. 47.603------------Metering Equipment
46. 47.604------------MSD from AEH consumers from 1-1-1997
47. 47.605----------- MSD from AEH consumers prior to 1-1-1997
48. 47.606------------MSD diff amount from AEH cons on fixing ele meter prior to 1-1-97
49. 48.101------------ MSD from consumers in cash
50. 480.103----------Addl security deposit from consumer in cash
51. 55.101-------- ---S/S Augmentation charges collected from consumer
52. 55.102------ -----To wards regularization of unauthorized installations
53. 55.103------ -----IP sets under SF schemes from consumer
54. 55.104------------ Regularization of unauthorized IP sets
55. 55.105------------ Amount received from layout of consumers/promoters
56. 55.106------------Dev charges/Addl Dev charges from consumers,
57. 55.107------------Infrastructure charges from HT consumers(13.2KV above)
58. 74.110------------Rep&Maint plant &machinery, other
59. 74.116----------- Rep&Maint of power transformers
60. 74.117------------Repair & maintenance of distribution transformers.
61. 74.510------------ lines cables net work etc
62. 74.511------------ Temporary power supply
63. 74.601------------Vehicles
64. 74.701------------ Furniture & Fixtures
65. 74.801------------ office Equipments
66. 74.802-------------Computers & printers

43
.

CHAPTER -4

HT/LT Lines

Fitting Accessories on H.T./L.T. line :-

It is essential to fix accessories after pole [Link] accessories are of two types.
a. Conductor accessories.
b. Pole accessories.

a.) Conductor Accessories: -

l. Binding Tape: -
Binding tape is used for binding pin insulator, shackle or Line insulator to the
conductor. The tape is wound on the conductor. The metal of binding tape should be same as
that of conductor. The first layer is wound along the wire in direction of twist of wire and
second layer is in opposite the twist. The portion on which the binding wire is to be wound
should be taped 25 mm more from either side. This tape is used for avoiding conductor
snapping due to friction.

2. Binding wire: - It is used for binding insulator to the conductor.

3. P.G. Clamp: - Means parallel groove clamp. This is used for joining jump wire. Line
tension cannot be given on P.G. Clamps. Bi-metallic P.G. Clamp is made out of two different
metals and the conductor of the same metal is used in the same type of metal groove of
[Link].

4. T clamp: T clamps are used in substation to connect the jumps and cannot sustain
tension.

B) Pole Accessories: -
1. Cross Arm, (2) Channel, (3) Guarding, (4) Anti-climbing device (Barbed wire), (5) Number
plate, (6) Phase plate, (7) Circuit plate, (8) Danger Board, (9) Insulator etc.

1) Cross Arms:- Cross arm designed as per the formation of line i.e. vertical, horizontal, or
[Link] length, width and design is based on following conditions.
1. The min. distance required between line and pole. This depends on line voltage.
2. Weight of conductor.
3. Tension on the conductor.
4. Max. sag.
5. Minimum clearance between two phases (it depends on line voltage.)

2. Channels: - Channels are used for mounting of Transformer, D.O. set, A.B. switch,L.A.,
guarding [Link] pole.

3. Stays: To avoid pole bending.

4. Guarding: - To avoid snapping of conductor on ground/ another line.

44
.

5. Barbed wire: - To obstruct the persons from climbing on the pole. Fixing of anti climbing
device is mandatory.

Barbed wire used as below.

Line Ground Clearance Barbed wire span Number of turns for

every 305m
H.T. Line 2134 (7 ft.) 1220 m (4 ft.) 12

L.T. Line -do- 610 m (2 ft.) 12

6. Number plate: - Number plate should be fixed on every pole or number should be
painted. It facilitates attending breakdown by giving proper address.

7. Phase plate: - On cut point of H.T. line or specific distance poles or tapping poles, Red,
Yellow and Blue phase plates are fixed.

8. Circuit Number: - When there is double circuit on a tower or pole, a circuit number are
written on number plate. Hence fixing of number plate should be done carefully. If wrong
circuit number plate is fixed, permit will be issued wrongly which may cause accident.
Confirm the circuit at orientation, and start fixing of the number plates at a right side.

9. Danger Board: - Danger Board should be fixed on every H.T. pole at following points.

1. Danger Board of every road side pole should face the road.
2. Danger Board should be on both side poles at Road crossing, Telephone crossing, Power
line, Railway, River crossing .
3. Up to ½ K.M. on both sides of village or city.

CONDUCTOR TYPE AND ITS USE.

Generating stations are far away from load centers and for transmission of energy high
voltage lines are to be erected. Different size conductors used in distribution of Electricity.

If proper size conductor is not selected for transmission or distribution network, losses
are increased considerably. While selecting the conductor following points are observed.

1) Conductor capacity: - The current carrying capacity of conductor depends on the type of
metal used and its size.

2) Mechanical strength of Conductor: - When the conductor is strung, it has to bear

tension. If the conductor cannot bear tension, it will break and snap. Hence proper capacity
conductor should be used.

Types of conductor are as below.

a. Copper.
b. All Aluminum Conductors.
c. All Aluminum Alloy conductors.
d. Aluminum Conductor steel reinforced one.

45
.

e. Steel conductor (Galvanized Iron or G.I.)

f. Cables (1) Control Cable, (2) Service Wire (3) Power Cable.

The Copper conductor is best one; but due to its high cost it is not used widely. The
Copper Conductor has low resistance and high mechanical strength.

All Aluminum conductors are generally made of strands and is used when the line
tension is low. It is generally used for L. T. lines. General sizes are No.8,No. 6, Rose, Ant, etc.

A.C.S.R. Conductor is used for E.H.V. and H.T. lines. Aluminum strands carry the
current and steel strands bear the mechanical tension. The sizes used are: 0.02 Squirrel, 0.03
weasel, 0.06 Mint, 0.1 Dog, 0.15 Wolf, 0.2 Panther, 0.3 Goat, 0.35 Sheep, 0.4 Deer, and 0.5
Moose etc.

Based on conductor covering there are two [Link] Conductor: - It is not covered
with insulation. 2. Insulated Conductor is covered by insulation and called as cable. They are
again classified as (1) Solid, (2) Stranded i.e. made of bunch of strands twisted. The
conductor size is measured in Standard Wire gauge.

Measurement of Standard Conductor: - Two numbers are used for this. The first number
shows the number of strands and second one the gauge of each strand or dia. For ex. A) 7/8
S.W.G. stay wire means it has 7 strands with 8 S.W.G. size strands. (B) 3/0.36 inch weather
proof wire means 3 strands each having 0.36 inch dia. Or 1/1.4 weather proof wire means
one strand with 1.4 mm dia.

CONDUCTOR JOINTING.
It means joining two conductors each other.

Necessity. 1) While construction of new line, one conductor coil is insufficient; the other has to
be laid in continuation.
2. The conductor breaks by some reason.

Types of Joints: -
(1) Britannia, (2) Telephone, (3) Merid Joint, (4) „T” joint, (5) Steel joints, (6) Compression joint.

1) Britannia Joint: - This type of joint is made only on solid conductors and cannot be made
on stranded conductor. Two conductors to be joined are brought in front of each other. 6 inch
(150 mm) length of each conductor is cleaned by wire brush or sand paper. This will clear the
rust and will be clean. Then it is washed with soft soda water. If the conductor is of copper; it
should so as to make good electrical connection. Then ends of both conductors are bend
through half centimeter and placed on each other. The length of contact portion should be
min. 100 mm. This joint should be bound by 14 mm copper wire as shown in figure.

46
.

2) Telephone Joint (Western Union): - This is used only for solid conductors. It is used for
conductors of size 8 No. or higher. First bend is given at 100 to 125 mm from the edge and
are placed over each other. Then each one is twisted with another conductor. The conductor is
to be cleaned for 200 to 250 mm length.

3) Meried Joints:- This joint is made between copper conductors having central strand of G.I.
wire. It should not be made between Al. conductors. Approximately 175 to 200 mm length
conductor strands are unwound and every strand is well washed and brushed. The G.I.
strand of both conductors should be broken up to 175 mm in length. Both conductors should
be brought in front of each other and their strands should be woven in each other. The strand
of one conductor is twisted on other conductor, and strand of other conductor is twisted on
the first. Likewise all the strands twisted and then soldered. This is used only for small span
length.

47
.

4) ‘T’ Joint: - This joint is made with stranded conductor. This joint cannot take tension.
It is used for Jumper or tapping in S/s. The conductor strands to be separated up to
100 mm. Then middle steel strands are cut. Then it shall be placed to horizontal
conductor with 3 strands each on either side and shall be twisted over the horizontal
conductor.

48
.

Sleeve Joint: - It can be made with any type of Aluminum conductor. First the conductor
should be washed with caustic soda solution and wiped off cleanly. Graphite Greece is
applied over the conductor and as shown in figure two Al. sleeves should be taken. These
sleeves should be placed on the conductor as shown. Sleeves should be twisted by twisting
wrench. This joint is made for L.T., H.T., ACSR, AAC conductor up to 0.06 size.

3) Compression Joint: - This is used for conductors of more than 0.06 cm2 sizes. For
jointing, two different sleeves are used. Steel sleeve is used for steel conductor strands and
Al. sleeve is used for Al. conductor strands. There are two holes in Al. sleeve. Rebating is
done through these holes. First both sleeves should be cleaned and dried. Then Al. sleeve to
be mounted on one side. The length of steel sleeve is then measured. Its half distance is
taken. Suppose it is „X‟ cm. Then the ends which are to be joined and more to „X‟ cm.
distance is taken on the conductor is banded there. The Al. str ands are opened up to that
point and cut. Steel strand should not be touched while this. Then the steel sleeves are
cleaned without opening. They are placed in the steel sleeve. They should be kept in front of
each other. Then the center of steel sleeve is compressed in Compression machine. Then on
the half portion of the right side sleeve be compressed and then on the left half portion. Due to
compression the length of sleeve will be increased by 6 mm on both sides and it will reach Al.
strands. Then Al. sleeve should be measured. It should be halved. Suppose it is „Y‟ cm. 25
mm then „Y‟ cm. should be measured and marked on both sides of conductor measured from
center of steel sleeve. Both parts of conductor are brought in sleeve in front of each other. The
filler parts should be filled in the sleeve by Grease until it comes out the holes. Both the holes
are then closed by rivets and hammered by hammer. There is one stencil mark on Al. sleeve.
Then first compression will be there; afterwards it should be compressed up to one end.
Similarly other part is compressed up to other end.

49
.

JUMPERING.

1. Jumper should not be connected to main conductor. The jumper should always be
connected by [Link] as shown.

2. When the jumpers are near metallic portion, all such jumpers are covered with alkathine
pipe.
3. Conductor joint are marked on A.C.S.R. conductor when dispatched. Mid span joint should
be made before stringing because the steel strand is not kept continuous. Hence it is
necessary to replace the company joint.
4. Care should be taken that mid span joint will not be less than 40 ft. from pole.
5. Every joint should be done carefully.
6. Where conductor strands are cut, repair sleeve is used.
7. Conductor joint strength should be 95 % that of conductor, and resistance should be that of
main conductor.

Conductor paving and stringing.

Conductor paving is the first step for conductor stringing. Paving out is carried out after pole
erection is completed. Following T & P is used for the same.
1) Revolving Platform or Shaft. 2) Roller.
3) Twisting wrench or hydraulic press machine. 4) Hack saw.
5) Pliers. 6) Screw driver.
7) Wire wrench. 8) Crowbars.
9) Ropes. 10) Chain pulley.
11) Hammer. 12) Sag Board.
13) Zola.

While conductor paying out, care should be taken that the conductor should not rub the
ground. A revolving platform and rollers are used to avoid damage. If the conductor is rubbing

50
.

the ground, it should be lifted and stretched. Conductor paying out can be done easily by use
of revolving platform. Care should be taken to avoid sharp bend while unwinding. Sharp
bend may lead to breaking of conductor.

Sag Board should be used while stringing. Wind pressure, snow fall, etc should be
considered and proper sag should be given.

Binding tape should be used for conductor binding. While binding the conductor,
conductor should be inspected to ascertain the damages. Kerolite compound is also used.
There should not be gap between tape and conductor as there is a possibility of sparking.

1) For L.T. neutral conductor binding on pole, if the conductor is of copper C.I. bobbin to be
used and in case of Aluminum conductor Al. bobbin should be used.
2) Tension clamp should be fixed as shown in the figure.

3) Before use of disc insulator, please confirm that the ball of hardware fits properly by fixing
of security clip. Only then the disc should be used. Accidents have occurred due to failure of
ball socket joint at disc insulator.

4) The conductor stringing should be done by use of rollers. It should not rub the insulator or
ground.

5) While conductor paying out the drum should be unwound with revolving platform or if it is
in coil, it should be unwound over the wheel to avoid damage.

6) The minimum clearance between the pole and live wire should always be as per I.E. Rules.

7) Conductor loop to be provided near the pole after the line is completely strung. It facilitates
the service connection.

8) Double layer of binding tape should be fixed to the conductor near L.T. insulator. It will
avoid damage to the conductor in case of flash over.

9) Proper tools should be used while working with the conductor to avoid damage.
10) Before joining, the conductor ends should be properly cleaned. In case of copper, clean by
sand paper and for aluminum conductor, first apply jointing compound and then brush so as
to remove the al. oxide. In absence of jointing compound caustic soda can be used. After
cleaning, use graphite grease and then complete the joint.

11) P.G. clamps and the conductor should have the same current capacity.

51
.

12) To avoid bi-metallic action in bi-metallic P.G. clamps, lead foil is used.

In order to avoid by material action a strip is used as a media in bi-metallic P.G.

clamps. As there is bimetal action between copper and aluminum; but no action occurs
between copper, zinc and aluminum.

COMMISSIONING OF NEW LINE.

The line under first commissioning should be thoroughly inspected. Rigorous

inspection should be carried out to see whether the line is erected as per [Link].
Clearance at all places, guarding etc. should be thoroughly checked. The concreting of
every pole should also be checked. Stays should be checked for proper tension. Fixing
of danger board, phase plates should be checked. Earthing on poles, [Link]., Horn gap
or D.O. fuses should also be checked.

After inspection, some line test should be carried out before commissioning. Insulation
resistance between phase to phase and phase to neutral should be checked by megger
and values to be recorded in register. After removing all the faults/descripancies observed
in patrolling and if the megger results are proper, a written report for commissioning
should be given to Senior Officer. Permission from Electrical Inspector is necessary for
charging the line.

If the line is charged satisfactorily, it means that line commissioning is

complete.

52
.

CHAPTER -5

TRANSFORMERS
(Heart of transmission & distribution)

As engineers of electrical utilities, our aim is to carry out such maintenance works on
our transformers so that the same works well for a long period, without any breakdowns and
finally the consumer is given a quality and uninterrupted power supply.

For carrying out any maintenance schedule on any equipment, first we need to
understand the equipment. (Theory and construction)

Transformers are regarded as hearts of AC transmission and distribution system for

the following reasons,
1) Before their invention and use, power generation & supply was as direct current
only, that too in small quantities. Change of voltages here is not normally possible. Their
invention brought in alternating current production and distribution with voltage changes at
will, to suit to the requirement of the electrical machinery used.
2) They instituted large scale production and distribution of electrical energy (increase
by millions of times)
3) They contributed to transporting bulk power through long distances (By
increasing to very high voltages) very economically and reduce high power loss in
transmission.
4) Power supply from its generation point to its utilization site, normally passes
through at least 4 to 6 transformers in all.

When it was first developed, it was called an induction coil. Later it was named
secondary generator. Another inventor named it as converter. The final and present
name that has remained good is Transformer.

In 1886, using transformers the first alternating current transmission and distribution
system was set up in a town in USA. Hence the year 1886 is regarded as year of invention of
the transformer though experimentation and production had started much earlier.

Why was it named a secondary generator? Its functioning is analogues to a generator.

If we deduce electricity generation into its elements it would be (1) Conducting coils, (2)
Magnetic flux and (3) Rotation \ Movement.

If we combine magnetic flux and movement it would be Changing-flux. Thus the

elements of a Generator are (1) Conducting coils and (2) Changing flux.

In the case of a transformer also, it is conducting coils and changing flux in a magnetic
core. This appears to be the reason of calling the transformer a secondary generator.

53
.

The transformer is static equipment that enables transfer of electrical energy from
systems of one voltage to systems of another. For accomplishing the same it consists of 2 to 3
electrical windings wound over a magnetic core. The windings are electrically separated but
inter linked magnetically.

The energy transfer is by induction most of the times but sometimes it is partly by
induction and partly by conduction (auto-transformers

Transformers are classified generally based on

1) Electrical configuration (single or three phase)
2) Voltage changes (Step up or Step down)
3) Type of core construction (Core type or shell type),
4) Winding construction (two or three winding or Auto),
5) Media of cooling (Oil / gas-SF6 cooled or dry type),
6)Voltage systems (Distribution, Power, or EHV- extra high voltage),
7) Capacity ratings (100 KVA, 10 MVA, 100 MVA etc),
8)Application (Grounding, Welding, Furnace, Traction Instrument transformers like CT
and PT etc),
9) Location: Indoor or outdoor. (10) Reactors.

In electrical utilities, the classification is based on system voltage namely Distribution

transformers (4.6-11-13.2 KV \ 400-250V) Power transformers (33-66-110 KV \ 13.2-11-4.6
KV) and EHV transformers (220 KV and above).

Generally the total transformer capacity in a system is 10 to 15 times its generating

capacity. It is also the most common of all electrical equipments in the system. In all receiving
stations sub-stations, LV distribution centers etc. the transformer is the main equipment and
all other items are to aid it in its function.

Thus transformer has become the heart of transmission and distribution

system Stating as “static equipment” we tend to ignore its maintenance aspects. But actually
the transformer when it is put to service (or charged and power supplies are extracted from it)
it becomes “LIVE” electrically and magnetically and even creates physical motion or
movement in some of its internal parts (not visible from outside of course). The transil oil
starts moving, the winding and core starts vibrating giving out humming noise. These
movements \ vibrations increase and decrease with increase \ decrease in load and are
pronounced very highly at times of faults. Though certain parts tend to move, the transformer
is not designed for any moving parts. In fact much of the design- head aches are in
suppression of the movements. Prolonging the life of this “LIVE” transformer requires careful
manufacture and maintenance hourly, daily, quarterly, etc requiring active role of an electrical
engineer.

54
.

Transformer Principle

1
2

1) INDUCING COIL,
2) MAGNETIC CORE ACTIVE PART
3) INDUCED COIL,
4) MAGNETIC LINES CREATED BY INDUCING
OIL, CIRCULATING IN MAGNETIC CORE IS
ABSORBED BY INDUCED COIL & VOLTAGE
INDUCED THERE. THE VOLTAGES DEPEND
ON NUMBER. OF TURNS IN THE COILS.

The parts of a transformer may classified as below.

(a) Active part :-
(1) Electrical circuits:- HV and LV windings
(2) Magnetic circuits:- core, yoke and their clamping bolts etc.
(b) Terminations: HV tappings, tap switch, connecting leads and bushings.
(c) Accessories: - Tank, transil oil, cooling systems conservator, breather etc.

The core and coil assembly is named “Active Part” since all the electro-magnetic
activities of the transformer takes place here only. (Electrical power flow in HV winding, its
conversion into magnetic flux, which, while traveling in the core is also linked to the LV
winding. This induces electrical power flow in LV winding) All the other parts of the
transformer like tank, oil radiators etc. are only to aid \ maintain the actions of the active
part.

55
.

Transformer essential parts

The voltage transformation ration in a transformer is, naturally by the traditional

principle is Vp / Vs = Np / Ns Where Vp: Voltage in primary Vs: Voltage in secondary. Np:
Number of turns in primary Ns: Number of turns in secondary. Transformation ratio is also
stated as ratio of transformer incoming voltage and its output voltage.
We go for a 2 winding transformer when the transformation ratios required is more
than 2 and when the ratio required is between 1 and 2 we go for an Auto-transformer.
A proper understanding of working of any transformer must begin with the studies of
distribution transformers whose strength \ numbers in India is supposed to exceed 25
lakhs. In Karnataka it is decreed that we use only four capacities namely 25, 63, 100 and
250 kva. (In the case of certain old casses there are 500, 750 and 990 kva transformers
either independently or in what are called CST-compact secondary stations. But they should
not be replicated)

Most of the particulars of a transformer are given out in the nameplate of a transformer
(Technical Features). The details not only tell the essential features of the transformer to (1) a
general reader but include information to (2) erection engineers and later to (3) the
maintenance engineers.

One can consider himself a good engineer, if he clearly understands the various
parameters given in the nameplate.

As regards transformer Losses, they are two typers IRON losses (occurring always)
COPPER losses (occurs when currents are drawn & is proportional to amperes)The iron losses
are two types Eddy current loss (Laminaation reduces this loss) Hysteris loss (Grain \ crystal
orientation reduces this loss) The remedial measures for a decrease in losses there by

56
.

increase the effiency levels consist of selecting appropriate construction practices like
thinner core thickness, winding pacements, heat dissipation technics etc. As regards
efficiencies all-day-efficiency is most important where losses on 24 hour basis is taken nto
consideration.

Transformers on no load and full load features can easily tested by Open circuit
and short circuit tests on transformers.

As regards constructional aspects the tota weight (transformer weight plus mounting,
controle equpments etc) and space available for its errection decides the pole-arrangementsie.
Single \ two \ three \ four [Link] of materials is normally refered to all the
materials involved in a transformer structure , cost of each item and the tota cost.

[Link] earthing (As per IE rules 1956) is of PIPE electrode type with salt
charcoal and sand. The minimum distance from one earth to the other must be not less than
twice the length of the electrode.
 Neutral at ground potential.; Easy path to protection circuits and .
 To avoid neutral floating
Normally three earths are provided per distribution transformer. System earhings-2
numbers, Equipment earhings-1 number. The 3 earths are connected as beow.
1) Neutral bushing (This earthing ensures definite single phases voltages even when
the three phases loadings are unbalanced)
2) Lightning arrestors.3) Structural parts- All non-current carrying metal parts of the structure
like transformer tank, GOS, cross arms etc.

TRANSFORMER PROTECTIONS

A protection device isolates the transformer when an electrical fault or short circuit
occurs so that further damage (including catching fire) of the transformer is prevented. A
transformer depending upon its cost and required reliability is provided with built in and \ or
additional protections.

Distribution transformers are normally provided with over current protection by means
of graded fuses both on HV and LV sides. Normally these consist of HG fuses on HV and LV
sides except in the case of LV side of 250 kva transformers. Here it is a ACB distribution box.
Excess currents blow up the fuses and the transformer is protected.

As regards Power and other transformers are concerned the protections consist of
Lightning [Link] protections(OTI and WTI), presure protections(PRV), gas
protection Bucholtz relay) current protections (OCR, Differential, REFR ) etc.

The protections are actuated by automatic relays poer by DC supplies. Earlier all the
relays used to be electromechanical relays. One could observe physical movements of a
rotating disc and relay resetting was done manually. But they are not very sensitive but
sluggish and do not act if the fault occurs during initial voltage \ current surges which lasts
for a duration of one or two cycles of the power frequency. They act only during steady state

57
.

power flows only. The only consideration here is that they are economical to those discussed
in subsequent paras.

Now a day they are being replaced by Static relays which do not contain any moving
parts. These relays act during steady state as well as during initial \ switching surges.
Obviously they are costlier than electromechanical relays.

A further improvement is being done at present in installing Microprocessor based

relays (Also called Numerical relays) with multi functional features like memory, action for
current as well as voltages etc. Price vise they are the costliest.

Apart from one or two regular relays now a days back up relays are also used for
reliability and safety so that power supply to the transformer is cut off before the critical
clearance time at times of fault.

A single numerical relay called TPU (transformer protection Unit) is now available and
can be used to do all the jobs of different relays used for protection of a transformer like OCR,
REFR, DF etc.

Commission test for transformers

Before errection of the transformer at site one must verify whether the transformer has
been acceptance tests (Tests prescribed by us at the time of acceptance)-found-good by
verifying the concerned test certificates. The commission tests on distribution transformers
are normally megger tests. For power transformers a few more tests like ratio-test, manetic
balance test, boosting etc are done besides megger tests using not less than 5 kv megger.
Whenever the performance of a transformer is in doubt the first assurence is by megger test
which depends on the age of the transformer.. Among the insulation resistances of a
distribution transformer the most important is LV winding to earth. In the case of a new
transformer if it is around 1000 mega ohms those of HV to earth and HV to LV will be more
than 1000 mega ohms and so the transformer may considered as good. For power
transformers the megger values vary vry widely. Often in the case of some old transformers a
rule of 2 Mega ohms \ KV of operating voltage is applied to decide the insulation resistance to
be adequate for charging a transformer. For example in the case of a 66\11 kv transformer,
HV winding to earth Mega ohms should be more than 66 X 2 = 132 mega ohms. IS. also gives
out some figures.

All this is empirical and they is no fixed relation between insulation provided and
insulation resistances.

MAINTANENCE OF TRANSFORMERS: -

Here lack or inadequacy of all the q maintenance works is supposed to result in failure
at the rate of 12 to 20 % every year. For carrying maintenance works there is no hard and
fast rule. Different types of schedules are framed by different utilities depending upon
material availability, man power etc. One such schedule is Given below.

58
.

Monthly maintenance: -

1) Checking the transformer supports and transformer level. 2) Tightening of all

connections. 3) Checking the HT and LT fuses for correct rating, tightness and continuity. 4)
Check for load during peak load time. If overloaded, transfer loads to adjacent transformer or
provide additional transformer. 5) Check for leakage of oil in drain valves, tank, conservator
etc., prevent leakage and top up the oil level. 6) Check the bushings for chipping and broken
porcelain. 7) Check the arcing horns for proper alignment and gap and for any damages due
to flash over. 8) Check for breather opening and color of silica gel. Recondition silica gel if
necessary. 9) Check the earthing conductor for its size, tight and intact status. 10) Check the
danger plate for its support, height and facing in the right direction. 11) If provided with
explosion vent check the diaphragm for cracks or broke condition. 12) Check for general
cleanliness, tightness of all bolts and nuts etc. 13) check the LT switch\protection kit for cover
intactness, heating of contacts and other parts, for proper fuses, safety from rain water etc
and take remedial measures. 15) Check the lightning arresters for line and earth connections,
flashovers, and broken or damaged porcelain. 16) Check the GOS for smooth action, heating,
burning, corrosion pitting of switch contacts etc. broken or damaged insulators, intact earth
connections, alignment of switch contacts, proper fitting of male contacts into female contacts,
intactness of arcing horns etc.

Quarterly maintenance: -
1) Replace worn out bolts and nuts and tighten connections. 2) Old fuse must be
replaced with right capacity new fuses. 3) Prevent all oil leakages and top up with good and
tested oil. 4) Over bushings and arcing horns clean off dirt, paint and other deposits. Examine
and replace cracked or broken bushings. Replace damaged gaskets Arcing horns alignment
and gap must be adjusted. 5) Breather maintenance: Open and clean the air passage.
Recondition silica gel and top up if required. Check the whole breather for air leakage. 6)
Repaint the danger board if defaced. 7) All dirt from the body of the transformer must be
removed and all bolts and nut should be tightened. 8) Maintain LT switch.

Half yearly maintenance: -

1) Test oil sample and replace if necessary. 2) Maintain GOS by replacing all worn \
burnt out parts.
Yearly maintenance
Check earth resistance and improve if necessary.
Ten yearly maintenance: - Dismantle and overhaul the whole transformer (The period
maybe changed depending on manufacturer‟s recommendation)

INSTRUEMENT TRANSFORMERS

Instrument transformers are very small transformers used for measuring and protection
purposes. They are fixed ratio transformers and are normally rated in terms of Volt-Amperes.

They are all single-phase transformers. Sometimes two to three of them are fitted
together for measuring two or three phase powers. They are interconnected externally in star

59
.

\ delta connections. The primary side consists of one core winding while one to three
windings exist at the secondary side depending upon specific requirements.

From power engineers point of view the most to be known items are PT‟s (potential
transformers) and CT‟s (current transformers). Here one should understand the difference
between the two and how they should be wired in a circuit.
A voltage transformer is ideally a transformer under no-load conditions where the load
current is zero and the voltage drop is only caused by the magnetizing current and is thus
negligible.
A current transformer is ideally a short-circuited transformer where the secondary terminal
voltage is zero and the magnetizing current is negligible.

In a CT the HV and LV windings (called current coils) are very low resistance wires
compared to a PT. The current flowing in a PT depends on its impedance and transformation
ratio. Where as the current flowing in a CT depends not based on its impedance but on that
flowing in the circuit and transformation ratio In a CT, many a time the there won‟t be a
primary but only secondary consisting of a coil wound over a core. The core coil assembly is
to be inserted over the conductor whose current is to be measured. In many other CT‟s the
primary consists of just a bar. In both types of CT‟s the secondary consists of large number of
turns (the number of turns, of course; depends on the CT transformation ratio) (The CT
impedance or load impedance of a CT is negligible in view of large cross section of the
conducer used).

Many a time we use a multi core CT where in the secondary consist of not one but a
few independent coils not linked electrically but magnetically coupled.
Causes for failure of transformers, trouble shooting and remedial measures.
Normally transformers do not fail on ful loads or slihtly excessive loads. It is fault currents
and weak insulation (while construction) that are mainly responcible. Fault currents occur
due to poor maintanance of lines etc. Carrying out periodical maintainance both on
transformers, transmission \ distribution lines and using graded fuses is the best remedy for
ensuring the long life of a transformers.

TRANSFORMERS FAILURES – CAUSES AND REMEDIAL MEASURES

From the study of the various causes of failures of a transformer, it is easy to know
what is to be done to prevent them. The various probable causes of failures and the
preventive maintenance necessary are given below:

The transformer mainly consists:

1. Magnetic Circuits
2. Electrical Circuits
3. Insulation (Dielectric) materials
4. Tank, Oil etc.

In any electrical plant, a failure in one part renders the whole equipment unfit for service.

60
.

The faults that may lead to transformer failure can be mainly classified as follows and these
often react on one another. It becomes most difficult to identify between the reason and the
consequence. Most evidence is lost in the very nature of the failure of the equipment.

1. Failures due to mechanical damages (about 5% failures are on account of these

and can be rectified quickly, if spares are available).

2. Failures due to poor dielectric comprising of oil and deterioration of major

insulation.

3. Failures due to damages in windings which include, coils, minor insulation,

terminal gear (70 to 80% failures are on account of this).

4. Failures due to defective magnetic circuits (cases are negligible).

All these may occur due to:

a) Defective manufactures (poor design, faulty materials and bad workmanship).

b) Defective or abnormal operation (careless dry out, careless installation, inadequate

supervision & maintenance and sustained abnormal operating conditions)

Failure due to mechanical damages:

They are generally (l) oil leaks (2) Flash over of bushings.

1) The welding of the main tank may be defective and also the fittings may be leaky. This
causes oil to leak and cause heating of windings and a possible breakdown of equipment.
Rough handling during transit may also contribute to leaks. The gaskets etc., used at each of
the flanges fittings and main covers should be properly placed secure and uniformly
tightened.
2) Deposits of coal dust, saline or chemicals on the bushings may cause a flash over.
Applying of silicon compound as a thin layer on the bushings results in protects the bushings
from flash over due to such deposits. This has been successfully tried atsome of the important
substations,, where difficulty due to chemicals depositing on the insulators was being
minimised.
3) Paralleling of transformers with slight differences in ratios and percentage impedences
may cause undue overloading of one of them. resulting in excessive heating and consequent
breakdown. It is important that the difference in impedence percentages of transformer to be
parallel does not exceed 8 to 10% (maximum).
4) Sufficient place around a transformer to dissipate heat must be provided. If two
transformers are kept very close the oil temperature increases endangering coil insulation.
5) Vapour at the top of an oil cooled transformer may be explosive. Bringing naked lamps at
the places may cause damage.
6) In water cooled transformers, the tubes may get clogged and the coil may get heated up.
They have to be therefore cleaned periodically.

61
.

Failure in Di-electric Circuits:

1. Moisture entering the tank during "breathing action" of the transformer when breather is
not properly maintained reduces the dielectric strength of the oil. This results in breakdown
from coils or terminal lead to at or core structures. The greatest danger is however the inter
turn short in the coils.

2. Deterioration of oil may also be due to prolonged overloading of the transformer. This
action is aggravated by presence of copper and lead. When oil temperature increases,
formation of sludge, water and acid is accelerated.

Safe Values for oils:

Di-electric Strength : 30 KV for 1 minute (between gap of 4 mm or 0. 178")
Acidity : Upto 0.7 milligrams of KOH per gram of oil-satisfactory.
Above this value : Careful observation on the acidity value is to be made by frequent
sampling.
When this reaches 1.0, the oil is to be discarded.

3. During service certain amount of oil gets lost due to evaporation and oxidation. Periodical
topping up oil with fresh filtered tested oil is necessary, otherwise the unit gets overheated.

4. Narrow oil ducts & improper ventilation reduce the serviceable life of a transformer. Coil
insulation turns brittle and may get punctured on account of this.

5. Sometimes the clearance provided between phases in insufficient. Also insertion of press
board barriers may aggravate, as they may upset the dielectric stress to throw too much
stress across the coil spaces and across the barriers.

6. Wooden ducts provided for taking the terminal leads over them should be properly dried.
Otherwise these may cause short circuit between tapping leads.

7. Suspended foreign particles reduce the dielectric strength of the insulating oil and may
cause a flash over resulting in serious breakdown of the transformer.

8. When the acidity value of the oil increases, it will promote oxidation of the metal parts and
results in a breakdown.

Faults in Electric Circuits:

1. When moisture manages to ingress through the fabric insulation of the coils, short circuits
between turns occur sooner or later. Impregnation of coils by applying varnish so that it
penetrates deep enough to the inner layers of the coils is to be ensured. Failures from this
cause are most common.

62
.

2. Presence of sharp edges on the copper conductors may cause a short circuit between
adjacent turns when the transformer vibrates on load or when the windings are subjected to
repeated electro magnetic shocks due to short circuit or switching surges.

3. One or more turns in a coil may get dislodged and a short circuit between them may result
when heavy external short circuit occurs and if the same is not cleared by fuses in time.
Breakdown may not immediately occur but when the transformer vibrates on load with the
dislodged coils, abrasion of insulation between adjacent dislodged coils may take place
causing a break down.

4. Improper drying out and applying full voltage with poor I.R. values will result in failure of
insulation between adjacent layers.

The safe I.R. values for a 33/11 KV Power Transformer and a 11 kV / 433 V Distribution
Transformers are given below.

I.R. Values in MΩ (to be taken with a 1000 V megger)

Temperature 33/11 kV Transformer 1 I kV/433 V Transformer

(in degree C)
HT to E LT to E HT to LT HT to E LT to E HT to LT
MΩ MΩ MΩ MΩ MΩ MΩ
60 degree C 65 25 65 50 25 50

50 degree C 130 50 130 100 50 100

40 degree C > 200 >100 >260 >200 > 100 >200

30 degree C 250 200 250 200 100 200

*Nearer to infinity as can be read in Nearer to infinity as can be
the megger read in the megger

*Whenever readings are taken at ambient temperature, the temperature also is to be noted.

5. Sudden changes in load cause sudden expansion and contraction of conductor and is
likely to damage the insulation fabric.

6. Where individual coils (H.V.) are designed to have too great a radial depth compared to its
height, hot spots may develop in the interior of the coils due to inadequate oil passage
allowed. The insulation becomes brittle and short circuit between turns may result

7. Overheat on load occurs at badly soldered joints and oil gets carbonized locally. The heat
at the- joints will be conducted to a certain length in the copper coil and the insulation may

63
.

get carbonized to a little extent resulting in a short circuit between turns. The joint itself, may
give way causing an open circuit.

8. When external short circuit occurs, the coils get displaced violently as a result of the
internal imbalance in electromagnetic conditions.

9. Sustained heavy overloads produce high temperature through out the transformer. The
coilinsulation becomes brittle and in the course of time flakes off the conductors at places
resulting in shortcircuit between turns. The deposits again cause excessive heating making it
a cumulative [Link] with a high ratio of copper losses to iron losses can little
withstand overload and aretherefore more liable to fail on account of sustained overloading.

10. The tap adjusting leads should be carefully handled to ensure that wrong leads are not
[Link] part of windings may get short circuited and heavy currents circulate in the
short circuited windings which would produce a fault between turns.

Whenever H.G. fuse in one of the phases blows off and supply continued through the other
two phases, it is injurious to transformer as well as the 3 phase motors of consumers.
Immediate cutting of thetransformer from service and renewal of the H.G. fuse is necessary.

11. It is to be ensured that bolted joints and all connections are tightly secured and locked
lestthey should become loose in service due to vibrations produced and such joints get heated
up rapidly.

12. The transformers for use on large systems are generally provided with adjustable
coilclamping device for the purpose of taking up any shrinkage of insulation which may occur
under [Link] adjustment is to be made with utmost skill lest undue mechanical
pressure may be exerted on thewindings and a few conductors may get dislodged resulting in
short circuit between them.

13. Short circuit between turns, breakdown of insulation of windings to earth and puncture
ofinsulation may take place due to the following transient phenomena:

Lightning surges reaching the transformer usually damage the coils as they take the brunt
ofthe shock.
Excessive voltage set up by surges may be accentuated at open tapping, at any point
ofchange of surge impendence like at the termination of conductor reinforcement
whereemployed; spare- between series coils, at the neutral or midpoint. Extra insulation is to
beprovided at these places. Employment insulation is to be provided at these points.

Failures in Magnetic Circuits:

1. The laminations are clamped together by inserting bolts through cores and-yokes. The
bolts'are provided with insulation around them which may give way. This tantamount to a

64
.

short circuit in laminations causing local eddy currents. When this trouble occurs in two bolts
simultaneously, they forma shod circuited path through which magnetic flux passes.

If one of the bolts situated at the ends of the limb fail simultaneously with an adjacent
bolt in the yokes; the path between the two bolts is threaded by almost the entire value of the
magnetic flux when passing from the core to the yoke. The heat generated is so severe to
cause a distortion of the whole core and a resultant short circuit between turns of adjacent
windings.

2. Failure may occur of insulation between laminations and insulation between yoke and
clamping bolts. The nature of damage is similar to the one explained in the foregoing
paragraph. This registers an increase in the from losses of the transformer.

3. Core clamping bolts should be securely tightened and locked lest vibrations should set up
causing damage of core insulation and produce failures as explained above.

4. Care should be taken to ensure that the edges of the core and yoke lamination do not -
developburns which-produce local short circuit in the lamination.
5. No metallic filings should be allowed to be present in between laminations in a finished
transformer which cause short circuit.

It can be therefore be seen that:

1. Almost all the parts in a transformer are liable to failure. On opening a failed transformer
it is often very difficult to say definitely the reasons for the failure as all evidence is
eliminated by the very nature of the breakdown. Consequently the cause of a failure is only a
matter of guess. At best a close idea of the real cause may be obtained by a careful study of
the transformer and the operating conditionsobtaining at the time of failure of transformer
and also the weather conditions. It is therefore necessary that these particulars are recorded
accurately.

2. Careful design and construction on the part of the manufacturers, without subordinating
quality to competition in market is necessary. On the part of the purchasers also the
economics behind the purchase should not be arrived at by cost alone but by performance
guarantees.

3. Timely preventive maintenance is the back bone for safe and efficient operation of
anyelectrical plant. The maintenance schedules as well as the construction standards drawn
up are exhaustive enough to detect and prevent a possible failure ahead. If these are adhered
by the utilities, it should be possible to reduce the failures to a large extent.

65
.

KAVIKA

(An article by G. A. Narayana Swamy for the purpose of visit of the factory on by
trainees.)

The title of this article is actually an acronym of three kannada words namely
Karnataka Vidyuth Kharkhane which means a factory of Karnataka. This re-naming of
the factory was, after the erstwhile state of Mysore was renamed as Karnataka. Earlier the
factory was known as GEF or government electric factory.

It is one of the oldest factories in India started by the then doyen Diwan of
Mysore state Baratha Rathna Sir [Link] in the year 1933; fifteen years
earlier to independence of the country.

In the beginning a good lot of other electrical items were manufactured. But later re-
assigned to manufacture of distribution transformers only. The transformer capacities earlier
also varied very widely. But now the transformers manufactured are 25, 63,100 and 250KVA
only. About 80 % of work is in assembling new transformers. The balance 20 % is repairing
old but failed transformers of Kavika make only.

Once all the raw materials required, like insulated wires and flats, core stampings,
bushings, tanks, off-load switches etc were all manufactured here only. But now they are all
outsourced i.e., purchased from outside agencies. Certain materials like large CRGO sheets
were directly imported from foreign countries and later cut to exact sizes using necessary
press-machines But now a days the exact stampings are also purchased from competent
private suppliers.

The whole factory is in a U-shaped building. The various stages of manufacturing,

assembling, testing, readying for dispatch etc commence from one end of the U and ends in
another end. For the purpose, the activities are divided into 9 zones viz; 1) Winding
department 2)Carpentry 3)Core formation area 4)Core coil assembly area. 5) connection 6)
Vacuum chamber 7) active part lowering 8) testing 9)Dispatch.

However the „route card‟ lists 12 routes through which all the transformers (including
repairing failed ones) should pass through. They are :1) transformer test (for repairs) 2)tank
dismantling 3)core assembly 4) HV connection 5)LV connection 6) chamber process and
megger value 7) bushing assembly 8) fitting packing and height adjustment 9)Active part
lowering 10) lid fitting 11)oil filling 12) Final testing. At each route after due action the
supervisor signs in the job-card tagged to the transformer. The „route card‟ is tied to each of
the transformers at very initial stage. At each stage of work like core assembly the supervisor
puts his initials in the „route card‟ space meant for the purpose. Before dispatch the tags are
removed and preserved.

The windings are made out of aluminum wires and flats of different gauges as per the
present policy of the government of using aluminum for all distribution transformers and
copper for power and above voltage transformers. The wires/flats provided with DPC (Double

66
.

paper covered) and provided with class D insulations are procured from outside. As per IS.
the HV/LV of distribution transformers should be provided with 28/3KV insulations
respectively. The size of the bare flats are as below.

[Link] Transfor L.V winding H.V winding.

mer
Capacity
1 25KVA 8.75x2.15mm flat 1mm dia wire
2 63KVA Two numbers of 7.5 x3.5mm 1.414mm dia
flats wire
3 100KVA 10.9mmx4mm flats (two runs) 1.71mm dia wire
4 250KVA 3 radial numbers of 3mm dia wire
10.4x4.5mm flat and 3 axial numbers
of 12x4mm flat

As you enter the U- shaped works zone one can find coil winding machines with
counters for counting the exact number of turns. To the left of a central passage LV winding
machines are available and one can see the assembly works. The right side of the passage
there are HV winding machines and workers doing the works.. For the purpose of mounting
LV over the core and later on mounting the HV over LV, The internal and external diameters of
the windings are appropriately dimensitioned.

The winding process consists of carrying all the works as per design drawings (where
in, the sizes of conductor ,number of turns, internal and external diameters of the coils etc are
indicated) from the planning section of the factory For example the LV coils consist of first
forming a cylinder of specified diameter ,out of an 1mm thick press board and gum. Later
over this press board cylinder 166 turns of 8.75 x 2.15 (for 25 KVA) insulated aluminum flat
is wound Over the winding another press board cylinder is formed to cover the entire coil.
On this cover, pressboard strips are gummed at suitable intervals. Over these strips another
pressboard is formed. Thus oil circulation ducts are formed. Similarly the HV windings are
assembled using 1mm dia x 7304 turns.

The number of turns provided are as below for a transformation ratio of 44 with a
tolerance of +-0.5%

NUMBER OF TURNS.
[Link] Transformer L H
Capacity .V .V
1 25KVA 1 7
66 304
2 63KVA 9 4
4 136
3 100KVA 8 3
0 520
4 250KVA 4 2
7 120

67
.

The ratio of 44+- 0.5% is ascertained by conducting a ratio test immediately after
assembly of active part, but before ovening or drying. If there is any discrepancy in the ratio,
the active part is sent back to the winding assembly section for necessary correction. The HV
coil is inserted over the LV coil and sent to the core-assembly section.
In the core section all the cores are assembled out of exact and cut sections purchased
by outsourcing. The core sections are made of M3 ( 0.23mm thickness) amd M4 (0.27mm)
CRGO sheets.

The following are the weights of cores for different KVA ratings of transformers.

[Link] Transformer Weight

Capacity of core(in Kg)
1 25KVA 73
2 63KVA 142
3 100KVA 179
4 250KVA 440

Each cut sections of the core is insulated (This is not done separately but provided at
the time of casting the main core sheets.) The core sections consist of 5 pieces. They are
horizontals (2 numbers),sides (2 numbers) and centre (1 number) The assembled horizontals
are called bottom and top yokes. The horizontals of the top yoke are so assembled that there
is an overlapping over the sides by a few mm. (no such overlapping at the bottom) even this
overlapping is done alternatively. Ie. If overlapping is done at the left side in one set of 5
pieces, it is done at the right side in the next set of 5 pieces. The bottom and top yokes are
kept in shape (since the sections are very thin) by bolting to 4 channels (2v per yoke) of
appropriate sizes , The verticals are kept in shape by cotton tapes wound all round. The
assembled cores are so „stepped‟ that it results in a circular sections all along. This is to suit
to the windings which are wound circular. The idea is to see that the gap between the core
and winding is as less as possible so that permeability for the magnetic lines is maximum.
Thus the cores are fully assembled and sent for windings insertion. Here the top yoke and
channels are disassembled, the vertical sections are provided with a pressboard insulations
and the windings are inserted. At this stage winding turns ration test is performed. (note ; At
this stage some yoke sections are placed temporarily to close the magnetic paths and later
removed). Later the disassembled yoke and channels are fully assembled as before, thus
completing the active part construction.

Then the active parts are sent to a large oven where there is a hot air (70‟ to 80‟c) is
circulated for 12 to 14 hours. Later the oven interiors are vaccumised for about 2 hours
[Link] taking out of the oven the active parts are meggered. The main criterion is the
LV to ground. If the megger values of the same are about 1000 mega ohms, the drying aspect
is taken as completed.

After taking out of the oven, the LV flat ends (in the case of above 25 KVA) are brazed.
Brazing is also done for delta and star formation and connected with appropriate aluminum

68
.

strips \ lugs (Later used for further wiring of HV and LV bushings). The jointing is by brazing
only so that they remain firm during working when lot of heats is developed.

The next activity is providing off load tap changer. A horizontal type 6 tap off load
switch (procured from outsourcing) is mounted and wired in the classes of 250 kva
transformers. There is no off-load tap changer to 25, 63 and 100 kva transformers.
Then the active parts are lowered into appropriate tanks and oil filled. The external
surfaces of the tanks (procured by outsourcing) are also earlier painted with the following
colours.

[Link] Transformer Capacity Col our

1 25KVA Green-Blue
2 63KVA Silver gray
3 100KVA Green

All the transil oil used are of BDV of 40 to 60 KV. The top pate with silica gel breather
is fitted to the 25 KVA transformer using rubberized cork sheet strips for avoiding oil leakage.
In the case of 63, 100 and 250 KVA transformers the top plates are fitted with conservator
tanks with oil-level indicators At this stage itself the HV and LV bushings (completely
assembled porcelains with rain sheds, bushing rods, screws, gaskets, rubber seals for
preventing oil leakage etc) are also fitted and wired to the HV and LV windings.

In the case of 25KVA the bushings are on tank sides and not on the top cover plate.
Here the oil is filled up to about 2 inches above the active part and top plate fitted with air
buffer. but breather provided at the top plate itself. Here oil level indicator is at top portion of
the tank itself. For all the other transformers the bushings are top plate mounted.

Transformer losses and STAR ratings: The STAR rating is a process introduced by
government of India recently to rate the qualities of different transformers with particular
references to core losses as it is these losses that occur always irrespective of loads. The
transformers are rated one star, two star, three star etc depending upon the decrease in
losses respectively. All normal transformers fit in the first 2 categories where are 3 star and
above ratings require extra cares in desgn and manufacturing process. In this factory these
star rated transformers are also rated.

Quality and Kavika : Almost all transformer manufacturers are in private sectors. With
about 4 decades of experience by the author it can be said that they all believe in duping one
way or the other resulting in their own financial gains. But in KAVIKA no such motives can be
attributed to any of the employees. Hence one can get a quality product.

69
.

A typical set of transformers are supposed to have the following losses.

[Link] Transformer Permissible
Capacity Losses
inwatts.
1 25KVA 100
2 63KVA 180
3 100KVA 260
4 250KVA 500

In view of the importance, most of the customers witness the core loss tests 100% and
reject those that have losses exceed the above limits. To this extent purchase clauses
normally include the above losses condition.

All the transformers finally arrive at the testing zone where each transformer is tested
for megger results, ratio winding resistance, vector group, dielectric tests like separate source
high voltage and induced over voltage test (popularly known as DYDF – double voltage double
frequency).

All tested good transformers are notified to the purchasing customer. In the customer‟s
presence the transformers or again tested 100% sometimes or random numbers. This
depends on the conditions of purchase by the customer.

Later the transformers are shipped to customer premises.

70
.

CHAPTER -6

SUB-STATION
THE ELECTRICAL SUB STATION AND ITS MAINTENANCE

Function of ac sub station

In modern ac power systems, the transmission and distribution system functions to
deliver bulk power from generating sources to the users at the load centers. Transmission
facilities generally include generating stations, step up transformers, interconnecting
transmission lines, switching stations and step down transformers.

As an integral part of the transmission system, the ac substation or the switching

station functions as a connection and switching point for transmission lines, sub transmission
feeders, generating circuits and step up and step down transformers.

The substation design objective is to provide maximum reliability, flexibility in

operation, continuity of service and to meet these objectives with the lowest investment costs
that satisfy system requirements.

System requirements include the selection of optimum voltage levels, which depend on
the load requirements and transmission line distances involved. Many large thermal and
nuclear power plants are located far from the load centers in order to capitalize on low site
costs, ample cooling water supply, economical fuel supply, less stringent environmental
considerations. For these reasons the use of the transmission voltages of 400KV is becoming
more common in our country.

The design of a substation should provide a high level of service continuity, provision
for further expansion, flexibility of operation and low initial and ultimate costs.

The design of substation should provide means for maintaining lines, breaker and
switches with no service interruption or hazard to personnel.

For reliability, the sub station design should prevent total sub station shut down
caused by breaker failure or bus faults and should be such as to permit rapid restoration of
service after a fault occurs.

Maintenance of sub station

Maintenance may be defined as the upkeep of the substation electrical equipment in

proper working and efficient condition to derive the following:
1) Reliable and efficient operation
2) Optimum utilization
3) Availability
4) Reduced down time
5) Detection of premature faults

71
.

6) Minimizing revenue loss etc.

To meet the above requirement, the equipment has to be checked, attended to, trouble-
shooted and operated under specified conditions.

A large percentage of failures of electrical equipment are due to deterioration of

insulation, loose contact, abnormal operating conditions etc. Many of these failures can be
anticipated by regular application of simple tests and timely maintenance.

If the fault conditions leading to failure are detected in the early stage itself, the extent
of damage can be reduced and the equipment can be reconditioned and put back into service.

Any abnormality will be followed by warning signals like variation in sound, excess
temperature, vibration, spark, blown out fuses, frequent trippings, tripping before full load etc.

The detection of incipient faults in electrical equipment depends upon use of proper
diagnostic tools, its effective use, correlation and proper interpretation of test results and
observations based on experience, manufacturer‟s guidance etc.

Proper maintenance of electrical equipment demands that a maintenance schedule be

prepared for each equipment which includes daily, weekly, monthly, half yearly, yearly
checks based on the manufacturer‟s recommendation.

The „Maintenance schedule for sub stations‟ brought out by KPTCL should be followed
as the basic document for preparing the maintenance schedule.

Classification of maintenance activity

1) Corrective or breakdown maintenance.
2) Preventive maintenance.
3) Condition based maintenance
4) Reliability centered maintenance.
5) Equipment failure analysis.
6) Techniques for reducing down time.
7) Spares management
8) Documentation/Computerization on maintenance

Corrective or breakdown maintenance is carried out as and when necessary. This

applies only to low value and auxiliary equipments, breakdown of which does not affect
power supply continuity.

Preventive maintenance calls for advance planning based on previous experience,

equipment manufacturer guidance and preparation of equipment specific maintenance
schedule.

Generally, an annual maintenance plan is made to carry out preventive maintenance.

The advantage lies in uninterrupted power supply, increased availability of the equipment
and reduction in maintenance cost.

72
.

Condition based maintenance is based on condition assessment of the equipment by

tests ON or OFF the line. This is ideal for prevention of equipment failure and other associated
consequent damages.

Reliability centered maintenance is generally carried out on old equipment by

conducting „Remaining life assessment studies‟ and based on economics, life extension
techniques are adopted without sacrificing reliability and availability. The maintenance costs
are also reduced.

Equipment failure analysis is the major responsibility of maintenance personnel to

prevent repeated failure of equipment and provide inputs for necessary change in design
parameters, new equipment design, quality control plan, erection and subsequent
maintenance technique.

Techniques of reducing down time play a vital role in continuity of power supply. Hot
line maintenance, maintenance of one line of a double circuit line with other circuit in live
condition, deployment of emergency restoration system etc., are few examples.

Spares management ensures availability of right spares most frequently required and
at the right location and there by help in immediate restoration of power supply.

The documentation is a record of the type of maintenance activity carried out, any
abnormalities noticed during checking etc, chronologically documented and computerized for
further analysis and action.

Substation Equipment and Its Function

1) Bus bars
Various incoming and outgoing circuits are connected to bus bars. Bus bars receive
power from incoming circuits and deliver power to out going circuits. Bus bars are of two
types;
a) Rigid aluminum tubular Bus bars supported on post insulators
b) Flexible ACSR or All Aluminum stranded Bus bars supported from two ends by
strain insulators.

2) Surge Arresters (Lightning arresters)

Surge arresters discharge the over voltage surges to earth and protect the equipment
insulation from switching surges and lightning surges.
These are connected between phase conductor and ground, Gapped arresters and
Gapless zinc oxide arresters are two major types.

3) Isolators (Disconnecting switch)

These are used to provide isolation from live parts for the purpose of maintenance.
Isolators are located at each side of circuit breakers. Isolators are not rated for any
making or breaking current except for small charging current. Isolators are generally inter
locked with breaker.
Isolators are of two types;

73
.

a) Center rotating, horizontal swing

b) Center break, vertical swing

4) Earthing switch
These are used for discharging any induced voltage on the circuit to earth for safety.

5) Current Transformer
Current Transformers are used for stepping down current for measurement, protection
and control.

6) Voltage Transformer
Voltage Transformers are used for stepping down voltage for measurement, protection
and control. Electromagnetic and capacitive (CVT) are two main types and is located on the
feeder side on the breaker.

7) Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers are required for switching during normal and abnormal operating
condition and to interrupt short circuit currents. Circuit breakers are located near every
switching point, at both ends of every protected zone. There are different types depending on
the medium of arc quenching like SF6, Vacuum, Air blast, oil etc.

8) Power Transformers
To step up or step down a.c voltages and to transfer electrical power from one voltage
level to another. Tap changers are used for voltage control. Usually transformers for out door
use are oil filled. For large capacity, three single phase units are used to form a three phase
bank.

9) Shunt Reactors
Used for long EHV transmission line to control voltage and compensate shunt
capacitance of the line during low load periods.

10) Shunt Capacitor

For compensating reactive power of lagging power factor. To improve power factor.
Switched in during heavy loads, switched off during low loads.

11) Marshalling Kiosks

To mount monitoring instruments, control equipment and to provide access to various
transducers. Control and protective cables are laid between marshalling kiosks located in
switchyard and corresponding indoor control panels.

12) Metering panels, Control and Relay Panels (Indoor)

To house various measuring instruments, control instruments and protective relays.
Control cables are laid between switchyard equipment and these panels.

74
.

13) Low voltage AC Switchgear

To provide ac power to auxiliaries, station lighting system etc., located inside
switchgear building.

14) Station Earthing system

To provide low earth resistance path for discharging currents from surge arresters, Ear
thing switches, for equipment body earthing, for providing path for neutral to ground currents
and for earth fault current protection. Earth mat provided below ground level meet the above
requirement.

15) Lightning Mast

To protect sub station equipment from direct lightning strokes. The lightning masts are
located in the out door yard.

16) Power Cables

For power flow - single core or three core cables either PVC insulated or XLPE
insulated.

17) Control Cables

These are generally multi core cables of either PVC insulated or shielded cables used
for protection, control and measurements.

18) Insulators
To insulate live parts - string insulators of tension or suspension and post insulators
made of porcelain, glass and epoxy material for indoor use.

19) Carrier equipment

Used for protection and communication signaling, voice communication, protection
signaling, telex channel, control and monitoring signals. The PLCC panel is located in control
room. The wave trap unit is usually mounted above CVT or on separate structure.

20) Station battery/DC system

To meet energy requirement of tripping and closing of breakers independently and to
meet annunciation and lighting and indication requirement as well as protective relays.

With this introduction, let us further discuss maintenance aspects of specific

sub station equipment for proper up keep in the coming sessions.

75
.

Maintenance Schedule for Sub-Stations

Details of Transformer Maintenance:-

Sl. Items to be Inspection Action Required

No. Inspected
A B C D
1 Oil level a) Check Oil level in Top up with Good New
Conservator as shown by Tested oil if Oil level is low.
Magnetic Oil Gauge with
reference to Oil Temperature.

b) Check Oil level in OLTC

Conservator also.
c) Check Oil level in Sight
glass of the Bushing. If Low, Investigate and
take Remedial Action. Top
up oil if Bushing is not
Hermetically sealed.
2 Testing of Oil a) Check BDV, min values as Take action to restore
per IS 1866 (2.5 mm gap) quality of oil, procedure for
i) 145 KV and above: 50 testing BDV as per
KV. Appendix - A.
ii) 72.5 - 145 KV : 40 KV
iii) Below 72.5 KV : 30 KV
b) Check for BDV of OLTC Oil
:
Min. Value of BDV: 24 KV.
c) Oil samples to be sent to R
& D Centre Once a year for Take Action to restore BDV
test as per IS 1866 of oil of OLTC to 50 KV.
Sampling Method as per
Appendix - B.
3 Relief vent Check for damage to Replace if damaged.
Diaphragm
4 Breather a) Check Oil level in Cup. a) Fill Oil up to Mark.
b) Check Colour of Silicagel. b) Reactivate or Replace if
c) Ensure that the Air the colour is White or
passage is free in the Pink.
Breather. c) Clean Air passage if
blocked and use only
Large size Crystals (3
to 5mm).
d) Colour of Good Silicagel

76
.

is Blue.
5 OLTC Counter a) Check Reading of Rectify/Replace if Faulty.
Counter and Verify its Keep daily record of No. of
Working. Tap changer Operation
with cumulative total.
6 Jumper Connection a) Check for tightness of Take Remedial Measures.
and Earthing Clamps and Damage to
Conductor & Earthing Leads.
7 Bushings a) Examine for a) Clean/Replace if
Cracks/Damages and Dust. necessary.
8 OLTC - Motor Drive a) Lubricate Bearings, a) Top up Oil in Gear Box,
and Control Panel Cleaning, and Clean Contactors etc.
Check Gear Box Oil b) Rectify defect in
level. Electrical operation,
b) Check Operation of Loose wiring to be
limit Switches, tightened.
Sequence Switches
with transformer in
off condition.
9 Cooler Fan & Pump Lubricate Bearings examine Replace Contractor if
contactor contacts. Contacts are burnt.
10 IR & PI values Compare with previous PI > 1.5 is good
values.
11 Trip Relays and a) Check Operation of
Alarm Relays. Auxiliary Relay, Breaker
Tripping of Bucholtz Relay,
(Main& OLTC) PRV, Oil and
winding Temperature (Trip)
by injecting Air and
artificially actuating the
Temperature Indicator
respectively.
b) Check Operation of
Annunciation for
Oil/Winding Temperature
by actuating the
temperature Indicators and
MOG by shorting.
c) Check Auto start of Fans
and Pumps through Attend to defect if any.
Temperature Indicator and
also observe whether
operates at the set
temperature.
12 Gasket Joints Check for Leakages. Tighten the Bolts evenly to
avoid uneven pressure and

77
.

take measure to stop leak.

13 Temperature Pocket (Holding Thermometer Oil to be replaced after
Indicator. Sensor) to be checked. cleaning Pocket and Probe.
14 Dial Type Oil Gauge Check Pointer for free Check gauge reading with
(Magnetic Oil Gauge) movement respect to Oil in
Conservator using Dip
Stick.
15 Earth Resistance Measure Earth Resistance of Take action if the value is
Body and Neutral High, Check Connection at
Electrodes.
16 OLTC Diverter Diverter Switch contact, Replace if damaged as per
Chamber Resistor Arcing Contacts etc. manufacturer's
Instructions. Replace Oil
Regardless of condition
after Flushing and
cleaning the Diverter
Switch chamber.
17 Conservator Once in 2 years Inspect Internally clean
and refill with clean Oil.
18 Flushing Visual Inspection & good See Note -1 on page – 23
Transformer core cleaning with Oil Jet.
and Winding
Assembly

IR Measurement and Polarization Index Value (PI):-

Measurement of insulation Resistance reveals the condition of Insulation (degree of

dryness of Paper Insulation), presence of any foreign contamination in Oil and any gross
defect inside the Transformers.

For Transformer winding with voltage ratings 11 KV and above 2500V megger shall be
used and for EHV Transformers preferably 5000V megger shall be used (Motorized).

This test should be carried out during shut down period. Ensure the isolation of
Transformer from High voltage and Low voltage side (including tertiary) by physically
inspecting the concerned Isolators/disconnectors. Disconnect the jumpers and Lightning
Arrestors connected to the Transformer.

Precautions:-
1) Clean the bushings and porcelain by wiping with a piece of dry cloth.
2) Transformer windings posses a substantial capacitance and therefore electric parts can
only be touched after discharging. Lead wires from the bushings, tank and earth to the
megger shall be as short as possible without joints and shall not touch tank or each other.

78
.

Testing Procedure:-

IR measurement shall be taken between each winding and tank. The rest of windings
being earthed and between windings.

Record date and time of measurement, Sl. No, make of megger, Oil Temperature,
weather condition, IR Values at 15 seconds and 60 seconds shall be recorded - Line terminal
of the instrument shall be connected to winding.

Evaluation of Results:-
IR value may be compared with values in manufactures/ precommission report and
these values may be used as bench mark for IR monitoring in service. For comparison of IR
Values the readings shall be converted to common Temperature base by using the following
correction factor.

Difference in Temperature o C Correction Factor

5oC 1.23
10o C 1.50
15o C 1.84
20o C 2.25
25o C 2.76
30o C 3.35
35o C 4.10
40o C 5.00

As the values vary with temperature of the insulation, it is necessary that correct
temperature of oil be taken and hence the oil temperature indicator should be in good working
condition for correct comparison of IR Values.

The megger values for comparison shall be calculated at a common temperature of 30 o

C. For conversion from higher temperature to lower temperature i.e., if the megger values are
taken at say 50o C and for conversion to (50o-30o =20o C) i.e., 2.25.
Conversely for conversion from lower temperature to higher temperature base the
megger values obtained should be divided by the correction factors corresponding to the
difference in temperature.

Polarization Index Values:-

The P.I. is the ratio of the 10 minutes to 1 minute Mega Ohm readings when taken with
motorized megger at constant voltage. The following are the guidelines for P.I. Value to
evaluate Transformer Insulation.
P.I. Value Condition
<1 Dangerous
1 - 1.25 Poor
1.25 – 2 Fair
>2 Good

79
.

However in case motorized megger is not available, the ratio of 60 seconds to 15

seconds IR Values may be taken for computing P.I. Value with hand operated Meggers.

Oil Leakage:-

Check joints for leakage of both welded joints and joints with gaskets. If any doubt of
leak, the area must be cleaned of oil using solvent (ethyl Alcohol) and apply wet chalk. This
will give a good indication of exact location of leak. If leak is in the gasket, joints must be
tightened evenly. If it is at a welded joint, tap the weld material into the pin hole by using
small ball pane hammer and apply sealing compound. Other area to be checked are drain
plugs, valves in oil piping.

Silica Gel:-

When 1/2 to 2/3 of the silicagel becomes saturated and turn pink in colour, it is to be
changed/reactivated by heating up to 130o C until the entire mass turns to bright blue. If the
temperature exceeds, the Crystals may become black & hence cannot be used. Use only
large size crystals (3 to 5 mm).

Cooling System:-

Cooling System in a Transformer is very important for keeping temperature rise of oil &
winding under limits when the transformer is in service for various load & the following are to
be checked & rectified.

1) Check radiator top and bottom valves are fully open.

2) Ensure air passage between fins is clear by cleaning any foreign objects present.
3) The temperature at top and bottom is uniform in all radiators.
4) All the fan blades, guards etc. are clean and fan rotation and speed are in order.
5) The Bearings are free and if not, lubricate the same using grease gun. Bearings to be
replaced if unusual noise is heard.
6) Check for correct rotation, unusual noise, and abnormal vibration of cooling pumps. If
necessary replace rotor/bearing.
7) Check for correct direction of oil/air flow.

8) Checking of Oil Temperature Indicator:-

Remove the OTI bulb from the pocket on the Transformer lid and insert it in an oil bath along
with an external thermometer. Both indicator readings should tally (both, with heating of oil
bath and while cooling).

1) Winding temperature indicators to be calibrated once a year as per the manufacturers

test procedure of the temperature indicator.

2) Check the operation of Bucholtz relay alarm and trip contacts by pumping air through
the air release cock after closing the valves on either side of the Bucholtz relay.

80
.

Alternatively after closing both the valves, drain the oil in Bucholtz relay by opening
the drain cock and check operation of Alarm and trip contacts of mercury switches.

Maintenance of Circuit Breakers

The CB should be able to operate immediately during fault conditions. For such an
operation regular and detailed maintenance is necessary. The lack of maintenance may
result in failure in operation of CB.

Maintenance manuals should be carefully studied by trained maintenance staff.

Detailed program of maintenance of CB should be prepared with pre-determined intervals
between inspections. The period may be quarterly; half yearly, yearly etc. the maintenance
work is done by trained staff according to the schedule. In case of difficult jobs the
manufacturer is consulted.
Break down VS preventive maintenance

Maintenance is classified in two categories namely.

Break down or corrective maintenance:

The breakdown maintenance is undertaken after failure of the equipment. In general it
consists of locating the trouble, repair and recommissioning.

1) Preventive Maintenance:
The preventive maintenance is under taken to ensure smooth and efficient working of
a system. Equipment preventive maintenance is under taken as per schedule before
breakdown of a system or equipment takes place.

A performance record of each equipment is maintained and basing decisions on the

service life of the equipment and the total number of hours of service, it has put in. Repair or
replacements are made to ensure that no breakdown occurs at any time during the service.
Preventive maintenance is carried out in a planned manner. Breakdown maintenance is
carried out as and when necessary.

The maintenance of SF6 CBs needs the following checks.

1) Checking of SF6 gas pressure.
2) Checking of oil leaks from grading capacitors.
3) SF6 gas leak test.
4) Due point measurement of SF6 gas.

For hydraulic operating mechanism the following checks are needed.

1) Checking of oil level and replenishment and topping up if necessary.
2) Checking of oil pressure.
3) Checking for oil leaks.
4) Checking of oil pressure drop during duty cycle operation check.

81
.

5) Checking of auto starting /stopping of oil pumps.

6) N2 priming pressure measurement.

For pneumatic operating mechanisms, the following checks are needed.

1) Auto starting function of air compressors and Dryers.
2) Maintenance of air dryer.
3) Checking for any air pressure drop during duty cycle operation.

In all CBs, the breaker operation checks like CB operation timing, static contact
resistance, pole discrepancy relay, operation lock outs, interlocks, pressure settings etc., are
to be made.

Testing and Maintenance of SF6 Breakers

Recommended maintenance schedule are of two types:

1) Time wise maintenance programme.
2) Operational wise maintenance programme.

Time wise maintenance programme

SL Inspection Frequency Description

No
1 Patrol Every week Inspection to check the operation of
inspection circuit breaker externally for
irregularities.
2. Periodical Every year Checking operation of mechanism
inspection cleaning of dust and dirt and lubricating
the moving parts without discharging the
gas. Also check for operation of breaker
associated air, gas, alarm and control
circuits.
3. Overhaul Every 5 Checking of fixed and moving contacts
inspection years on the and replacing it if necessary, adjusting
No of contact travel distance, movement
operations associated with closing and tripping
are mechanism so that breaker can operate
mentioned with designed ability and to reduce the
below. failures.

82
.

Operational wise maintenance programme

SL Item Operating condition Inspection period

No
1 Inspection Small current interruptions (if the After approx 4000
or renewal breaker is carrying less than the rated operations.
of the main current)
contacts Rated continuous current interruption After approx 2000
operations.
Rated short circuit current interruption. After 20 operations
2 Renewal of Total number of operations After 5000
parts of operations
operating
mechanism

Inspection items

SL System Inspection Item Remarks

NO
1. Cracks and contamination of Clean with dry
porcelain waste cloths.
Over haul and discoloration of Clean with emery
Appearance main terminals (Jumper contacts) paper.
Tightening of all external Bolt Every quarterly
and nuts
Draining water from the reservoir Every seven days
Rust Spraying/Applying
antirust products.
2. Stroke and contact wipe As specified by the
measurement. manufacturer.
Contact and nozzle inspection Checking for pitting
and clean with
emery paper or
replace it if
Interrupting necessary.
unit or arc Renewal of desiccant
chamber Insulation resistance 1000M ohms
measurement of main circuit minimum by using
5kv megger.
Contact resistance of main circuit 100micro ohms
maximum by using
DC voltage drop
method.

83
.

3. Measurement of mechanism Like operation

dimension and functioning counter and
tightness of the
bolts in the
housing
Lubricating the mechanism As specified by the
Operating manufacturer.
mechanism Leakage check of dash pot oil,
looseness of circlips and nuts
Check of insulation of control 2 M ohms
circuit wiring minimum by 500v
megger
Check rust inside or water Paint if necessary,
leakage in the housing replacement of
gaskets, make the
housing vermin
proof.
4. Measuring the gas pressure and Daily
temperature
Check the gas isolating valves Daily
Gas systems and pipe systems for any
leakages.
Setting of gas density switch Yearly, set as per
requirement
5. Measurement of air pressure and Daily
temperature
Check of setting of air pressure Yearly
switch
Checking of oil level and oil Top up /replace if
quality in the crank case of the necessary
Air systems compressor
Safety value setting Yearly
Checking for air leakage in all Daily
valves and pipe lines.
Compressor Running Check for vibration
or sound or belt
tension.
6. Mechanism Ageing of vibration isolating Replace if aged.
Housing and rubber and door packing
others
7. Check of closing and opening If abnormal set as
time per manufacturer
direction

84
.

Check of stored energy of Operate the

Operation compressed air. breaker two times
Test (from rated
pressure to lockout
pressure)
Minimum operating air pressure Verification of
positive operation
at 12kg /cm2
pressure

Extract of KPTCL maintenance schedule for sub-stations on maintenance of

Breakers (manual No: KPTCL – 03/SS)

1) Check compressed Air and gas pressures, if any leaks, Rectify (in each pole for 220kv
Breakers)
2) Checking of oil leaks and rectification. In case of BOCB, MOCB‟s, Hydraulic operated
breaker mechanism topping up if necessary.
3) Checking of Auto start/stop of compressors/pumps.
4) Checking of Alarm and lock out for Air / gas.
5) Recording No. of operation of counters.
6) Lubrication of operating and linkage mechanisms as well as trip and close mechanism.
7) Changing of compressor oil every six months.
8) Tightening of control circuit terminals every six months.
9) Checking of breaker status indicator(mechanical)
10) Tightening of clamps, jumps connections, breaker assembly frame, foundation and
structural bolts(Quarterly)
11) Tightening of Auxiliary switches (Half yearly).
12) Check closing and tripping of breaker through relays(Quarterly)
13) Meggering of breakers (Across and phase to ground) half yearly.

For HV Breakers

1) CB timing checks and contact resistance (in association with MRT/Research).

2) Pole discrepancy relay check including checking of Alarm.
3) Operation of lock out checks.
4) Measurement of Tan- delta and capacitance (R&D center).
5) Earth connections check.
6) Detailed check up of breaker operating mechanism and compressors.

85
.

CAPACITOR BANK AND ITS MAINTENANCE

Introduction

Capacitors are widely used in distribution systems to achieve power and energy loss
reduction, system capacity release and to maintain a voltage profile within permissible limits.
The extent of these benefits depends on the location, type and number of capacitors.

On a typical power system, approximately 75% of the reactive power (VAR) requirements for a
complete electrical system comes from the consumer load. The remaining 25% is needed to
supply VAR requirements of the power system itself. This includes Generators, transmission
lines, transformers and distribution lines.

SHUNT CAPACITORS

Shunt Capacitors are meant only to compensate the VAR needs of the loads and system.
This means that the load should not need any VAR from the source through transmission
lines i.e. the reactive component of the load is generated locally through shunt capacitors and
there will not be any voltage drop in the line due to reactive component of the load current.
This is turn brings back the voltage at the load end almost to the unloaded line voltage level
and this is considered as “Increase” by engineers generally. But it is only making „Good the
Loss or Voltage Drop‟ if the capacitors are properly applied but there is no real „increase‟ in
voltage. If at all any real increase is achieved, this will be due to over compensation by
capacitors. It should be remembered that such over compensation increases the line current,
increases the line losses etc.

In abstract, shunt capacitors,

a) Reduce the line current by nullifying the inductive reactance current component through
the capacitive reactance currents (of capacitors).
This helps
→ reduce the line losses.
→ increase the MW loading capability of lines.
→ reduces the line voltage drop thereby bringing the receiving end voltage nearer to
sending end voltage (minus the IR drop).
Shunt Capacitor installations at sub – stations provide the following advantages.

1. They ensure that the transmission of inductive KVAR to the load area from the
generating source is kept at reasonable limits.
2. They avoid overloading of circuits and/or release circuit load carrying capacity.
3. By avoiding over loading they release spare MVA, capacity on the generators.
4. They reduce system I2R losses. (A unit saved is 2 units generated).
5. They improve the voltage regulation and or restore it to an acceptable level for a given
load.

86
.

SERIES CAPACITORS

Series capacitors which are connected in series with the circuit, introduce negative or leading
reactance in the line. Current through negative reactance causes voltage drop that leads the
current by 90°. This drop is opposite in nature when compared to that across an inductive
reactance. Thus a series capacitor compensates for the drop or part of the drop through the
inductive reactance of the feeder. The main advantage of series capacitor is that the
Quantum of compensation is dependant on load current and is given by QS = IXc. Hence the
series capacitor can be kept in service during the complete load angle without causing the
adverse effect of over voltages during light load period.

The series capacitor is not a reactive power compensation device, but a reactance
compensation device. Since the series capacitors greatly influence the reactive power
conditions of transmission systems, it is, however, proper to include also them in the
description of reactive compensative devices.

Series capacitors are mainly installed in EHV transmission systems for one or more main
reasons, i.e., to increase the transmission load capability, to obtain load division among
parallel circuits. Further, series capacitors favorably influence the control of both the voltage
and the reactive power balance. The reason for this is that the reactive power generated in a
series capacitor increases with increasing transmitted load; a series capacitor is to some
extent a self – regulating device in this respect.

Benefit of Series Capacitors.

The series capacitor causes a voltage rise at its point of location and improves the voltage in
the line beyond the location of series capacitor. The problem of optimal series capacitive
compensation is concerned with the determination of the location and capacity of series
capacitor to be provided on distribution feeder such that losses are minimized and voltage
profile is maintained within statutory limits.

Series and Shunt Capacitors

Series capacitors are used to allow higher power transfer over a long distance. The shunt
capacitor banks are used at the receiving ends of heavily loaded transmission lines. The
series and shunt capacitors are used to control the reactive power during lightly loaded/over
load conditions.

Maintenance of Capacitor Bank.

A capacitor is basically maintenance free, requiring only periodic bushing cleaning in

contaminated areas. The installation should be inspected periodically for failed units. This
check should be made after de-energising and following the “safety instructions”.
The preventive maintenance of the capacitor bank is as follows.
1) Checking the capacitor periodically preferably once in a month.

87
.

2) Checking individual capacitor unit, leakage of oil from the terminals, welded seam,
bulging and excessive temperature rise.
3) For bus bars checking for tightness in connections and ensuring no deformation.
4) Checking for cracks and cleanliness of post type insulators.
5) Checking and ensuring tightness in connections and proper clearance of all connecting
strips of the capacitor units.
6) Checking the racks for corrosion and dirt.
7) Checking of clamps, jumps and earth connections.
8) Checking of blown out external fuses.
9) Capacitance measurement and balancing.

Scheme of connection of capacitor bank with protection

STATION BATTERY MAINTENANCE

Besides the AC supply, another reliable source of auxiliary power is essential at Sub-stations
for the following specific purposes:-

1) To deliver DC power requirements when the DC loads exceeds the charger output.
2) To deliver DC power to the DC when the charger output is interrupted.
3) To deliver DC power when station auxiliary AC power fails.

The DC power is required to supply Trip coils and closing coils, Indicating lamps, Alarm, for
energizing the holding and operating coils in control and interlock schemes and in protection
schemes. Also, the DC power is required for PLCC and other supervisory equipment and
emergency DC lighting.

The DC system in a sub-station operates with the storage battery, the battery charges and
load, all connected in parallel. The normal DC load plus any self discharge or charging
current, or both, required by the battery is supplied by the battery charger. The battery will
deliver current only when the DC load exceeds the charger output.

STORAGE BATTERIES

A battery is a device which supplies DC power by converting the stored chemical energy into
electrical energy when connected to an external load. A battery is usually designed by
connecting several individual cells in series or parallel to meet the specific requirements of
voltage and energy. In primary batteries, the electrode reactions are irreversible i.e. the
battery has to be discharged once the stored chemical energy is spent. Whereas in the
secondary batteries, also called as storage batteries or accumulator, the battery can be
recharged after a discharge by passing an electrical current from an external source.

88
.

Though Lead-acid batteries , Nickel- Cadmium batteries, Nickel –Iron batteries and Zinc-
Chloride batteries are available, the lead – acid battery is still being used in KPTCL sub-
stations due to the following characteristics:-

1) Low initial and operating cost as compared to alkaline batteries.

2) It‟s voltage on discharge is the higher of all the reversible combinations used.
3) It uses comparatively cheap and plentiful materials.
4) The completely reversible chemical reactions produce little physical change in the
plates.
5) It can operate satisfactorily over wide range of temperature from approximately
-18 degrees Celsius to 43 degrees Celsius.

The basic chemical reaction of lead-acid battery is exposed as follows:-

Pbso4 + Pbso4 + 2H2O Pbo2 + Pb + 2H2So4

Lead sulphate Lead sulphate Distilled Lead Dioxide Lead
Negative Sulphuric Acid
Positive Negative Electrolyte positive Negative
Electrolyte

89
.

90
.

Terminology

1) Rated Capacity
The Ampere – Hour capacity of a battery on discharge is determined by
a) Final limiting voltage
b) Discharge rate
c) Number, Design and dimension of plate.
d) Design of separators.
e) Quality of Electrolyte.
f) Specific gravity of Electrolyte.
g) Temperature etc.

The most common value of limiting voltage is 1.8 Volts per cell for lead-acid battery, 1.10Volts
for Nickel-Iron battery. The ratings are expressed in Ampere-Hours at 10 Hr. discharge rate.
For instance a 100 AH capacity battery at 10 Hr. discharge rate can give out 10A
continuously for 10 Hrs, with its final cell voltage maintained at not less than 1.85V as
specified temperature for a lead-acid battery. Depending on the discharge current, the
capacity of the battery varies at various rates of discharge.

2) Duty Cycle:

The battery duty cycle is the load currents that a battery is expected to supplied for specified
time periods.

3) Trickle Charge:

Batteries are to be maintained on a Trickle charge to avoid sulphation. A steady Trickle

charge will keep the battery in good condition and the charging rate should be just sufficient
to counteract the sulphating action of the electrolyte. Generally, the amount of this Trickle
charge is about 2% of the 10 Hr capacity spread over 24 Hrs. e.g. for a 300 AH battery the
rate of Trickle charge is worked out as 2/100*300/24=.25 A.

The life of the battery is not reckoned as a period of time but as the No. of cycles of Charges
and Discharges. A battery maintained on Trickle charge and seldom used should last
indefinitely.

4) Boost Charge:

Boost charge is generally done as and when there is a fall in specific gravity and is done till
all cells are gassing and all plates are healthy and the voltages and specific gravities of all
cells become constant at their optimum values.

5) Full Float Operation:

Full float operation is the operation of a D.C system with the battery, battery charger, and
load, all connected in parallel and with the battery charger supplying the normal D.C load

91
.

plus any self discharge or charging current, or both, required by the battery. The battery will
deliver current only when the load exceeds the charger output.

Maintenance of Lead-Acid Batteries

1) Care should be taken to avoid the risk of explosion particularly during charge.
Naked flames lighted Cigarettes should never be brought near the battery at any
time.
2) Metal vessels should not be used for topping up because of the danger of short
circuiting the terminals. Spanners or other metal tools should never be left on the
top of the cells as this may cause sparking and damage to the containers.
3) Topping up should be carried out repeatedly with pure distilled water. Acid
should never be used.
4) Specific gravity readings give a good indication of the state of the battery and
should be taken and recorded.
5) Inspection of the electrolyte level should be carried out regularly and the level of
the electrolyte should never be allowed to drop below the top of the separators. A
regular routine for topping and general inspection should be insisted.
6) The battery should be clean and dry and all the connections tight.
7) All metal work should be coated with petroleum jelly.
8) Wood lined boxes should be wiped over with Linseed oil once a year to preserve
the timber.
9) Panted wood work should be regularly washed down and if necessary, repainted
with anti-sulphuric acid paint.
10) Cells and crates should be inspected at intervals to see that they are kept clean
and dry, and dry compressed air is a useful means of removing the dirt that
might collect during service.
11) All connections should be kept firmly tightened and the terminals and inter cell
connections and cell lids lightly greased with Vaseline or pure mineral jelly. No
grease should be allowed to get inside the cell or vent reopening, or else forthing
of the electrolyte may result. On no account should any animal or vegetable
grease be used.
12) In common practice with all types of batteries, high operating temperatures tend
to shorten the life, batteries should be kept as cool as possible. It must be
ensured that ventilation provided is adequate and does not become blocked or
chocked up during service, the electrolyte temperature must be kept as for below
45 degree C. as possible. Lower temperatures are of more importance during
charging and therefore, wherever practicable batteries should be allowed to cool
down as much as possible before they are put on charge.
13) Any loss of the electrolyte due to evaporation or electrolysis during charging must
be made good by the addition of pure distilled water only.
14) A simple method of checking electrolyte level is to use a length of about 200cm of
heavy walled glass tube with an inside diameter of 4.5mm to 6mm open with
both ends. Insert the tube through the filler or opening until it rests on the top of

92
.

the plates, close the upper end with the finger and withdraw the tube. The
length of the electrolyte held in the tube will then indicate the depth of the
solution above the plates. Topping up should be carried out repeatedly with pure
distilled water. Acid should never be used. Specific gravity readings give a good
indication of the state of the battery. All connections should be kept firmly
tightened and terminals, inter cell connections and cell lids lightly greased with
Vaseline or pure mineral jelly. No grease should be allowed to get inside the cell.
While inspecting, it is very important to check if any active material of the battery
plates is dropping. This should not be allowed to build in order to avoid short
circuits between plates.

Source of trouble
Although a well maintained battery may give satisfactory long service life, the life may get
shortened due to accident or abuse. The manufacturer‟s detailed instructions for proper care
and maintenance including initial changing should be followed.
The following are some of the common sources of trouble, and the same if recognized in time,
can be corrected.

Over Charging

This produces excessive gassing and loosens the active material in plates and this material is
deposited in the bottom of the jar as a fine grey-sediment. Temperature of the battery also
increases. Frequent overcharging decreases useful life of battery.

Under Charging

Results in lower specific gravity. Plates become somewhat lighter in colour. Under charging
results in one or more cells becoming exhausted before the others and some of these may
become reversed by the other cells of the battery. The remedy is to charge the battery till all
the cells come to normal condition again.

Corroded Terminals

The products of corrosion are non-conducting substances and form the layer between
terminals of the battery and the clamp connected to it. This may prevent the battery from
delivering sufficient current for tripping and closing coils. The remedy is to remove the
products of corrosion and clean with dilute solution of ammonia to neutralize the acid and
applying Vaseline.

Cracked or Broken Jars

Leakage of electrolyte indicates cracked jars. If the crack is slight, and detected, the
tendency is to add distilled water and in such cases the electrolyte gradually becomes, and
the cell capacity comes down. The only remedy is to replace the jar, as soon as a crack is
discovered.

93
.

Short Circuits
This may be caused by the breakdown of one or more separation between negative and
positive plates, or by the excess accumulation of sediments in the bottom of the for or by the
formation of tree like structure of lead from negative to positive plates.

The evidence of short circuits is:-

a) Low specific gravity even though the battery is receiving full charge.
b) Rapid loss of capacity after full charge.
c) Low open circuit voltage.

The remedy is to disassemble the cells, wash out accumulated sediments, and replace old
separator with new one.

Separator Failure
Wooden and glass separation may fail due to pressure of buckled plates or two type packing
of elements. They are subjected to chemical action resulting in failure by acid attacks or by
oxidation. Wooden separators, which have become thin and perforated should be dried and
examined for silvery appearance. If they have become black, they would have coat
mechanical strength. Failure of separators causes short circuit.

Worn Out Plates

Decreases the capacity, even though receiving alternate charging specific gravity of electrolyte
may rise, but the capacity will be below normal if the plates are snarired, potassium, which
have shed finally divided active material more or less evenly from the whole plate, indicate
normal service loss active material is burns and cracked the frames are evidence finally
charging arrangements. Negative plates not showing a metallic stream when soaked with
knite are not in normal condition. Prolonged charging may eliminate uneven shedding of
active material from the positive plate and sandy condition of negative plates.

Electrolyte below top of the plates

These causes and abnormal sulphation and the plates crumble. Necessary distilled water
should be used to top of the solution electrolyte should not be added under any
circumstances.

Sulphation

The result is the formation of lead sulphate on the surface and in the pores of active material
of the plates. The charging current is easily reduces this. The large crystals are crust of lead
sulphate may form on the plates as a result of neglect or misuse. Excessive sulphates of this
kind of makes, it difficult to reduce and injured plates.

The common form for above which causes excessive sulphation are:-
h) Allowing the battery in discharged condition for long time.
i) Neglecting to make repairs when evidences of trouble within the cells are observed.

94
.

j) Topping up of the electrolyte with electrolyte only instead of distilled water.

k) High temperature.
l) Persistence under charging etc.,

The remedy is to pour out electrolyte to some extent and to fill the cells with water. After one
hour the battery may be put on charge, with a low rate of charging current, provides the
voltage at the terminals in less than 2.3 Volts per cell. The sulphate breaks down if the
voltage at the terminals is maintained and the current increases. During this process, the
temperature should not be allowed to exceed the prescribed limits. If the final specific gravity
obtained after prolonged charging becomes constant and too low value, more electrolyte may
be added. Manufacturer‟s instructions shall be strictly followed in such cases.

Explosion:-

The Hydrogen and Oxygen liberated may explode, if a flame or spark ignites them. Removing
of the clips from the battery or accidental short circuit may cause explosion. The charging
circuit cell have to be broken before battery connection are removed.

Maintenance Schedule for station batteries

The Manual [Link]-03/S5 titled "maintenance schedule for sub stations" details the
maintenance schedule for station battery set as well as battery charges. The extract of the
same is attached herewith.

MAINTENANCE OF BATTERY SET & BATTERY CHARGERS

IMPORTANT INSTRUCTION

1. Float Charge should always be kept on (even after the battery set is boost charged).

2.a. While Boost Charging gas vent plug on the cells should be kept open.

2.b. In case of failure of AC supply to the battery charger for more than two hours, the
battery set should be boost charged at the equalizing current rate given at item No. 3a
(ii) for the number of hours the AC supply remained failed.

3. The exhaust fan should be in working condition in the battery room. Equally sufficient
air inlet should be provided to the battery room to prevent any negative pressure
developing in the room. The door of the battery room should always be kept open when
the exhaust fan is running. The room can be kept closed if sufficient in-let for air is
provided in the door itself.

4. Add only distilled water to maintain cell electrolyte level. NEVER ADD ACID.

5. Temperature correction for specific gravity [SG (27º C) = SG (t) + 0.7 (t -27ºC)]

95
.

Example:-
a) Suppose the temperature of battery cell is 32ºC and the reading of hydrometer is
1205, then corrected specific gravity at 27ºC will be 1205 + 0.7 x (32-27) =
1208.5

b) Suppose the temperature of battery cell is 22ºC and the reading of hydrometer is
1205, then corrected specific gravity at 27ºC will be 1205 + 0.7 x (22-27) =
1201.5

6. If in spite of repeated charging, the specific gravity or voltage of some cell (s) does not
improve, these are to be considered weak cells. These should be removed from the
battery set one at a time and charged independently at the specified recharging
current as given at item No. 8 until gassing starts. (Approximately 2.4V/Cell). The
recharging current is reduced to the finishing current as given at item No. 8 till the cell
appears to be fully charged, i.e., the specific gravity of the electrolyte becomes constant
for 3 readings - at 1200 (corrected). Then charging should be stopped for an hour and
then be resumed at finishing current rate until free gassing again takes place. A
further stop of one hour duration should be made and charge should again be resumed
at the finishing current rate and should be repeated until gassing starts
simultaneously with switching on of the charging current. If in spite of this special
charge, the cells do not pick up the specific gravity or voltage, the cells are to be
replaced.

7. During charging, if the temperature of the electrolyte tends to rise beyond 45ºC, reduce
the current to one third the value. If necessary, charging can be suspended for some
time to allow the temperature to come down.

8. Adjustment of specific gravity should be done only after the battery set has been given
a long duration boost charging as at item No. 8 and the cells show sign of being
charged. The specific gravity should be adjusted only near the end of such charging,
by adding distilled water in cells having high gravity or replacing electrolyte in cells
having low gravity with electrolyte form cells having high gravity.

9. If the float voltage is correctly maintained as specified at item No. 1, the charging of the
battery set at the equalizing current rates as at item No. 3 a (ii) is required once in
every three months.

10. Progressive lower values of the specific gravity during floating indicate that the floating
voltage is set low. Check accuracy of the voltmeter in the charger panel and take
remedial action if necessary. Grounded circuits also circulate leakage current thereby
discharging the battery. Check for the leakage of the electrolyte or grounding of current
carrying conductors in the charger as well as in the battery circuit.

96
.

11. Continuous lowering of the electrolyte level may be due to leakage of electrolyte or loss
of water in electrolyte because of evaporation by too high a floating voltage or
excessive charging. Replace container immediately in case of leakage. After replacing
the container the cell is to be charged as detailed in item 6.

12. While cleaning the intercell connector the cells between which terminal connector is to
be removed, is bypassed so that the battery voltage will be available to meet the D.C
load.
13. Never store acid i.e., electrolyte of specific gravity higher than 1200.

Maintenance of other Sub-station Equipments (Bus bars, LAs, CTs, PTs, Isolators,
auxiliaries etc)

Bus bar Maintenance

Generally the bus bars are installed in a sub-station as per the design. As all connections for
drawl of currents are made to the main bus bar, the following aspects become very important.
1) The joints: The resistance must be less than 20 micro ohms. Annually or whenever
shutdown is available, the resistance across the joints must be measured using micro-
ohm meter.

2) Aluminium to copper joint pose a problem that the resistance of the joint increases with
time due to bi-metallic corrosion. If the joint resistance measured is more than 20 micro
ohms, the tin plating of the copper bus bar might have worn out and under such cases; the
joint must be re-done with tin plating to reduce the joint resistance.

3) Vibration of Bus bar: The bus bars vibrate at the power frequency when they are
charged from an alternating current source. If the frequency of vibration approaches the
natural frequency, resonance will be setup, which may cause damage to the bus bar.
Varying the span lengths between supports and improving the rigidity of the supports
will be useful in overcoming this problem.

4) Annually the bus bar shall be cleaned and bus bar connections tightened. The I.R values
shall be measured and compared with previous values.

Lighting Arrester
The general maintenance aspects are:
1) Cleaning of lightning arrester stacks.
2) The stack which has any cracks is to be replaced immediately.
3) The earth connections of the lightning arrester with the electrode and at the counters
shall be checked for sound connections.
4) The IR values shall be measured and shall be compared with the earlier values.
5) The leakage current shall be recorded periodically (A value of less than 3 mills amps
indicate healthiness).

97
.

The latest metal oxide lightning arresters (Surge arresters) can be easily monitored for
healthiness using leakage current monitor. This instrument measures the third
harmonic resistive current (THRC). The main advantage is the THRC can be measured
while L.A is in service.
The normal range of THRC is:
1) for 400 KV ----10 to 100 micro amps.
2) for 200 KV ----20 to 40 micro amps.

Current Transformers (CTs), Potential Transformers (PTs), and Capacitive Voltage

Transformers (CVTs).
The routine maintenance includes.
1) Checking for any oil leak and maintaining oil level.
2) Visual inspection of HF point bushing for any damage and earthing if not used for PLCC.
3) Measurement of voltages at marshalling box and control room in case of PT and CVT.
4) All bushing in any equipment shall be kept clean and glaze maintained as minimum
creepage distance and flashover have a direct bearing on cleanliness and glaze of the
porcelain.

Isolators (Earth break or without Earth break).

Routine maintenance of Isolators includes.

1) Checking linkages for simultaneous operation, operating mechanism, stopper bolts etc.
2) Checking of Earth switch copper flexible.
3) Checking of Earth connections of Earth blade.
4) Cleaning of insulators and checking for cracks in the insulators.
5) Checking of interlocks.
6) Cleaning of main contacts, Earth blade and spring assembly.
7) Applying petroleum jelly to contacts and lubrication of moving parts and bearings.
8) Checking and tightening of jumps, clamps.
9) Checking of Auxiliary switches and control wiring.
10) Checking operation of isolator and indication.

11 KV Switchgear

1) The cable entry shall be checked for vermin proofing.

2) The earth connections of Switchgear, Pothead etc. shall be checked for tightness.
3) Relay tripping of breakers, spring charging mechanism and annunciation shall be
checked.

Auxiliaries.

1) Cleaning of Auxiliary transformer, Checking of HV/LV connections, Neutral and Earth

electrode.
2) Checking of IR values, silicagel, BDV of oil, Top up oil if necessary.
3) Tightening of cable connections, Breakers, checking LT-AC breaker operation, vermin proof
for cable entry.

98
.

Outdoor Yard
1) Checking tightness of PG / T-clamps.
2) Cleaning of bus bar sting insulators.
3) Checking for Hot spots using Thermovision camera. (Available with Hot-Line Sub-division).
4) Checking damage to ACSR conductor in jumps (Aluminium strands not cut).
5) Applying petroleum jelly and tightening of spacers in case of double conductor bus.
6) In case of rigid bus, tightening of clamps and expansion joints.

General

1) Checking of DC Emergency lamps in control room.

2) Tightening of cable connections, cleaning of Bus bars, Panels, Vermin proof of cable entry
in DC panels.
3) Painting of transformers, Breakers, structures etc. once in 5 years.
4) Inspection/Overhauling of OLTC in transformers 25,000 operations or 2 years, whichever
is earlier, with oil replaced or as recommended by the transformer supplier.
5) Replenishing of Fire extinguisher after every usage or if not operated, once in a year.
6) Painting of Nameplates, Phase indicators, Bay indicators and earth electrodes.
7) Earth resistance testing of all equipments especially of transformer neutral and LAs.
8) Calibration of relays and meters (By MRT staff) yearly.
9) Wherever cranes are provided in the repair bays, checking the operation of the crane
(Mechanical and electrical system) as per the recommendation of the manufacturer.
10) Out door yard illumination, Checking and replacement of bulbs etc.
11) Cleaning of control and relay panels (Internal), vermin proof for cable entry, earth
connections.
12) Cleaning of battery charger and checking of earth connections.
13) Checking DC positive and negative voltages with references to earth to know any DC
leakage.
14) General cleaning of control and relay panels, LT-AC panels, DC panels, battery charger
and equipments in control room.
15) Inspection of battery charger for healthy charging of batteries, electrolyte level in batteries
etc. Check readings of pilot cells.
16) Visual inspection of oil level in HV bushing, Main and OLTC conservators, OLTC counter
readings, silicagel breathers. Silicagel breathers shall be reconditioned if found necessary.
17) Cleaning of outdoor yard, earth electrode pits etc.
18) Operation of DG set if provided and to run for 10 minutes for it's battery charging.
19) Inspection of level and condition of oil in air compressors (once in a week).
20) Inspection of level of Electrolyte and top up with distilled water if necessary (once in a
week).
21) Cleaning and applying petroleum jelly for Battery terminals (Monthly).
22) Recording the No. of OLTC operations in the day and recording cumulative No. of
operations.
23) Inspection of outdoor yard for any Arcing/oil leakages.

99
.

Do's
1) Do check for continuity of DC supply for efficient operation.
2) Do check for physical healthiness of battery cells and their connections.
3) Do ensure or and satisfy for electrolyte level in cells if level is low, fill with distilled water.
4) Do ensure for proper operations of battery charger and satisfy with regard to DC fuses etc.
5) Do check frequently for tripping and closing of equipment through relays and switches.
6) Do check and provide efficient ground connections to all DC equipments and provide if
possible earth leakage relays for efficient DC supply.
7) Do check for proper earthing connections for equipments like LAs, PTs, Transformers,
Circuit breakers and CTs etc.
8) Do check for smooth and easy operations of circuit breakers and GOS etc.
9) Do check the following during the shut downs and record their values.
Meggering of LAs, Power Transformers, Circuit breakers, UG Cables, CTs, PTs, Earth Mat
and Earth electrodes.
10) Do check all the equipments during shut down for dust etc., from both inside and outside
as the case may be.
11) Do provide proper illumination in the ODS yard and control room.
12) Do keep fire fighting device intact and ready to use in position.
13) Do keep a vigil on over voltage and over loading of equipments like Power Transformers,
CTs, and PTs etc.
14) Do ensure that all the contacts on bus bar, OCB, CTs, PTs, Battery charger, Panel boards
and Tap changer are OK.
15) Do keep Circuit breakers open whenever DC supply failure is observed till it is rectified.
16) Do check to see that all fuses are intact with proper ratings.
17) Do check for working condition for proper operation of motors and other equipments with
provision of safety device such as single phase inverter, over load protection etc.
18) Do provide control and MCB for AC circuits.
19) Do provide HRC fuses (Rated Capacity) for positive and negative of DC circuits.

Don'ts
1) Do not open any GOS on load without opening Circuit breaker.
2) Do not close any GOS before opening the concerned circuit breaker.
3) Do not open GOS before tripping the concerned CBs for issuing L/C on 11 KV
feeder/line/transformer/capacitor.
4) Do not operate breakers when air and gas pressure is below operating value.
5) Do not operate GOS and circuit breakers manually without wearing safety gloves etc.
6) Do not close earthing GOS unless respective CB and GOS are open and authorities requiring
LCs require so and the line is de-energized and ensure no back feeding on the line.
7) Do not keep Power Transformer in charged conditions during abnormal records of winding
and oil temperature.
8) Do not charge any Power transformer without being satisfied with respect to neutral
connection being perfectly earthed with two numbers of minimum separate earth
connections.
9) Do not allow specific gravity of lead acid cells to below 1200(+/- 5%) and cell voltage below
1.8 volts per cell.

100
.

10) Do not allow workmen to attend any work without line clear and with the equipment being
perfectly earthed and if necessary with discharging the equipments (such as LAs, Capacitor,
UG Cables etc) duly taking precaution that safety devices are used.
11) Do not issue LC on EHV lines without obtaining NFBC from the other end.
12) Do not keep any CTs in charge conditions without its secondaries in closed circuit or short
circuited.
13) Do not use bare fingers or hands to determine whether a circuit is live.

101
.

CHAPTER -7

ELECTRICAL ACCIDENTS - PREVENTION AND SAFETY

 Obedientness

 Punctuality

 Discipline

 Politeness

 Work man ship

 Integrity


CONSEQUENCES OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

• It is determined both by the amount of Current that flows through the victim & its
duration.
• Momentary application of 230V may not be dangerous.
• Sustained voltage of 30V can be a fatal.
• In case of animal Lower voltage is sufficient to cause death.
• Dry skin offers fairly high resistance( 100 K Ohms to 500 K Ohms) than moist.
• High voltage A.C some times causes Muscular contractions & victim will be thrown
from the contact.

102
.

EFFECT OF CURRENT PASSING THROUGH HUMAN BODY

1 1-8 mA Perceptible but not painful

2 8-15mA Painful shock. Muscular control is not lost.

3 15-20 mA Painful shock. Muscular control of adjacent muscles will be

lost.
4 20-50 mA Severe Muscular contractions and Breathing will be difficult.

5 50-100 A possible Ventricular fibrillation may result in death, If the

mA path of Current flow through heart.

6 200mA & Severe Burns with Muscular contractions, chest muscle clamp
Above down the heart & stop it during the duration of shock. This
prevents Ventricular fibrillation & interfere with Breathing
causing death.

ACCIDENT OCCURS DUE TO ANY OF THE FOLLOWING REASON IN SELF

• Lack of knowledge.
• Over confidence.
• Negligence & carelessness.
• Ignoring safety precautions & procedures.
• Carrying out works in urgency.
• Lack of planning.
• Improper training.
• Absent mindedness.
• Hasty decisions.
• Reason beyond his control.
• Un-authorized working on lines.
• Wrong line clears.
• Working with the influence of alcohol.

ACCIDENT ALSO OCCUR DUE TO ANY OF THE FOLLOWING REASON

• Accidental contacts with Live conductors/ Cable Joints/ deteriorated Service Mains.
• Accidental energisation of Iron Poles/Guard/ Ground wires & Guys.
• Fall from supports and ladders.
• Due to Induction.
• Due to yielding of Poles & falling of tree branches.
• Snapping of Conductors and sag in the System.
• Defects in consumer premises.

103
.

• Construction of Building in a close proximity to the live Electric lines.

• Ignorance of Public.

SAFETY PLEDGE

• To work dedicatedly for the welfare of the organization.

• To elevate my organization as the best power utility in the country.
• To give top priority towards safety of equipment, self & colleagues.
• Always enforce to use safety gadgets like Safety Belts, Rubber Hand Gloves, Earthing
rods, Helmets, Gumboots etc.,
• Creating safety zone

ALWAYS BE CAREFUL( A B C )

• The Workmen should place himself in a safe position while working to avoid falling,
Stumbling or moving to backwards against live parts.
• The workmen should satisfy himself regarding the safe working conditions before
starting the work.
• The care exercised by others should be checked.
• The Workmen should report promptly to his foremen, if any dangerous or improper
condition of Board Equipment.
• The Workmen should not report to work while he is in the influence of liquor.

GOLDEN SAFETY SLOGANS

• No job is so urgent / no service is so important that prevents you taking time to do

safely.
• Accident d‟nt happen, they are caused.
• Monkey business has no business in any business.
• Learn first aid, you may save several lives.
• Men who knew electricity best respect him / her.
• Bright people use the right tools.
• Safety is everybody‟s job.
• ELCB & MCCB is mandatory in service connection.
• Do not locate plug point close to the floor level.
• Always be alert nobody will be hurt.
• D‟nt expect your subordinate working on a top to greet you when you arrived.

CAUSE FOR ELECTRICAL ACCIDENTS

• Opening of G.O.S for replacement of fuse.

• Street light control and height of st. light hook / switch.
• Opening of distribution transformer on load.
• Climbing of pole without identification of feeding.
• Working without providing safety zones.
• Non observing the safety precautions in wearing the safety gadgets.
• Improper line clear.

104
.

• Wrong instruction from the person who received the line clear.
• Without confirming the back feeding either from the generator / alternative source.
• Climbing of pole without confirming strength at the bottom of the pole.
• Non maintaining the clearances as per IE rules.
• Improper guy in case of dead end/angle pole.
• Providing ladder with improper slant angle.
• Carrying work on over confidence
• Carrying work with the influence of alcohol.
• Leaving lower size O.H line in the trunk feeder.
• Non discharging of residual voltage.
• Non lowering of breaker from V.L unit of RMU.
• Non erecting pole in the ground to 1/6th of its length.
• Erecting of dead end pole (PCC) in flat side.
• Improper bracketing to bring live lines towards the road side.
• Felling of big tree branches on the lines.
• Working without proper instructions from his superiors.

105
.

106
.

107
.

NEED FOR GROUNDING

• To provide uniform electric potential in all non-current carrying parts of structures &
equipments to ensure safety to the operator.
• To provide a low & uniform potential gradient throughout the grounding system in
order to effectively reduce the step & touch potential & prevent shock / injury to the
personnel.
• To provide adequate protection against lightning shocks and surges.

WORKMEN’S SAFETY DEVICES

• RUBBER HAND GLOVES.

• SAFETY BELTS.
• ROPES ( MANILA / POLY PROPYLENE ).
• HELMETS.
• RUBBER MATS.
• GUM BOOTS.
• GOS RODS (11KV INSULATED).
• BAMBOO/FIBRE LADDERS.
• HICKERY ROD.
• EARTHING RODS/ TELESCOPIC EARTHING RODS.
• INSULATED CUTTING PLIER.
• INSULATED SCREW DRIVER 8‟‟/12‟‟.
• RAINCOAT.
• CHARGEABLE HAND TOURCH.
• GOGGLES.
• LINE TESTER(LT&HT).
• (WORK PERMIT PAD).

108
.

GOOD SAFETY PRACTICES

• Competency of authorized persons.

• Warning/ Sign Boards, Safety Codes etc.,
• Use of Safety devices.
• To ensure minimum working safe distance.
• To ensure positive Isolation of Mains.
• Testing and Marking the devices/Cable routes.
• Identification of equipments to be worked upon.
• Earthing and Short circuiting means.
• Removal of Temp. earth before restoring P/S.
• Safety precautions for earthing.
• Care to be taken where no visible Isolation.

PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID ACCIDENTS

• Till L.C is received from all sources / earthed, every line shall be treated as live.
• Hang “Danger” boards at all strategic places to ensure safety at the work spot.
• Where there is a risk at places of work restrict the entry of un-authorized person.
• Explain the area which is safe to work & ensure that, the entire team has understood
the same.
• Nominate one among the team exclusively for close watch while on work.
• Safety zone should be created / while making Temp. earthing insulated wire should
not touch the body.
• No alcoholic influenced person shall be allowed to work.
• Workmen should not ware loose dress / dress with metal buttons / chappals & shoes
with nails.
• Workmen should be properly trained.
• All lines shall be treated as live till proper L.C‟s are received.
• Adequate line clearance to be ensured between L.C line and non L.C line
• Items made of metal like chains of wrist watch, key bunches, rings, bracelets shall not
be used.
• Tools / wires should not be thrown up & down.
• Suitable voltage grade rubber gloves shall be used.
• Use of safety belts above 3 mtrs. With proper way of use, proper way of removing the
belt and proper way to climb up & down the pole.

PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHILE PROVIDING EMPORARY EARTH

• Ensure line/equipment is not live.

• Authorized person shall provide temporary earth.
• Ensure insulated wire firmly connects to the Earth electrode.
• Earth wires shall not be close to live wires.
• Provide temp. earth on both the sides.

109
.

• While earthing, provide ground electrode first & while disconnecting, remove earth rod
from the line first.
• Rubber gloves / gauntlets shall be worn by person providing the temp. Earth.
• The person making earthing shall be lower level than the line / equipment being
earthed.
• Other workmen shall be 6 mts. away while earthing.
• Earthing should not be removed till the work is completed / cleared of men and
materials.
• In 3ph. 4 wire / 5 wire system in secondary or in HT line all the wires ie., phases &
neutral shall be earthed.
• While working in height, others should away / close watch to avoid hurt on drop of
material.
• While GOS opened inspect the entire line before closing.
• Ensure the hands & clothes are not wet.
• D‟nt take chance to check the line in bare hand whether live or dead.

LINE CLEARS & PRECAUTIONS

• No workmen should climb pole / work on line / equipment unless he is specifically

authorized.
• L.C‟s shall be issued / received by the authorized person only.
• L.C‟s can be availed by over phone with clear identity by way of voice / code /
confirmation.

PROCEDURE WHILE ISSUE OF LINE CLEAR

• On request for L.C, switch off power supply and all possible source should be
disconnected.
• Ensure all the blades of G.O.S / breaker contacts are isolated from supply.
• Discharge the line / equipment using earth rod by wearing safety gadgets.

LINE CLEAR FORM

• To declare and certify that the following line/ equipment is made dead and it is
cleared from all possible sources of supply.
• I have switched off all points of supply under my control.
• I have fixed “MEN ON LINE”/ “LINE CLEAR” board.
• To obtain similar L.C from other alternative sources if any other than mine.
• To issue L.C no., Date ,time, name of person receiving L.C with his designation & place
of working.

PROCEDURE WHILE RETURNING LINE CLEAR

• Person who obtain the L.C should return.
• Ensure line / equipment is clear of all men, materials & earthing before return the L.C.
• Inform colleague / workmen about returning the L.C and no more safe to work in line /
equipment.

110
.

• Person receiving back L.C shall ensure no more L.C‟s are pending return.
• Entire team of workmen shall stay back till the line / equipment is recharged & check
the supply.

CHECK LIST BEFORE WORKING ON LINE

• Have you undergone safety training.

• Have you opened the G.O.S feeding supply
• Are the L.T / H.T fuses are removed.
• Have you provided temporary earthing at the work spot.
• Have you taken precautions to ware safety gadgets.
• Are you confident of climbing the pole.
• Did you ensure that all other workmen in the team are working with all safety
precautions.

REPORT OF ACCIDENTS
• All accidents should be reported.

Non-Electrical accidents:-
• To be reported by the Supervisor to the proper authorities.
• In case of death on spot should not allow the body to be removed till the holding of
enquiry.
• Fatal Accident to the Deptl. Person should be reported promptly by the AEE or EEE to
the CEE & with copy to SEE. Information should be sent to Dist. S.P and concerned
P.C.I / P.S.I.
• Non- fatal accidents should also be reported to CEE & SEE.

Electrical Accidents:-
• Under Sec. 33 of IE (Amendment) Act 1992 accident should be reported within
24Hours to the GEI.
• In case of death by way of telegram with confirmation. The telephone message as per
Appendix-I and with copy to CEE&SEE. A detailed report in Appendix-II to CEI within
48 Hours & Information to the Dist. S.P and Concerned P.C.I/ P.S.I.

111
.

FORM FOR REPORTING ELECTRICAL ACCIDENTS

1. Date and time of the accident

APPENDIX-II
2. Place of Accident (Village / Town, Taluk, District and State).
3. System and voltage of supply, (Whether EHV/HV/LV line, Sub-Station /Consumer‟s
Installation / Service Mains & Other Installations)
4. Designation of the Officer in change of the supplier in whose jurisdiction the accident
occurred.
5. Name of the owner/user of energy in whose premises the accident occurred.
6. Details of Victim(s):-

(a)Human:-

112
.

(b) Animal:-

1. In case the victim(s) is/are employee(s) of supplier:-

(a) Designation of such person(s)
(b) Brief description of the job undertaken, if any.
(c) Whether such person/persons was/were allowed to work on the job.
II. In case the victim(s) is/are employee(s) of a licensed contractor:-
(a) Did the victim(s) posses any electrical workmen‟s permit(s) supervisor‟s certificate of
competency issued under rule 45? If yes give number and date of issue and the duties
of the victim(s).

Name and designation of the person who assigned the duties of the victim(s).
1. In case of accident in the supplier‟s system, was the permit work(PTW) taken?
2. (a) Describe fully the nature and extent of injuries, ex., Fatal/disablement (permanent
or temporary) of any portion of the body or burns or other injuries.
(b) In case of fatal accidents, was the post mortem performed?
3. Detailed causes leading to the accident (to be given in a separate sheet annexed to this
form).
4. Action taken regarding fist-aid, medical attendance etc, immediately after the
occurrence pf the accident (give details)
5. Whether District Magistrate and police station concerned have been notified of the
accident (if so, give details)
6. Steps taken to preserve the evidence in connection with the accident to the extent
possible.
7. Name and designation(s) of the person(s) assisting, supervising the person(s) killed or
injured.
8. What safety equipments were given to and used by the person(s) who met with this
accident the person(s) who met with this accident (ex. Rubber gloves, rubber mats,
safety belts and ladders etc.,)?
9. Whether isolating switches and other sectionalizing devices were employed to deaden
the sections for working on the same? Whether working section was earthed at the site
of work?
10. Whether the work on the live lines was undertaken by authorized person(s)?, If so, the
name and the designation of such person(s) may be given.
11. Whether artificial resuscitation treatment was given to the person(s) who met with the
electrical accident?, If yes how long was it continued before its abandonment?
12. Name and designating of the persons present at and witnessed the accident.
13. Any other information/Remarks.
Place: Signature.
Time: Name:
Date: Designation
Address of the person reporting

113
.

A SAMPLE PERMIT FORM KARNATAKA POWER TRANSMISSION CORPORATION LTD.,

PERMIT TO WORK ON 11KV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

I Hereby declare that the following Electrical equipment/line is dead and isolated from
conductors.
A caution notice has been affixed to the controlling Device.
_________________________________________
(Here state exactly the Electrical Equipment/line on which it is safe to work)
Signature with date, time and designation when permit is
issued over phone, the name of the authorized person at
opposite end must be recorded.

_________________________
(issuer)
_________________________
(Receiver)
Serial Number of the permit: _________________________
(when permit is issued over phone) (Sending end/Receiving end)

Note:- (1) This card after being signed by an authorized person for the work to proceed is to be
handed to the person in charge of the work and retained by that person until the work is
completed or stopped by an authorized person.
(2) The Electrical equipment mentioned hereon most not be again made alive until this has
been signed and returned by the person in charge of the work to an authorized person.
I hereby declare that all men. Earthling and materials under charge have cleared the
equipment/line and men have been warned that it is no longer safe to work on the electrical
equipment specified on this card.
Signature, Name, Designation & (date and time)
I hereby declare that this Line Clear Card is cancelled.
Signature, Name, Designation & (date and time)

114
.

CHAPTER -8
Concept of LDC, ABT Mechanism of SCADA

115
.

116
.

117
.

118
.

119
.

Electrical Grid

120
.

Regional Grids in INDIA

SOUTHERN GRID
NORTHERN GRID
EASTERN GRID
WESTERN GRID
NORTH-EASTERN GRID

Southern Regional Grid

Constituents:

Southern Regional Grid

•Southern Regional Grid is inter connected with Western Region and Eastern Region through
HVDC links.

121
.

Eastern Region
1. Kolar – TALCHER ( 2500 MW)
2. Gajuwaka – Jeypore ( 1000 MW)
Western Region
1. RSTPS – Chandrapur ( 1000 MW)
SRLDC Role
a) Responsible for optimum scheduling and despatch of electricity within the region
b) Monitor grid operations;
c) Keep accounts of quantity of electricity transmitted through the regional grid;
d) Exercise supervision and control over the inter-state transmission system and
e) Be responsible for carrying out real time operations for grid control
f) Despatch of electricity within the region through secure and economic operation in
accordance with the Grid Code.

State Load Despatch Function

To match the Generation with the Load/Demand
To operate System/Grid Safely and Economically.

Role of SLDC :
(i) Real- time monitoring of the station‟s operation,
(ii) Checking that there is no gaming in availability declaration,
(iii) Revision of availability declaration and injection schedule,
(iv) Switching instructions,
(v) Metering and energy accounting,
(vi) Issuance of UI accounts,
(vii) Collection/disbursement of UI payments,
(viii) Outage planning, etc.

SLDC Functions
Data Acquisition & Monitoring
Generation / Load Management.
Frequency regulation & Generation Control.
Conveying Orders for switching operations.
Transmission of Orders Directly to the State owned Power Stations.
Voltage & Reactive Power Control.

Daily Load Forecasting

Load forecast/ Demand forecast for ensuing day:
• Fore casted weather condition, Past load data ( on week day, Holiday, festival day, cricket
match day, etc).
•Generation available to meet the demand and unscheduled load shedding required if any
will be estimated

Different sources to meet the State Demand / Loads:

122
.

•State Owned generation

•CGS Share
•NCEs, IPPs & CPPs
•Bilateral Import

DATA forms

Analog Data
•MW
•Mvar
•Voltage
•Frequency
•Current
•OLTC
•MWh

Digital Data

•Breaker Status
•Isolator Status

123
.

124
.

125
.

AVAILABILITY BASED TARIFF

•Capacity allocations from Generating Stations

•Constituent has to pay full fixed charges for the allocated power.
•Constituent can trade the capacity allocated.
•Constituent can schedule the energy from each generator as per requirement and Merit
Order

Scheduling

•Day ahead .
•Each day is divided into 96 time blocks of 15 Minutes each and schedule is as per each time
block.
•Generator declares generator availability RLDC.
•RLDC in turn communicates the entitlements to beneficiaries.
•Within the entitlements , beneficiaries will give their requisition to RLDC.

Unscheduled Interchange:

Deviation from scheduled generation to actual generation

Deviation from scheduled drawal to actual Drawal.

OPEN ACCESS
Electricity Act 2003 permits

Public & Private players to Export and Import the power from one place to another through
the grid network.
SLDC & RLDC act as facilitators by collecting necessary charges from the consumers

OPEN ACCES
•Export / Import of power is only a Displacement of power.
•Presently in KARNATAKA few Private Captive Generators and Co-Generating plants are
exporting power from Karnataka to Different Utilities like PSEB, CSEB, MSEDCL, APPCC and
Rajasthan etc.,

126
.

CHAPTER -9

IT Initiatives in power sector-general over view

127
.

Need based issues

Vast areas are can easily be covered which is humanly impossible.

•The reduction in human intervention is desired in the areas of implementation

•Power Sector has taken ICT initiatives to increase Customer Satisfaction. 94% customer
satisfaction is achieved .
•Regulatory Compliance

•Moving towards paperless office

•Repository of records
•Knowledge warehouse
•Repeatability with 100 % accuracy
Need based issues

128
.

IT or I-C-T or I-C-E-T?

129
.

The Smart Grid

130
.

The Smart Grid

Instant messaging services

131
.

Mobile Messaging System

132
.

Any Time Payment

Works Management System

133
.

Centralised Consumer Billing Information

Remotely Read Automatic Meter Reading

134
.

Management Information System

Inventory Management

Right Material

Right Price

Right Quantity

Right Place

Right time

135
.

SCADA refers to a Central Systems that monitors & Controls a site or system spread
over long distances.

Data Exchange in a Substation Automation System

Monitored Information:
Single Bit indications (alarms, events)
Double Bit indications (on/off status of devices)
Step position indication (Transformer tap position)
Analog measurements (voltages, currents, power, etc.,)
Pulse counter data (kWH, kVARH, etc.,)
Protection Events,
Sequence of event records,
Disturbance records,

Control Information:
Close or trip commands
Set point (analog output) commands
Regulating step command
Time synchronization
Parameter setting commands

136
.

Advantages Of SCADA systems

Easily programmed or reprogrammed
•Easy maintained (self diagnostic).
•Capability to do arithmetic function.
•The ability to communicate with other controller or a master host computer.
•Ability to move past simple on/off control to more complex schemes.

SCADA Components
SCADA system has essentially five hierarchies: • Field level instrumentation and control
devices • Marshalling terminals and RTUs • Communication system • The master station(s) •
The commercial data processing department computer system.

[Link]-function Transducer : The MFT is designed with RS485 Modbus output to display
the different electrical parameters including maximum demand & min.& max. values of all
electrical parameters with time.
B. DC Transducer with modbus : DC Transducer is designed to convert 0-110 V -220 V DC
input into 4-20 mA analog O/P.
C. Transformer Tap position Indicator: Tap Position Transducer is designed to monitor
Tap's by modbus communication. 4 -20 mA analog output is also given with respect to tap's
position . The advantage of using modbus communication is that complete analog RTU Card
can be saved.
D. Status Indication: The status of Circuit breakers, Isolators, Earth switches are made
known through the potentially isolated Opto-couplers.

137
.

Satellite communications

Satellite Communication Advantages

Satellite communication systems have some advantages that can be exploited for the
provision of connectivity. These are:

•Costs Insensitive to Distance

•Single Platform service delivery (one-stop-shop)
•Flexibility
•Upgradeable
•Network life cycle costs are lower than some alternatives
•Fast Deployment: Install & Commission: 1/2 - 2 Days
•Reliable Service: 99.9% for Data; 99.5%+ for Voice
•Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) > 25,000 Hours (3 Years)
•Proven in 100+ Countries
•Unrestricted coverage of large geographical areas by single systems
•Low incremental costs per unit

138
.

Application

•Load Dispatching - Real time monitoring

• Generation Scheduling
•Monitoring Open Access – Addressing Gaming issues
•Energy Audit
•Energy Management System – Inter ESCOM transactions monitoring , ABT……
•Load Forecasting
•Data Ware House - MIS
•Remote Operations of Substations

Issues of concern

• The Security
• Attacks on transponders, Networks
• Weather
• Knowledge sharing
• Competency of personnel
• Sustainability
• Retrofitting of equipments
• Up gradation

139
.

GIS (Geographical Information System)

140
.

141
.

Video Conferencing

142
.

Uses the internet and central remote servers to maintain data and applications.

•Allows consumers and businesses to use applications without installation and access their
personal files at any computer with internet access.

•Allows for much more efficient computing by centralizing storage, memory, processing and
bandwidth.

Please share knowledge

for a better world

143
.

CHAPTER -10

Energy Meters

INTRODUCTION:

The electrical energy meters form an important part of the Generation, Transmission
and Distribution system as it is based on these readings the revenue is collected. These
meters are vital link between suppliers and consumers. Beside the readings help in
computation of energy loss at various levels in transmission and distribution etc.,

The energy meters are in existence from the day the use of electricity started for
various purposes. “Conventional electro mechanical meters using Ferrari principle” dominated
the field of measuring energy so far.

The invention of digital electronics, micro processors and computers, made it possible
to adopt this technology for measurement of electrical energy.

1) This chapter deals with the basic principle and function of the Electromagnetic
Induction type of energy meters in detail and concepts embedded in electronic (static)
Energy meters and comparative study between them, salient features adopted in
electronic trivector meters; present Trends in metering and principle of instrument
Transformers and their uses. Also given step by step procedure of Rating and other
responsibilities of O&M Engineers particularly relating to Meters.

2) Important Definitions.
 Active energy: Real energy consumed by load which is converted in to usable
form.
 Reactive Energy: Fictitious energy, which is not really consumed but is part of
energy that keeps flowing back and front between storage elements.
 Apparent Energy: For a given voltage and current amplitudes, maximum power
is drawn when cos 0 (pf) = 1.
 Energy meter: Watt hour meter – instrument / meter intended to measure “
active energy” by integrating active power with respect to time (generally 1
hour).
 Static / electronic meters. The meter in which current and voltage act on static /
solid state elements to produce out put pulse counts proportional to watt hour.
 Maximum Demand: Maximum of average demands drawn during given period
[generally ½ hour.] some more details given in ETV meters.

3) General Requirements of Meters

 Personnel safety against electric shock
 Personnel safety against effect of excessive temperature.
 Protection against spread of fir.
 Protection against penetration of solid object dust and water.
 Protection against fraud.

144
.

4) Functional Requirements of Meter

 Accurate registration under all reasonable load conditions.
 Sustained accuracy for several years with minimum attention.
 Low internal losses.
 Independent or normal variation due to
- Voltage - Frequency
- Power factor - Wave form
- Temperature
 Insensitive to
- External Magnetic Field
- Vibration of supports
- Transient & Switching surges

5) Types of energy meters in use in our power system

a. Electro Mechanical / Ferrari

 Single Phase energy meter
 3 phase energy meter ISI3010/IES521

b. Electronic/Static/ETV
 Single phase energy meter
 3 phase energy meter – ISI3779/IECI1036
 Trivector meter – CBIP Technical report No.88

6) System of power supply

 Single phase power supply upto 5 Kws
 3 phase 4 wire system for all L.T. installation above 5 kws.
 3 phase 3 wire system for all H.T. installations.

7) Classification of Voltages
 Low tension single phase supply: Single phase whole current meter (5 kw)
 Low tension 3 phase: 3 phase 4w meter with or without CT both
electromagnetic & ETV meters.
 HT supply: 3 phase 3w with CT‟s and PT‟s.

8) Methods of Connection
Making connections of EM meters and ETV meters are similar. The connection shall be
made as per connection diagram shown separately.

145
.

1. Single Line Circuit Diagram of E.M. METERS

C.T. Coil
P
P

P.T. Coil
C.T. Coil (Series)

P.T. Coil
(Shunt)
Magnet

P P
N
N N N
IN coming Out going

2. Single Line Circuit Diagram of 3ph 4W E.M. METER

R.C.T

R.P.T Y.C.T

Y.P.T B.C.T

B.P.T

R R
Y Y
IN Out
Coming B B Coming
N N

146
.

3. Single Line Diagram of 3ph 4W E.M. Meter With C.T Connection.

R.C.T

R.P.T
Y.C.T

Y.P.T
B.C.T

B.P.T

R R Y Y B B N N

R R

Y R.C.T Y
B Y.C.T B
N B.C.T N
IN Coming BUSBAR Out going

9) Sealing of meter

a. To Ensure metering system is not disturbed either by accident or intentional

b. Point of sealing
 Meter Main Cover
 Terminal Cover
 CT/PT Chamber
 MD Reset Button
 Meter Chamber Cover
 Cubicle Door
 Inspection window
 Test Terminal Exit Points

10) Testing of meters

A.
 At factory
 At stores
 Pre commission test

147
.

 Periodical testing
 On complaint of consumer

B.
 Type tests
 Routine tests
1. Polarity test
2. Continuity test
3. Megger test
4. Rating
 Acceptance test
1. Load test
2. High voltage test
3. Magnetic Field
4. Vibration
5. Harmonics.

11) Electronic Energy Meters

The basic principle of operation of electronic meters is, the voltage and load currents
are attenuated, multiplied using different techniques. The power so developed is integrated
with respect to time and the energy is obtained and it can be recorded either through a
electro-mechanical counter (as in the present kwh meters) and by using ADC and
MicroController (M.C); the energy utilized can be displayed through LCD as in the persent ETV
(Electronic Trivector Meters) meters in our utility. LCD display kwh meters are also in the
market.

148
.

12) The Block Diagram for Single Phase ETV Meter is as below:

Single Line circuit Diagram of 3 Ph 3W 2 Elements H.T. ENERGY METER

R.C.T

RYPT
B.C.T

YBPT

R R Y Y B B

R R.C.T R

RYPT 11KV/110V
Y Y

YBPT 11KV/110V

B Y.C.T B

3Ph 3wire 11KV H.T. Metering cubicle.

Note:- 1. Single phase ETV meter can be expanded for 3 phase with additional attenuators
and ADC, etc…
2. In case of Electronic Meter with Electromechanical counter, the presence of ADC and
MC is not necessary.

13) Electronic Meters can be further categorized as:

I. Single phase Kwh meters of range 2.5-10A, 5-20A are in use.
II. Three phase Kwh whole current meters with mechanical counter are in use with
capacity 3 x 10-40 A. LCD counter meters of various capacity are also in the
market.
III. Trivector Meters(ETV) (Kwh, Kvah, Kvarh)
CT operated 3x5A, 3x230 ETV meters of three makes L&T, SEM, ABB are in L.T
Installations and in H.T. Installations L&T, SEM makes with 5A & 110V.

149
.

14) Accuracy:
Accuracy is defined as the highest permissible error prescribed for the specified class
as per standards and is the performing ability of the meter and is expressed as class(CL).
At present Electromechanical meters with class 2 for L.T. meters and Class 1 for Kwh
Electronic Meters and also Electronic Trivector meters with accuracy ranging from class 1 to
class 0.2 S are in service in our utility. The letter „S‟ in class 0.5S or in class 0.2S signifies
“Special” which relates to extreme lower range of CT ratio which is un-covered under IS.
Though accuracy of the electromechanical meters can also be raised beyond the
existing class 2 level, but the cost would be very high, when compared to similar accuracy
class in electronic meter. As already explained, with the use of unipolar „Magnetic
Suspension‟ bearing; the sensitivity of the meter is remarkably improved and achieved the
meter accuracy to perform at 0.5% starting current (of basic current-Ib).

15) Capacity of the Meter:

Energy meter can be developed with either single capacity meter as simply „5A‟ or
10A, 20A etc. or with wide range as 2.5-5A, 2.5-10A, 10-40A etc.. For example, 5-20A can
also be expressed as 5(20A). Here 5A is called be basic current (Ib) and 20A is the maximum
current.
Presently, CT operated 5A LT-ETV and 5A and 5A HT-ETV Meters are in service in our
utility.

16) Comparison between EM & ETV:

150
.

11 Intelligence for failure/Tamper Nil Yes (with LCD meters)

12 Expandability Nil Possible
Possible – Even Meter
reader can know
13 Open Failure Indications. Nil
meter recording
condition.

17) Display parameters

In ETV meters the following vital parameters will appear in the display and some other
set of data‟s such as failure events, load survey are stored in the memory which can be
altogether down loaded if necessary for detail analysis.

The following parameters appears in display.

1. CKwh, Bkwh, Lkwh, BMD, RMD, CMD, BPF, [Link], No. of Resets.
2. Line voltages, Line currents.
3. Failure/tamper indications with anomaly string.
4. TOD Zone energies if necessary in LT for HT compulsory.

18) For Commissioning Meters/Metering Cubilce for Installations:

 Select the easily accessible position to read easily and preferably visible to the street
to avoid pilferage.
 Ensure the meter main cover sealing wire and seal conditions and then fix the meter
terminal in vertical position with one top and two bottom screws.
 Give terminal connections properly and firmly and fix the terminal cover.
 Check the meter recording condition first by applying very small load for disc rotation
and full load for the movement of the counter wheels.
 Check for creeping in EM meters.
 Enter all the details such as name plate detail, INITIAL READINGS with decimal so as
to clearly show the number of integers and decimal figures and record accordingly in
the service report.
 Seal the terminal cover and press the only with sealing plyer and record accordingly in
sealing register duly obtaining the consumer‟s signature.
 Paint the sanction load, Date of service, [Link]. on the Meter Board/Cubicle. Also
Paint [Link]. on the pole.
 Paint the C.T. Ratio and multiplying Constant(MC) in case of L.T.;and CT and VT Ratio
with MC also CD for HT Installations.
 Convenient meter metal boxes for housing single and three phas meters without CT
should be used in LT compulsorily for commercial and power installations. But for
domestic Installations, uses of meter housing boxes are optional.
 Arrange servicing of installations for LT metering cubicle with CT and HT with CT &
VT(PT), after obtaining pre-commission test report(PCTR) from the Rating Wings.
 Enter the PCTR letter No. and Date and the service record and also filing the report.

151
.

19) Non recording of meters

(1) E.M. meter
a) CT failure – Over current/open circuit/burnt
b) Pt failure – Over voltage/open circuit/burnt
c) Technical problems – bearing failure, vibration Unnecessary heating.
d) External magnetic field
e) Transient & switching surges
f) Tampering

(2) ETV meter

a) Failure of display/tamper display
b) Voltage failure <55%
c) Current failure <1%
d) Current unbalance <20%
e) Voltage unbalance <30%
f) Current by pass
g) Current reversal
h) Low PF
i) Power failure.

20) Duties of JEs in respect of Meter Reading.

1. 100% Meter Reading.

2. Verification seals provided to Meters and CT Box
3. Inspection of MNR burnt, creeping Meters.
4. Writing Mahajar in respect of glass broken meters.
5. Inspection of duplicate seals, hole widening etc.
6. Action for continuous D.C. installation
7. Issue of bills of D.C. installations.
8. Temporary installation reading.
9. Reading all parameters in ETV meters
10. Recording of CT constant and Meter Constant.
11. Unauthorised extensions and changing of loads.
12. Recording wrong Tariff.
13. Unauthorised reconnection
14. Shifting of installation and requiring extended wires.
15. Bringing theft cases to notice and vigilance.
16. Anybody hinding in formation of theft will be treated as Abettor under section 120.

152
.

TYPES OF METERS

Single Phase Electromechanical and High Precession Meters

(Disc Operated)

Readings to be taken – Energy consumed (KWH)

1.a Direct reading with decimal
9 9 9 9 9 0
10000 1000 100 10 1 0.1

1.b Direct reading with decimal

9 9 9 9 9
10000 1000 100 10 1

2. Direct reading without decimal

0 0 0 0 0
10000 1000 100 10 1
*Note: In L&T make Single Phase Pulse operated meter, register count is analog

153
.

DISPLAY PARAMETERS
Single Phase Static Meter
Genus
Push mode Auto mode
Serial Number En (Cumulative KWH)
Date Cumulative MD
Time Cumulative MD Date
Cumulative kwh Cumulative MD Time
Maximum Demand KW Instant voltage
Maximum Demand Date Instant Phase current
Maximum Demand Time Load in KW
Last six months kwh (b1 to b6) Instant Power Factor
Last six months MD Tamper count
Instantaneous voltage B1 (Billing Power Factor)
Phase current
Neutral current
Tamper count

L & G (ZCE)
Push mode Auto mode
Display Cumulative KWH
ID, Meter Serial Number Present Demand (PD KW)
Date Instant Phase Voltage
Time Instant Phase Current
Cumulative KWH Instant Neutral Current
Present Demand (PD KW) Earth Tamper
Maximum Demand Date and Time Reverse Tamper
Last six Months KWh (A to F) Magnet Tamper
Last six Months KWh (A to F) With Date Single Wire Tamper
Time
Instantaneous Voltage
Instant Phase Current
Instant Neutral Current

154
.

Present Power (PP)

High resolution – KWH (3+3)
Earth Tamper
Reverse Tamper
Magnet Tamper
Single Wire Tamper

L&T
Push mode Auto mode
Display check Cumulative KWH
ID, Meter Serial Number Maximum Demand KW
Date Instant Phase Voltage
Time Instant Phase Current
Cumulative KWH Present Demand in KW
MD in KW Power factor
Last six Months Kwh(1B to 6B) Tamper Count
Last six Months KW(1B to 6B) Billing Power Factor
Instantaneous voltage
Instant Phase Current
Present power in KW
Tamper Count
Tamper Date and time
Tamper restoration Date and time
KWh in High resolution mode

Three Phase Electromechanical and High Precision Meters

(Disc Operated)
Readings to be taken – Energy consumed (kWH)

155
.

1. a Direct reading with decimal

9 9 9 9 9 0
10000 1000 100 10 1 0.1

1. b Direct reading with decimal

9 9 9 9 9
10000 1000 100 10 1

2. Direct reading without decimal

0 0 0 0 0
10000 1000 100 10 1
*Note : In L & T make Single Phase Pulse operated meter, register count is analog.

DISPLAY PARAMETERS
Three Phase Static Meter
L&T
Push mode
Display 1(Auto mode) Display 3(High Resolution Energies)
Cumulative KWH Forward at………..Hrs of
present month Cumulative Forward KWH
Billing MD in KW for last month Cumulative forward KVArh Lag
Phase Voltages R,Y,B(Separate Display) Cumulative forward KVArh Lead
Phase Currents R,Y,B(Separate Display) Cumulative forward KVAh
Instantaneous active power Cumulative Reverse KWH
Instantaneous Power factor Cumulative Reverse KVArh Lag
Voltage Failure Count Cumulative Reverse KVArh Lead
Current Failure Count Cumulative Reverse KVAh

Current Unbalance Count Display 4(High Resolution Energies)

Resent backup of cum. KWH and MD in
Current Reversal Count KW for the last 6 resets (Manual and Auto
Reset)
Magnetic tamper count

156
.

Neutral Disturbance count

Anamaly string
Billing Power on time
Real time clock
Display 2
Display check
Meter Serial no
Cumulative KWH forward at Latest reset
Reset Period MD1 in KW
Phase Voltages R,Y,B
Phase Currents R,Y,B
Instantaneous Neutral current
Parameters from 13 to 32 for last tamper
occurance along with occurance date and
time and parameters from 33 tom 52 is for
last 10 tamper restores along with date
and time

Tamper type indication:-

UF-Voltage Failure r-R Phase
IF-Current Failure y-Y Phase
Ir-Current Reversal b-B Phase
IU-Current Unbalance
nt-Magnet Tamper
nd-Neutral Disturbance

157
.

L & G (5-30 A Whole current)

Push mode
LCD Test Over Voltage Occurrence
Meter Serial no Over Voltage Restoration
Date Under Voltage Occurrence
Time Under Voltage Restoration
Cum. Active Energy Voltage imbalance Tamper Occurrence
Current MD KW Voltage imbalance Tamper Restoration
Current MD KW Date Cumulative Reversal Tamper R Phase Occurrence
Current MD KW Time Cumulative Reversal Tamper R Phase Restoration
Billing KWH Cumulative Reversal Tamper Y Phase Occurrence
Billing MD KW Date and Time Cumulative Reversal Tamper Y Phase Restoration
Billing period Average Power Factor Cumulative Reversal Tamper B Phase Occurrence
TOU KWH (Rate 1 to 8) Cumulative Reversal Tamper B Phase Restoration
Billing TOU KWH (Rate 1 to 8) CT Open Tamper R Phase Occurrence
TOU MD KW Date and Time (Rate 1 to 8) CT Open Tamper R Phase Restoration
Billing TOU MD KW Date and Time (Rate
CT Open Tamper Y Phase Occurrence
1 to 8)
RYB Voltage (Separate Display) CT Open Tamper Y Phase Restoration
RYB Current (Separate Display) CT Open Tamper B Phase Occurrence
Instantaneous Neutral current CT Open Tamper B Phase Restoration
Active Power Current imbalance Tamper Occurrence
Power factor for RYB (Separate display) Current imbalance Tamper Restoration
Total Power factor with lag/lead sign CT Bypass Tamper Restoration
Cumulative KVAh Over Current Occurrence
Billing reset Counter Over Current Restoration
Cumulative Tamper Counter No Tamper Display
Voltage Missing R Phase tamper –
Magnetic tamper Occurrence
Occurrence
Voltage Missing R Phase tamper –
Magnetic tamper Restoration
Restoration
Voltage Missing Y Phase tamper –
Neutral disturbance Occurrence
Occurrence

158
.

Voltage Missing Y Phase tamper –

Neutral disturbance Restoration
Restoration
Voltage Missing B Phase tamper –
Low PF Tamper Occurrence
Occurrence
Voltage Missing B Phase tamper –
Low PF Tamper Restoration
Restoration
Front Cover Open Tamper Occurrence
Anamaly

Auto scroll Parameters

Cumulative KWH RYB Voltages (Separate Display)
Current MD KW RYB Current (Separate Display)
Current MD KW Date and time Cumulative Tamper Counter

Secure 5-30 A
Lamp Test Instantaneous active load KW
Real Time Invalid Phase sequence
Real Date Forward Billed Active Energy KWh
KW Rising Demand with Elapsed Time Forward Billed Reactive Lag Energy KVArh
KVA Rising Demand with Elapsed Time Billed Universal MD in MW
Bill Count Billed Universal Apparent MD in KVA occurance
time and Date
Forward active Energy Battery status
Forward Reactive Lagging Energy KVArh Consumption of Billed Forwarded Active Energy
KWh
Forward Reactive Leading Energy KVArh Consumption of Billed Forwarded Apparent
Energy KVAH
Forward Apparent Energy KVAh Active Power Factor Bill 1
Universal Active Maximum Demand KW Cumulative Power ON Hours
Universal Apparent Maximum Demand KVA Billed Cumulative Power ON Hours
Universal Apparent Maximum Demand Cumulative Power ON Hours since last Bill
Occurance time and Date KVA
TOD Active Forwarded Energy Register 1 High Resolution forwarded Active Energy KWh

159
.

KW
Billed TOD Active Forwarded Energy High Resolution forwarded Apparent Energy
Register 1 KVAh KVAh
Billed TOD Active MD in KW History of cause of Billing action
Cmd KW Linked with 00-24 Hrs Date of billing for first billing set
Present status of Voltage Related tamper Time of billing
information
Present status of Other tamper information Connection check display
First Tamper Occurance status Self Diagnostic features
First Tamper Occurance time and Date Authentic ABC code
Last tamper Restored Status Meter Serial Number
Last Tamper Occurance time and Date
Cum. Status of Current related tamper
Cum. Status of Voltage related tamper
Cum. Status of other tampers
Cum. Tampers occurance count
Display page no.
Phase 1 Voltage
Phase 1 Line current
Instantaneous average Power Factor
Frequency

Three Phase Static Meter

Genus 5-30 A

Push mode Auto mode

Display check Cum Active Energy KWh bill1

Meter Serial number Present month Max. Demand KW
Real Time Instantaneous Voltage RYB (Separate Display)

Real Date Instantaneous Voltage RYB (Separate Display)

Cum Active Energy KWh Instantaneous Voltage N (Neutral)

160
.

Present month Max. Demand KW Cumulative Tamper Count

Cum Active Energy KWh bill1
Max Demand Bill 1
Cum Active Energy KWh bill2
Max Demand Bill 2
Cum Active Energy KWh bill3
Max Demand Bill 3
Cum Active Energy KWh bill4
Max Demand Bill 4
Cum Active Energy KWh bill5
Max Demand Bill 5
Cum Active Energy KWh bill6
Max Demand Bill 6
Instantaneous Voltage R Y B (Separate
Display)
Instantaneous Current R Y B (Separate
Display)
Instantaneous Current N (Neutral)

Elster 5-30 A
Complete LCD Test
Total KWh Delivered
System Power Factor
Rate C Max KW Delivered
Rate C Max KW Delivered date and time
Present Interval Demand KW Delivered
Time Left in Demand Interval
Average Power Factor KWh Delivered
Demand Reset Count
Phase Voltages A B C (Separate Display)
Phase Currents A B C (Separate Display)
Present Date and Present Time
Complete LCD Test

161
.

PB Rate C Max KW Delivered

PB Rate C Max KW Delivered Date and Time
PB Total KWh Delivered
PB Average Power Factor KWh Delivered
Total KWh Delivered

162
.

CHAPTER -11

Transmission line- Survey, approvals & Construction.

Transmission lines:-

1. Power transmission Voltage -> 66,110,220,400,765 and 1200 kV

2. Single Circuit line, Double Circuit line and Multi circuit line
a) Conventional Tower
b) Narrow based Tower
c) Mono pole
3. Over head and Under ground lines ( some times both)
4. Conductors _ ACSR, AAAC etc
i. Single conductor
ii. Twin conductors
iii. Quad conductors
iv. Multi conductors

163
.

TRANSMISSION LINE –ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING

Transmission lines are required to transmit power (ac or dc) over long distances. In
the case of ac it is normally 3 phase, except in the case of electric traction transmission line
where it is single phase.
Design criteria for economical transmission line design : Longer the distance higher
is the voltage and also it depends on the quantum of power to be transmitted.
Voltage class: 11kV to 220 kV ---400kV ---765kV ---1200kV
Single Circuit, Double Circuit and Multi Circuit.
Short transmission lines, Medium transmission lines, Long transmission lines
Over head line:- Here insulation between phases is provided by air. Between phases and
earth, insulation is provided by porcelain insulators, (In some cases it is glass). Power
transmission is most economical at highest possible voltage. As the voltage increases
conductor cost comes down, but cost of insulators, towers etc.
goes up.
Some optimum levels are reached in practice.
Planning :- Survey, Route, alignment, Tower spotting, Project report & sanction
Execution :- Tower spotting (actual) , Approvals, encroachment, Statutory clearances(States &
central) Etc.

164
.

Approvals for transmission lines

a) encroachment approvals :- To secure permit from owners \ authorities
coming in the line of our work--- Depends upon the course \ route of
the transmission lines)
b)Statutory approvals. -------- are framed by the governments for
securing larger interests of public

a) encroachment approvals

Transmission line crossing

• A forest?
• A road or High way?
• A pond or river?
• A residential area From the concerned authorities
• A railway line?
• A private land? Etc.

Sometimes environmental, ecology & mines and geology permissions are required.
Emerging Technology in Line survey
 Line survey through GIS mapping, Digital terrain model

 Lightening/Pollution Mapping of the area en route to Tr. line

b)Statutory approvals
State government

165
.

a) Electrical inspectorate
A department of the concerned state in which the transmission line is to be
constructed (Ex : - Karnataka government electrical inspectorate) Their rules and regulations:
For the safety point of view of the general public, IE rules etc.
Procedure : Submit a set of drawings and subsequently incorporate any changes
suggested by them and take their approval. The work should be got inspected by them and
take their approval before energizing the line.
Central government
b) PTCC (Power and Telecommunication Coordination committee)-why?
There are three reasons :-
1) A Power supply in a transmission line gives rise to certain levels of induced
voltages in the near by telecommunication lines. These voltages (called induced voltages)
attain considerable values particularly when a line to ground fault (a normally expected
event) occurs.
2) During these ground faults an EPR area (earth potential rise zone) also play a major role.
A potential difference appears between the EPR area and near by telecommunication
structures.
3) Besides there is a possibility of damage to telecommunication system and injury to
personnel due to accidental contact between electricity supply lines and
telecommunication lines. These (induced voltage, EPR and likely accidents) is likely to prove
hazardous to telecom installations, telecom personnel and customers. Certain measures are
required to be carried out by the transmission line authorities to take care of these situations.
That is the purpose of PTCC approval.
PTCC :- Comprises engineers from electricity board, BSNL (Bharat Sanchar Nigham Limited)
& Railway engineers (In case the transmission line affects the railway telecommunication
lines)
1) Divisional level (for the HV lines up to11 KV )
It includes the area-Divisional engineers of electricity board , BSNL
and railway engineers
2) State level
(for lines above 11 KV but up to 33 KV single circuit line) It comprises state level engineers of
electricity board (a chief engineer nominated by the board for the purpose),Similar rank BSNL
and railway engineers
3) Regional level (for lines of 33 KV double circuit and above).

166
.

MAJOR COMPONENTS OF A TRANSMISSION LINE

• Towers (and Foundations)
• Earth wire
• Conductor & earth wire Accessories
Insulators • ( Insulator strings )
• Hardware Fittings

A TYPICAL TRANSMISSION TOWER

TRANSMISSION TOWERS

167
.

CLASSIFICATION OF TOWERS
1. ACCORDING TO CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURE:
 Self Supporting Towers.
 Conventional Guyed Towers.
 Chainette Guyed Towers.
2. ACCORDING TO NO OF CIRCUITS THEY CARRY:
 Single Circuit Towers.
 Double Circuit Towers.
 Multi Circuit Towers.
3. ACCORDING TO TOWER SHAPES:
 Horizontal Towers.
 Vertical towers.

TESTS ON LINE MATERIALS

 Megger test
 Type Tests
 Acceptance Tests
 Routine Tests

168
.

 COMMISSIONING
o Charging the line– idle charging for not less than 24 hours
o Loading

UNDER GROUND CABLE FOR POWER TRANSMISSION

1. 66KV UG CABLE USED IN URBAN AREAS LIKE BENGALUR

2. 110 KV UG CABLE IN SOME AREAS WITH ROW PROBLEM
3. 220kV UG CABLE IN URBAN AREAS LIKE BENGALUR
4. 400kV UG CABLE IN SOME DIFFICULT LOCATIONS LIKE THICKLY
POPULATED CITIES AND SOME TERRAINS WHERE OVER LINE CANNOT
BE CONSIDERED TO BE BUILT.
REQUIREMENTS AND CHALLENGES ->ISSUES, CONCERNS, BENEFITS ETC.

169
.

Sectional View of 66 KV UG Cable

170
.

CHAPTER -12
Earthing Practice
Earthing Concepts & Practices.

Agenda.

1. Introduction
2. Earthing Concepts
3. Objectives of Earthing
4. Electric Shock
5. Soil Conduction
6. Measurement of Soil Resistivity
7. Earth Resistance Measurements
8. General Considerations
9. Earth Potential Rise ( E.P.R)
10. Case studies
11. References

Safety Can Not Be Co

• Electricity
-Is a good servant,
- But a bad master.

Our Motto:

 Safety First
 Safety Next
 Safety Always

Objectives.

At the end of the session the participants

Are able to explain
1. Types of Earthing
2. Measurement of earth resistance
3. Maintenance of earthing in Sub-stations and installations.

Purpose of Earthing in Transmission & Distribution.

• Earthing provides reference.

• Protection of installation.
• Improvement of quality of service
to public & Safety.
• Safety of personnel.

171
.

• Safety to Telephone Exchange in the vicinity.

Some Analogies.

1. Handling of fault current is similar to Handling waste water in a city.

2. Earth-mat for a sub-station is like foundation for a building.
3. Voltage gradients are similar to physical gradients.

POPULAR ( MIS ) CONCEPTS ABOUT EARTHING.

1. Earth Is a Good Conductor

2. Ground Potential Is Always Zero
3. Proto Type Earthing Design Is Sufficient
4. Earthing Is Only For Achiveing Low Resistance Value
5. Use Of Copper For Earthing Will Give Low Resistance

Comparison of specific resistance.

SL no Material Specific Resistance

1 Copper 1.78 Micro ohm CM

2 Aluminum 2.86 Micro-ohm CM

3 Mild Steel 15.90 Micro-ohm CM

4 Soil 20,000 to 2000,000 Micro

Ohm-CM

Soil (Earth) is not a good conductor. However due to large area of cross section involved it
behaves as good conductor.

FACTS.
• During Earth Faults, Earth potential can raise to several Kilo volts.( For short duration
of less than 500 mili-seconds)
• Earthing Design can not be standardized based on Station capacity or Voltage class.
• A low resistance value in itself is not a guarantee for safety of personnel .
• Use of copper may help in reducing corrosion, but it will not ensure low earth
resistance value.

172
.

Fault Levels are not dependent on voltage class of station.

REASONS WHY EARTHING PROBLEMS ARE COMPLEX

• EARTH IS A POOR CONDUCTOR

• NON HOMOGENEOUS
• CONDUCTORS BURIED IN SOIL HAVE COMPLICATED SHAPE
• ACTIVE ONLY DURING FAULT CONDITIONS
• MOST OF THE ANALYSIS OF EARTHING IS BY EMPIRICAL FORMULAE

EARTH ELECTRODE CONCEPT

173
.

What is Earthing ?

Earthing (Grounding) means an electrical connection to the general mass of earth to

provide safe passage to fault current to enable to operate protective devices and provide
safety to personnel and Equipments.

Types of Earthing

 Neutral Earthing : deals with the earthing of system neutral to ensure system security
and protection.
 Equipment Earthing : deals with earthing of non-current carrying parts of equipment
to ensure safety to personnel and protection against lightning.

ELECTRIC SHOCK

The effect of electric current passing through vital organs of the body depends on:-
• magnitude,
• duration and
• frequency of current.
The most dangerous consequence is a heart condition known as ventricular fibrillation,
which results in stoppage of blood circulation.

174
.

Effect of magnitude of current

• The threshold of perception is a current of 1 m.A.
• Currents in the range of 1-6 m.A are known as „ let go current „ because these
currents, though unpleasant, do not impair the ability of a person, holding an
energized object to release it.

• Currents in the 9-25 mA range may be painful and impair the ability to release
energized object.

• Still higher currents make breathing difficult.

• If the current is less than about 60 mA, the effects are not permanent and disappear
when current is interrupted.
• Currents higher than 60 mA may lead to ventricular fibrillation, injury and death.

Effect of frequency

The tolerable currents mentioned above are for 50 - 60 Hz. It has been found that human
body can tolerate about 5 times, at high frequencies (3000 – 10000 Hz). than the power
frequency current.

Effect of duration of current

The magnitude of 50 HZ tolerable current is related to duration. According to tests

reported by Dalziel, 99.5% of persons of 50 Kg weight can withstand the current given by
equation.
IB = 0.116 / t
Where IB is the rms value of body current in amperes and „t‟ is the time in seconds. If the
weight of body is 70 Kg., the equation for tolerable current is
IB = 0.157 /t
These equations are valid for 0.03 < t < 3 seconds.

Long Exposure to Electric Shock is dangerous.

175
.

Touch and Step Potentials

Step potential: The potential difference

shunted by a human body between two
accessible points on the ground separated
by a distance of one pace assumed to be
equal to one meter

Touch potential:- The potential

difference between a point on the
ground and a point on an object
likely to carry fault current (e.g.,
frame of equipment) which can be
touched by a person

Soil Conduction.

176
.

Typical values of resistivity for various types of soils are as follows :-

1 Red loamy soil 40-200 -m

2 Red sandy soil 200-2000 -m
3 Laterite soil 300-2600 -m
4 Shallow black soil 20-100 -m
5 Medium black soil 50-300 -m
6 Deep black soil 50-250 -m
7 Mixed red & black soil 50-250 -m
8 Coastal alluvium 300-1300 -m
9 Laterite gravelly 200-1000 -m

177
.

EQUIPMENT USED FOR MEASUREMENT OF SOIL RESISTIVITY

Earth Tester .

• Model :DET-2/2
• Make : Megger, U K.
• Range : 0.010 to19.99Kilo-ohms
• Test Frequency :128Hz for 50 Hz systems.
• Out-put Voltage :50 V
• Test current : 50 mA

WENNER FOUR ELECTRODE METHOD:

For measurement of soil resistivity.

Soil Resistivity Is Measured in Different Directions.

178
.

R2
R6
R7

R1 to R8 are Different Directions.

• The Soil Resistivity is given by Equation:
r =2*p*a*R
Where,
r = Soil Resistivity
a= Spacing between Electrodes.
R=Resistance Measured by Insulation tester.

179
.

Factors affecting the soil resistivity

• Type of soil---soil governs the resistivity to a large extent. Some typical values are sea
water-2.5 ohm-m, tap water 20 ohm-m, clay 50 ohm-m, sand &clay mixture 100 ohm-
m, sand 2000 ohm-m and rock 10000 ohm –m.
• Moisture.
• Dissolved salts in water.
• Temperature.
• Seasonal variation.
• Artificial treatment.

BASIC DESIGN

Main objectives Of Design.

• To provide safe path to maximum fault current that may arise including future
conditions.
• To avoid potential gradients that are dangerous to Human beings.
• To control Earth potential Raise during faults to safe limits for Telephone Exchanges as
per PTCC Norms.
Concepts for Design.
• Earth-mat for station is like foundation for a building. All future expansions have to be
considered in initial design.
• It is very difficult to modify Earth-mat at later stages.
• Earth-mat has to be functional for the life time of the station.
• The formulae are mostly empirical.

Typical diagram of earth-mat

180
.

Vertical risers

Vertical
Electrodes/spikes

Welding joints
Earth-mat
conductor

Factors considered for design of earth-mat

• Soil resistivity
• Area of the earth-mat
• Material of Earth Mat conductor
• Magnitude of Fault current
• Duration of Fault
• Shock duration
• Safe limits of Touch & step potential

CHAPTER -13

181
.

Hot-Line Techniques

ADOPTION OF HOT-LINE TECHNIQUE FOR MAINTENANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES

AND STATIONS IN K.P.T.C.L.

With complexity of transmission networks coupled with inter state ties for
transporting huge amount of power and less redundancy in transmission system has
rendered shutdown on these transmission lines and stations almost impossible.

For ensuring quality of power to consumers and for system stability an un

interrupted and healthy transmission system is required.
Providing redundancy in transmission lines may be a solution which is however
becomes very costly. Hence preventive maintenance by deploying Hot Line Technique is the
best solution.
Preventive maintenance works on EHT network can be carried out by following
methods.

1. Pre arranged shut downs:

In this method, line is de-energized and preventive maintenance is carried out in cold
line condition. Which causes interruption, low voltage problems, revenue loss and system
stability get affected.
2. Hot-Line Technique Method:
The Technique adopted to maintain transmission lines and stations by working on it,
when it is in charged condition is known as Hot-Line Technique.
Hot-Line work is carried out by adopting Hot Stick Method. In this method the tools made
up of epoxy glass fiber and heat treated aluminum alloy are used. These features make the
tool safer stronger and lighter.
In KPTCL Hot-Stick method is used to carry out works on 66kV,110kV and 220kV lines
and stations.
 The safety of the Hot Line Mechanic is very important and depends upon the insulation
characteristics of epoxy glass and strength of the tool
 The persons working in hot line must be trained in hotlines and training courses are
conducted by Hot Line Training Centre National Power Training Institute Govt. of India
Kanakapura Road bengaluru.(92 Days training program)
 Advantages of Hotline Technique of maintenance.

a) Avoiding interruptions:
Hotline technique of maintenance of Lines and Stations plays an important role in achieving
interruption free operations Hence inconvenience to the consumer, due to interruption is
avoided.

b) Avoiding revenue Loss:

182
.

Since maintenance works are carried out in actual live line

condition, loss of revenue is avoided. (Example: In a 220 kV Line where 100MW power is
transmitting, if the line is interrupted for two hours for maintenance by cold line method,
which means a loss of revenue for not transmitting and selling 2,00,000 units of energy
besides low voltage problems in other areas.)
[Link] Stability:
With this type of technique load on the line is not either
transferred, or shut down and hence stability of the system is not affected. Where as cold line
working badly affects the stability

3. Hot Line Activities:

Some of the important operations that can be carried out
are given below.
1. Testing of insulators on line by using Live Line Insulator tester.
2. Replacement of faulty insulator discs/strings on line
3. Tightening and changing of hardware components in stations and towers.
4. By-Passing the arcing/red hot bolts, PG Clamps and T Clamps by providing By-Pass
Jumper.
5. Station ODY maintenance.
6. Thermovision Scanning of electrical joints to detect the hot spots and rectifying the same by
Hot Line technique.
7. Assist Transmission Line staff in EHT Clearance measurement in load condition.

CHAPTER -14

183
.

Tariff

ELECTRICITY TARIFF - 2015

K.E.R.C. ORDER DATED: 12.05.2014

Effective for the Electricity consumed from the first meter reading date falling on or after
01.05.2014

ELECTRICITY TARIFF-2015 GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF TARIFF:

(APPLICABLE TO BOTH HT AND LT)

1. Supply of power is subject to execution of agreement by the Consumer in the prescribed

form, payment of prescribed deposits and compliance of terms and conditions as stipulated in
the Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka
and Regulations issued under Electricity Act 2003 at the time of supply and continuation of
power supply is subject to compliance of the said Conditions of Supply / Regulations as
amended from time to time.

2. The tariffs are applicable to only single point of supply unless otherwise approved by the
Licensee.

3. The Licensee does not bind himself to energize any installation, unless the Consumer
guarantees the minimum charges. The minimum charge is the power supply charges in
accordance with the tariff in force from time to time. This shall be payable by the Consumer
until power supply agreement is terminated, irrespective of the installation being in service or
under disconnection.

4. The tariffs in the schedule are applicable to power supply within the Karnataka State.

5. The tariffs are subject to levy of Tax and Surcharges thereon as may be decided by the
State Government from time to time.

6. For the purpose of these tariffs, the following conversion table would be used: 1 HP=0.746
KW. 1HP=0.878 KVA.

7. The bill amount will be rounded off to the nearest Rupee, i.e., the bill amount of 50 Paise
and above will be rounded off to the next higher Rupee and the amount less than 50 Paise
will be ignored.

184
.

8. Use of power for temporary illumination in the premises already having permanent power
supply for marriages, exhibitions in hotels, sales promotions etc., is limited to sanctioned load
at the applicable permanent power supply tariff rates. Temporary tariff rates will be
applicable in case the load exceeds sanctioned load as per the Conditions of Supply of
Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka.

9. No LT power supply will be given where the requisitioned load is 50 KW/67 HP and above.
This condition does not apply for installations serviced under clause 3.1.1 of K.E.R.C.
(Recovery of Expenditure for supply of Electricity) Regulations, 2004 and its amendments
from time to time. The applicant is however at liberty to avail HT supply for lesser loads. The
minimum contract demand for HT supply shall be 25 KVA or as amended from time to time by
the Licensee with the approval of KERC.

10. The Consumer shall not resell electricity purchased from the Licensee to a third party
except – (a) Where the Consumer holds a sanction or a tariff provision for distribution and
sale of energy, (b) Under special contract permitting the Consumer for resale of energy in
accordance with the provisions of the contract.

11. Non-receipt of the bill by the Consumer is not a valid reason for nonpayment. The
Consumer shall notify the office of issue of the bill if the same is not received within 7 days
from the meter reading date. vi Otherwise, it will be deemed that the bills have reached the
Consumer in due time.

12. The Licensee will levy the following charges for non-realization of each Cheque.
1 Cheque amount upto Rs. 10,000/- 5% of the amount subject to a
minimum of Rs100/-
2 Cheque amount of Rs. 10,001/- and upto Rs. 3% of the amount subject to a
1,00,000/- minimum of Rs500/-
3 Cheque amount above Rs. 1 Lakh: 2% of the amount subject to a
minimum of Rs3000/-

13. In respect of power supply charges paid by the Consumer through money order, Cheque
/DD sent by post, receipt will be drawn and the Consumer has to collect the same.

14. In case of any belated payment, simple interest at the rate of 1 % per month will be levied
on the actual No. of days of delay subject to a minimum of Re.1/- for LT installation and
Rs.100/- for HT installation. No interest is however levied for arrears of Rs.10/- and less.

15. All LT Consumers, except Bhagya Jyothi and Kutir Jyothi Consumers, shall provide
current limiter/Circuit Breakers of capacity prescribed by the Licensee depending upon the
sanctioned load.

16. All payments made by the Consumer will be adjusted in the following order of priority: -

185
.

(a) Interest on arrears of Electricity Tax (b) Arrears of Electricity Tax (c) Arrears of Interest on
Electricity charges (d) Arrears of Electricity charges (e) Current month‟s dues

17. For the purpose of billing

(i) the higher of the rated load or sanctioned load in respect of LT installations which are not
provided with Electronic Tri-Vector meter,
(ii) sanctioned load or MD recorded, whichever is higher, in respect of installations provided
with Electronic Tri-Vector meter, will be considered. Penalty and other clauses shall apply if
sanctioned load is exceeded.

18. The bill amount shall be paid within 15 days from the date of presentation of the bill
failing which the interest becomes payable.

19. For individual installations, more than one meter shall not be provided under the same
tariff. Wherever two or more meters are existing for individual installation, the sum of the
consumption recorded by the meters shall be taken for billing, till they are merged.

20. In case of multiple connections in a building, all the meters shall be provided at one easily
accessible place in the ground floor.

21. Reconnection charges: The following reconnection charges shall be levied in case of
disconnection and included in the monthly bill.
For reconnection of:
a Single Phase Domestic installations under Tariff Rs20/-per Installation
schedule LT 1 & LT2 (a)
b Three Phase Domestic installations under Tariff Rs50/-per Installation.
schedule LT2 (a) and Single Phase Commercial &
Power installations.
c All LT installations with 3 Phase supply other than Rs100/- per Installation.
LT2 (a)
d All HT& EHT installations Rs. 500/-per Installation.

22. Revenue payments up to and inclusive of Rs.10, 000/- shall be made by cash or cheque
or D.D and payments above Rs.10, 000/- shall be made by cheque or D.D only. Payments
under other heads of account shall be made by cash or D.D up to and inclusive of Rs.10,
000/- and payment above Rs.10, 000/-shall be by D.D only.
Note: The Consumers can avail the facility of payment of monthly power supply bill through
Electronic clearing system (ECS)/ Credit cards / on line E-Payment @ [Link]
at counters wherever such facility is provided by the Licensee in respect of revenue payments
up to the limit prescribed by the RBI.
23. For the types of installations not covered under any Tariff schedules, the Licensee is
permitted to classify such installations under appropriate Tariff schedule under intimation to
the K.E.R.C.

186
.

24. Seasonal Industries

Applicable to all Seasonal Industries.

j) The industries that intend to avail this benefit shall have Electronic TriVector
Meter installed to their installations.

ii)„Working season‟ months and „off-season‟ months shall be determined by an

order issued by the Executive Engineer of the concerned O&M Division of the
Licensee as per the request of the Consumer and will continue from year to year
unless otherwise altered. The Consumer shall give a clear one month‟s notice in
case he intends to change his „working season‟.

iii) The Maximum Demand/consumption during any month of the declared off-
season shall not be more than 50% of the contract demand/average consumption of
the previous working season.

iv) The „Working season‟ months and „off-season‟ months shall be full–calendar
months. If the power availed during a month exceeds the allotment for the „off-
season‟ month, it shall be taken for calculating the billing demand as if the month
is the „working season‟ month.

v) The Consumer can avail the facility of „off-season‟ up to six months in a calendar
year not exceeding in two spells in that year. During the „off-ix season‟ period, the
Consumer may use power for administrative offices etc., and for overhauling and
repairing plant and machinery.

25. Whether an institution availing Power supply can be considered as charitable or not will
be decided by the Licensee on the production of certificate Form-12 A from the Income Tax
department.

26. Time of the Tariff (ToD)

The Commission as decides in the earlier tariff order decide to continue compulsory Time of
Day Tariff for HT2 (a) and HT2 (b) and HT2(c) consumers with a contract demand of 500 KVA
and above. Further, the optional ToD would continue as existing earlier for HT2 (a), HT2 (b)
and HT 2(C) consumers with contract demand of less than 500 KVA. Also the ToD for HT1
consumers on optional basis would continue as existing earlier. Details of ToD tariff are
indicated under the respective tariff category.

27. SICK INDUSTRIES:

The Government of Karnataka has extended certain reliefs to sick industries under the New
Industrial Policy 2001-06 vide [Link] 167 SPI 2001, dated 30.06.2001. The Commission,
in its Tariff Order 2002 has accorded approval for implementation of reliefs to the sick
industries as per the Government policy and the same was continued in the Tariff Order

187
.

2003. The Commission approves continuation of the implementation of reliefs to sick

industries by the Licensees subject to collection of the amount of relief from the GOK in
advance.

28. Incentive for Prompt Payment / Advance Payment: An incentive at the rate of 0.25%
of such bill shall be given to the following Consumers by way of adjustment in the
subsequent month‟s bill:
(i) In all cases of payment through ECS.
(ii) And in the case of monthly bills exceeding Rs.1, 00,000/- (Rs. one lakh), if the payment is
made 10 days in advance of the due date.
(iii) Advance Payment exceeding Rs 1000/-made by the Consumers towards monthly bills.

29. Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka
and amendments issued thereon from time to time and Regulations issued under Electricity
Act 2003 will prevail over the extract given in this tariff book in the event of any discrepancy.

30. Self-Reading of Meters:

The Commission has approved Self-Reading of Meters by Consumers and issue of bills by the
Licensee based on such readings and the Licensee shall take the reading at least once in six
months and reconcile the difference, if any and raise the bills accordingly. This procedure
may be implemented by the Licensee as stipulated under Section 26.01 of Conditions of
Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka.

ELECTRICITY TARIFF - 2015

PART-1
HIGH TENSION SUPPLY

Applicable to Bulk Power Supply of Voltages at 11KV (including 2.3/4.6 KV) and
above at Standard High Voltage or Extra High Voltages when the Contract Demand
is 50 KW / 67 HP and above.

CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO BILLING OF HT INSTALLATIONS:

1. Billing Demand
A) The billing demand during unrestricted period shall be the maximum demand recorded
during the month or 75% of the CD, whichever is higher.

B) When the Licensee has imposed demand cut of 25% or less, the conditions stipulated in (A)
shall apply.

C) When the demand cut is in excess of 25%, the billing demand shall be the maximum
demand recorded or 75% of the restricted demand, whichever is higher.

D) If at any time the maximum demand recorded exceeds the CD or the demand entitlement,
or opted demand entitlement during the period of restrictions, if any, the Consumer shall pay

188
.

for the quantum of excess demand at two times the normal rate per KVA per month as
deterrent charges as per Section No. 126(6) of Electricity Act 2003. If time of day Meter is
fixed and is operational, there will be no penalty for over drawal up to 1. 2 times the Contract
Demand during off peak hours, provided, the Licensee has declared the peak and off peak
periods. For over drawal during peak periods and over drawal above 1.2 times the Contract
Demand during off peak hours, the penalty shall be two times the normal rate.

E) During the periods of disconnection, the billing demand shall be 75% of CD, or 75% of the
demand entitlement that would have been applicable, had the installation been in service,
whichever is less. This provision is applicable only, if the installation is under disconnection
for the entire billing month.
F) During the period of energy cut, the Consumer may get his demand entitlement lowered,
but not below the percentage of energy entitlement, (For example, In case the energy
entitlement is 40% and the demand entitlement is 80%, the re-fixation of demand entitlement
cannot be lower than 40% of the CD). The benefit of lower demand entitlement will be given
effect to from the meter reading date of the same month, if the option is exercised on or before
15th of the month. If the option is exercised on or after 16th of the month, the benefit will be
given effect to from the next meter reading date. The Consumer shall register such option by
paying processing fee of Rs.100/- at the Jurisdictional sub-division office.

(i) The billing demand in such cases, shall be the “Revised (Opted) Demand Entitlement” or,
the recorded demand, whichever is higher. Such option for reduction of demand entitlement,
is allowed only once during the entire span of that particular “Energy Cut Period”. The
Consumer, can however, opt for a higher demand entitlement up to the level permissible
under the demand cut notification, and the benefit will be given effect to from the next meter
reading date. Once the Consumer opts for enhancement of demand, which has been reduced
under Clause (F), no further revision is permitted during that particular energy cut period.

(ii) The opted reduced demand entitlement will automatically cease to be effective, when the
energy cut is revised. The facility for reduction and enhancement can however be exercised
afresh by the Consumer as indicated in the previous paras.
G) For the purpose of billing, the billing demand of 0.5 KVA and above will be rounded off to
the next higher KVA, and billing demand of less than 0.5 KVA shall be ignored.

2. Power factor (PF)

It shall be the responsibility of the HT Consumer to determine the capacity of PF correction
apparatus and maintain an average PF of not less than 0.90.
(i) The specified P.F. is 0.90. If the power factor goes below 0.90 Lag, a surcharge of 3 Paise
per unit consumed will be levied for every reduction of P.F. by 0.01 below 0.90 Lag.
(ii) The power factor when computed as the ratio of KWh / KVAh will be determined up to 3
decimals (ignoring figures in the other decimal places), and then rounded off to the nearest
second decimal as illustrated below:
(a) 0.8949 to be rounded off to 0.89

189
.

(b) 0.8951 to be rounded off to 0.90 In respect of Electronic Tri-Vector meters, the recorded
average PF over the billing period shall be considered for billing purposes. If the same is not
available, the ratio of KWh to KVAh consumed in the billing month shall be considered.

3. Rebate for supply at high voltage:

If the Consumer is availing power at voltage higher than 13.2 KV, he will be entitled to a
rebate as indicated below:

Supply Voltage: Rebate

A) 33/66 KV 2 Paise/unit of energy consumed
B) 110 KV 3 Paise/unit of energy consumed
C) 220 KV 5 Paise/unit of energy consumed
The above rebate will be allowed in respect of all the installations of the above voltage class,
including the existing installations, and also for installations converted from 13.2 KV and
below to 33 KV and above and also for installations converted from 33/66 KV to 110/220
KV, from the next meter reading date after conversion / service / date of notification of this
Tariff order, as the case may be. The above rebate is applicable only on the normal energy
consumed by the Consumer including the consumption under TOD Tariff, and is not
applicable on any other energy allotted and consumed, if any, viz.,
i) Wheeled Energy.
ii) Any energy, including the special energy allotted over and above normal entitlement.
iii) Energy drawal under special incentive scheme, if any.

The above rebate is not applicable for Railway Traction.

4. In respect of Residential Quarters / Colonies availing Bulk power supply by tapping the
main HT supply, the energy consumed by such Colony loads, metered at single point, shall be
billed under HT-4 tariff schedule. No reduction in demand recorded in the main HT meter will
be allowed.

5. Energy supplied may be utilized for all purposes associated with the working of the
installations, such as, Office, Stores, Canteens, Yard Lighting, Water Supply and
Advertisements within the premises.
6. Energy can also be used for construction, modification and expansion purposes within the
premises.

7. Power supply under HT-4 tariff schedule may be used for Commercial and other purposes
inside the colony for installations such as Canteen, Club, Shop, Auditorium etc., provided, this
load is less than 10% of the CD.

8. In respect of Residential Apartments, availing HT Power supply under HT-4 tariff

schedule, the supply availed for Commercial and other purposes like Shops, Hotels, etc., will
be billed under appropriate tariff schedule (Only Energy charges) duly deducting such
consumption in the main HT supply bill. No reduction in the recorded demand of the main HT

190
.

meter is allowed. Common areas shall be billed at Tariff applicable to that of the predominant
Consumer category.

9. Seasonal Industries
a. The industries, which intend to utilize seasonal industry benefit, shall conform to the
conditionalities under Para no. 24 of the General terms and conditions of tariff (applicable to
both HT & LT).
b. The industries that intend to avail this benefit shall have Electronic TriVector Meter fitted to
the installation.
c. Monthly charges during the working season, shall be the demand charges on 75% of the
contract demand, or the recorded maximum demand during the month, whichever is higher,
plus the energy charges
d. Monthly charges during the off season shall be demand charges on the maximum demand
recorded during the month or 50% of the CD whichever is higher plus the energy charges.[

TARIFF SCHEDULE HT-1

Applicable to Water Supply, Drainage / Sewerage water treatment plant and Sewerage
Pumping installations, belonging to Bangalore Water Supply and Sewerage Board, Karnataka
Urban Water Supply and Sewerage Board, other local bodies, State and Central Government.
RATE SCHEDULE
Demand charges Rs 180 /kVA of billing demand/month
Energy charges 400 paise/unit
TOD Tariff at the option of the Consumer
Time of Day Increase (+) / reduction (-) in energy charges over the normal
tariff applicable
22.00 Hrs to 06.00 Hrs (-) 125 paise per unit
06.00 Hrs to 18.00 Hrs 0
18.00 Hrs to 22.00 Hrs + 100 paise per unit

Note: Energy supplied to residential quarters availing bulk supply by the above category of
Consumer, shall be metered separately at a single point, and the energy consumed shall be
billed at HT-4 Tariff. No reduction in the demand recorded in the main HT meter will be
allowed.

TARIFF SCHEDULE HT-2(a)

Applicable to Industries, Factories, Workshops, Research & Development Centres, Industrial
Estates, Milk dairies, Rice Mills, Phova Mills, Roller Flour Mills, News Papers, Printing Press,
Railway Workshops/KSRTC Workshops/ Depots, Crematoriums, Cold Storage, Ice & Ice-
cream mfg. Units, Swimming Pools of local bodies, Water Supply Installations of KIADB and
other industries, all Defence Establishments. Hatcheries, Poultry Farm, Museum, Floriculture,
Green House, Bio Technical Laboratory, Hybrid Seeds processing Units, Stone Crushers,
Stone cutting, Bakery Product Manufacturing Units, Mysore Palace illumination, Film Studios,
Dubbing Theatres, Processing, Printing, Developing and Recording Theaters, Tissue Culture,
Aqua Culture, Prawn Culture, Information Technology Industries engaged in development of

191
.

Hardware & Software, Information Technology (IT) enabled Services / Start-ups/ Animation /
Gaming / Computer Graphics as certified by the IT & BT Department of GOK/GOI, Drug Mfg.
Units, Garment Mfg. Units, Tyre retreading units, Nuclear Power Projects, Stadiums
maintained by Government and local bodies, also Railway Traction, Effluent treatment plants
and Drainage water treatment plants owned other than by the local bodies, LPG bottling
plants, petroleum pipeline projects, Piggery farms, Analytical Lab for analysis of ore metals,
Saw Mills, Toy/wood industries, Satellite communication centers, and Mineral water
processing plants / drinking water bottling plants.

RATE SCHEDULE
HT-2(a)(i): Applicable to Areas under Bruhat Bangalore Mahangara Palike (BBMP)
and Municipal Corporation.
Demand charges Rs180 / kVA of billing demand / month
Energy charges
For the first one lakh 575 paise per unit
units
For the balance units 615 paise per unit
Railway Traction and Effluent Treatment Plants
Demand charges Rs180/kVA of billing demand/month
Energy Charges 540 paise per unit for all the units

Tariff applicable to Bangalore Metropolitan Railway Corporation Ltd., (BMRCL)

Demand charges Rs180/kVA of billing demand/month
Energy Charges 520 paise per unit for all the units

HT-2(a)(ii): Applicable to Areas other than those covered under HT-2(a)(i)

Demand charges Rs170/kVA of billing demand/month
Energy charges
For the first one lakh units 570 paise per unit
For the balance units 600 paise per unit
Railway Traction and Effluent Treatment Plants
Demand charges Rs180/kVA of billing demand/month
Energy Charges 540 paise per unit for all the units

TARIFF SCHEDULE HT-2(b)

Applicable to Commercial Complexes, Cinemas, Hotels, Boarding & Lodging, Amusement
Parks, Telephone Exchanges, Race Course, All Clubs, T.V. Station, All India Radio, Railway
Stations, Air Port, KSRTC bus stations, All offices, Banks, Commercial Multi-storied buildings,
APMC Yards, Stadiums other than those maintained by Government and Local Bodies,
Construction power for irrigation, Power Projects and Konkan Railway Project, Petrol / Diesel
and Oil storage plants, I.T. based medical transcription centers, telecom, call centers / BPO /
KPO.

192
.

RATE SCHEDULE

HT-2 (b)(i): Applicable to Areas under Bruhat Bangalore Mahangara Palike (BBMP)
and Municipal Corporation.
Demand Charges Rs 200/KVA of billing demand/month
Energy charges
For the first two lakh 735 paise per unit
units
For the balance units 765 paise per unit

HT-2(b)(ii): Applicable to Areas other than those covered under HT-2(b)(i)

Demand Charges Rs 190/KVA of billing demand/month
Energy charges
For the first two lakh units 715 paise per unit
For the balance units 745 paise per unit

TARIFF SCHEDULE HT-2(c)

RATE SCHEDULE
HT-2 (c) (i) - Applicable to Government Hospitals and Hospitals run by Charitable
Institutions and ESI hospitals and Universities, Educational Institutions belonging
to Government, Local bodies, Aided Institutions and Hostels of all Educational
Institutions.
Demand Charges Rs 170/KVA of billing demand/month
Energy charges
For the first two lakh units 540 paise per unit
For the balance units 590 paise per unit

RATE SCHEDULE
HT-2 (c) (ii) -Applicable to Hospitals and Educational Institutions other than those
covered under HT-2 (c) (i).
Demand Charges Rs 170/KVA of billing demand/month
Energy charges
For the first two lakh units 640 paise per unit
For the balance units 690 paise per unit

Note: Applicable to HT-2 (a), HT-2 (b) & HT-2(c) Tariff Schedule.

1. Energy supplied may be utilized for all purposes associated with the working of the
installation such as offices, stores, canteens, yard lighting, water pumping and advertisement
within the premises.

193
.

2. Energy can be used for construction, modification and expansion purposes within the
premises.

TOD Tariff applicable to HT 2(a), HT2 (b) and HT2(c) category.

Time of Day Increase + / reduction (-) in energy charges over the normal
tariff applicable
22.00 Hrs to 06.00 Hrs 0
06.00 Hrs to 18.00 Hrs + 100 paise per unit

TARIFF SCHEDULE HT-3 (a)

Applicable to Lift irrigation Schemes/ Lift irrigation societies,

RATE SCHEDULE
HT-3 (a)(i): Applicable to LI schemes under Govt. Departments/ Govt. owned
Corporations.
Energy charges/ Minimum Charges 150 paise per unit subject to an annual
minimum of Rs1000 per HP/Annum

HT-3(a)(ii): Applicable to Private LI schemes and Lift Irrigation societies: Connected

to Urban/Express feeders
Fixed Charges Rs30 /HP/PM of sanctioned load
Energy charges 150 paise/unit

HT-3(a)(iii): Applicable to Private LI schemes and Lift Irrigation societies other than
those covered under HT-3 (a)(ii).
Fixed Charges Rs10 /HP/PM of sanctioned load
Energy charges 150 paise/unit

TARIFF SCHEDULE HT-3 (b)

HT-3 (b): Applicable to Irrigation and Agricultural Farms, Government Horticultural Farms,
Private Horticulture nurseries, Coffee, Tea, Rubber, Coconut & Arecanut Plantations.

RATE SCHEDULE
Energy charges/ Minimum Charges 350 paise per unit subject to an annual
minimum of Rs1000 per HP/ of sanctioned
load.

Note: These installations are to be billed on quarter yearly basis.

TARIFF SCHEDULE HT-4

Applicable to Residential apartments and colonies (whether situated outside or inside the
premises of the main HT Installation) availing power supply independently or by tapping the

194
.

main H.T. line. Power supply can be used for residences, theatres, shopping facility, club,
hospital, guest house, yard/street lighting, canteen located within the colony.

RATE SCHEDULE
Applicable to all areas.
Demand Charges Rs100/- per kVA of billing demand
Energy charges 530 paise/unit

NOTE: (1) In respect of residential colonies availing power supply by tapping the main H.T.
supply, the energy consumed by such colony loads metered at a single point, is to be billed at
the above energy rate. No reduction in the recorded demand of the main H.T. supply is
allowed.

(2) Energy under this tariff may be used for commercial and other purposes inside the
colonies, for installations such as, Canteens, Clubs, Shops, Auditorium etc., provided, this
commercial load is less than 10% of the Contract demand.

(3) In respect of Residential Apartments, availing HT Power supply under HT-4 tariff
schedule, the supply availed for Commercial and other purposes like Shops, Hotels, etc., will
be billed under appropriate tariff schedule (Only Energy charges), duly deducting such
consumption in the main HT supply bill. No reduction in the recorded demand of the main HT
meter is allowed. Common areas shall be billed at Tariff applicable to the predominant
Consumer category.

TARIFF SCHEDULE HT-5

Tariff applicable to 67 HP and above hoardings and advertisement boards and construction
power for industries excluding those category of consumers covered under HT2(b) Tariff
schedule availing power supply for construction power for irrigation and power projects and
also applicable to power supply availed on temporary basis with the contract demand of 67
HP and above of all categories.

HT – 5 – Temporary supply
RATE SCHEDULE
67 HP and above:
Fixed charges / Rs 210/HP/month for the entire sanction load / contract demand
Demand Charges
Energy Charge 900 paise / unit

195
.

Note:
1. Temporary power supply with or without extension of distribution main shall be arranged
through a pre–paid energy meter duly observing the provisions of Clause 12 of the Conditions
of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka.

2. This Tariff is also applicable to touring cinemas having licence for duration less than one
year.

3. All the conditions regarding temporary power supply as stipulated in Clause 12 of the
Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka shall
be complied with before service.

PART-II
LOW TENSION SUPPLY
(400 Volts Three Phase and 230Volts Single Phase Supply

CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO BILLING OF LT INSTALLATIONS:

1. In case of LT Industrial / Commercial Consumers, Demand based Tariff at the option of the
Consumer, can be adopted. The Consumer is permitted to have more connected load than the
sanctioned load. The billing demand will be the sanctioned load, or Maximum Demand
recorded in the Tri-Vector Meter during the month, whichever is higher. If the Maximum
Demand recorded is more than the sanctioned load, penal charges at two times the normal
rate shall apply.

2. Use of power within the Consumer premises for bonafide temporary purpose is permitted,
subject to the conditions that, total load of the installation on the system does not exceed the
sanctioned load.

3. Where it is intended to use power supply temporarily, for floor polishing and such other
portable equipments, in a premises having permanent power supply, such equipments shall
be provided with earth leakage circuit breakers of adequate capacity.

4. The laboratory installations in educational institutions are allowed to install connected

machineries up to 4 times the sanctioned load. The fixed charges shall however be on the
basis of sanctioned load.

5. Besides combined lighting and heating, electricity supply under tariff schedules LT2 (a) &
LT2 (b), can be used for Fans, Televisions, Radios, Refrigerators and other household
appliances, including domestic water pumps and air conditioners, provided, they are under
single meter connection. If a separate meter is provided for Air-conditioner load, the Consumer
shall be served with a notice to merge this load, and to have a single meter for the entire load.
Till such time, the air conditioner load will be billed under Commercial Tariff.

196
.

6. Bulk LT supply

If power supply for lighting / combined lighting & heating {LT 2(a)}, is availed through a bulk
Meter for group of houses belonging to one Consumer, (ie, Where bulk LT supply is availed),
the billing for energy shall be done at the slab rate for energy charges matching the
consumption obtained, by dividing the bulk consumption by number of houses. In addition,
fixed charges for the entire sanctioned load shall be charged as per Tariff schedule.

7. A rebate of 25 Paise per unit will be given for the House/ School/Hostels meant for
Handicapped, Aged, Destitute and Orphans, Rehabilitation Centres under Tariff schedule LT
2(a).

8. SOLAR REBATE: A rebate of 50 Paise per unit of electricity consumed subject to a

maximum of Rs. 50/- per installation per month will be allowed to Tariff schedule LT 2(a), if
solar water heaters are installed and used. Where Bulk Solar Water Heater System is
installed, Solar Water Heater rebate shall be allowed to each of the individual installations,
provided that, the capacity of Solar Water Heater in such apartment / group housing shall be
a minimum capacity of 100 Ltr. per household.

9. A rebate of 20% on fixed charges and energy charges will be allowed in the monthly bill in
respect of public Telephone booths having STD/ISD/ FAX facility run by handicapped people,
under Tariff schedule LT 3.
10. A rebate of 2 paise per unit will be allowed if capacitors are installed as per Clause 23 of
Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka in
respect of all metered IP Set Installations.

11. Power Factor (PF):

Capacitors of appropriate capacity of shall be installed in accordance with Clause 23 of

Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka, in
case of installations covered under Tariff category LT 3, LT4, LT 5, & LT 6, where motive
power is involved.
(i) The specified P.F. is 0.85. If the PF is found to be less than 0.85 Lag, a surcharge of 2
Paise per unit consumed will be levied for every reduction of P.F. by 0.01 below 0.85 Lag. In
respect of LT installations, however, this is subject to a maximum surcharge of 30 Paise per
unit.
(ii) The power factor when computed as the ratio of KWh/KVAh will be determined up to 3
decimals (ignoring figures in the other decimal places) and then rounded off to the nearest
second decimal as illustrated below: (a) 0.8449 to be rounded off to 0.84 (b) 0.8451 to be
rounded off to 0.85
(iii) In respect of Electronic Tri-Vector meters, the recorded average PF over the billing period
shall be considered for billing purposes.
(iv) During inspection, if the capacity of capacitors provided is found to be less than what is
stipulated in Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of

197
.

Karnataka, a surcharge of 30 Paise/unit will be levied in the case of installations covered

under Tariff categories LT 3, LT 5, & LT 6 where motive power is involved.
(v) In the case of installations without electronic Tri-vector meters even after providing
capacitors as recommended in Clause 23.01 and 23.03 of Conditions of Supply of Electricity
of the Distribution Licensees in the State xxviii of Karnataka, if during any periodical or other
testing / rating of the installation by the Licensee, the PF of the installation is found to be
lesser than 0.85, a surcharge determined as above shall be levied from the billing month
following the expiry of Three months‟ notice given by the Licensee, till such time, the
additional capacitors are installed and informed to the Licensee in writing by the Consumer.
This is also applicable for LT installations provided with electronic Tri-vector meters.

12. All new IP set applicants shall fix capacitors of adequate capacity in accordance with
Clause 23 of Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of
Karnataka before taking service.

13. All the existing IP set Consumers shall also fix capacitors of adequate capacity in
accordance with Clause 23 of Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees
in the State of Karnataka, failing which, PF surcharge at the rate of Rs.60/-per HP/ year
shall be levied. If the capacitors are found to be removed / not installed, a penalty at the
same rate as above (Rs. 60/-per HP / Year) shall be levied.

14. The Semi-permanent cinemas having Semi-permanent structure, with permanent wiring
and licence of not less than one year, will be billed under commercial tariff schedule i.e., LT 3.

15. Touring cinemas having an outfit comprising cinema apparatus and accessories, taken
from place to place for exhibition of cinematography films and also outdoor shooting units,
will be billed under Temporary Tariff schedule i.e., LT 7.

16. The Consumers under IP set tariff schedule, shall use the energy only for pumping water
to irrigate their own land as stated in the IP set application / water right certificate and for
bonafide agriculture use. Otherwise, such installations shall be billed under appropriate
Industrial / Commercial tariff, based on the recorded consumption if available, or on the
consumption computed as per the Table given under Clause 42.06 of the Conditions of Supply
of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka.

17. The water pumped for agricultural purposes may also be used by the Consumer for his
bonafide drinking purposes and for supplying water to animals, birds, Poultry farms, Diary
farms and fish farms maintained by the Consumer in addition to agriculture.

18. The motor of IP set installations can be used with an alternative drive for other
agricultural operations like sugar cane crusher, coffee pulping, etc., with the approval of the
Licensee. The energy used for such operation shall be metered separately by providing
alternate switch and charged at LT Industrial Tariff (Only Energy charges) during the period
of alternative use. However, if the energy used both for IP Set and alternate operation, is
measured together by one energy meter, the energy used for alternate drive shall be

198
.

estimated by deducting the average IP Set consumption for that month, as per the IP sample
meter readings for the sub division, as certified by the sub divisional Officer.

19. The IP Consumer is permitted to use energy for lighting the pump house and well limited
to two lighting points of 40 Watts each.

20. Billing shall be made at least once in a quarter year for all IP sets.

21. In case of welding transformers, the connected load shall be taken as: a) Half the
maximum capacity in KVA as per the nameplate specified under IS: 1851
OR
b) Half the maximum capacity in KVA as recorded during the rating by the Licensee,
whichever is higher.

22. Electricity under Tariff LT 3 / LT 5 can also be used for Lighting, Heating and Air-
conditioning, Yard-Lighting, water supply in the premises of Commercial / Industrial Units
respectively.

23. Fluorescent fittings shall be provided by the Licensee for the Streetlights in the case of
villages covered under the Licensee‟s electrification programme for initial [Link] In
all other cases, the entire cost of fittings including Brackets, Clamps, etc., and labour for
replacement, additions and modifications shall be met by the organizations making such a
request. Labour charges shall be paid at the standard rates fixed by the Licensee for each
type of fitting.

24. Lamps, fittings and replacements for defective components of fittings shall be supplied by
the concerned Village Panchayaths, Town Panchayaths or Municipalities for replacement.

25. Fraction of KW / HP shall be rounded off to the nearest quarter KW / HP for purpose of
billing and the minimum billing being for 1 KW / 1HP in respect of all categories of LT
installations including I.P. sets. In the case of street lighting installations, fraction of KW shall
be rounded off to nearest quarter KW for the purpose of billing and the minimum billing shall
be quarter KW.

26. Seasonal Industries.

a) The industries who intend to utilize seasonal industry benefit, shall comply with the
conditionalities under Para no. 24 of the General terms and conditions of tariff (applicable to
both HT & LT).
b) The industries that intend to avail this benefit shall have Electronic TriVector Meter fitted to
their installation.
c) Monthly charges during the seasonal months shall be fixed charges and energy charges.
The monthly charges during the off seasonal months, shall be the energy charges plus 50% of
the fixed charges.

199
.

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-1

LT-1: Applicable to installations serviced under Bhagyajyothi and Kutirajyothi

(BJ/KJ) schemes.
Rate schedule
Energy charges Nil*
(including recovery towards service main Fully subsidized by the GOK
charges)

Commission Determined Tariff (CDT) for the above category i.e., LT-1 is Rs. 5.36 per unit.

*Since GOK is meeting the full cost of supply to BJ / KJ, the Tariff payable by these
Consumers is shown as Nil. However, if the GOK does not release the subsidy in advance,
CDT of Rs.5.36 per unit subject to monthly minimum of Rs.30/- per installation per month
shall be demanded and collected from these consumers.

Note: If the consumption exceeds 18 units per month or any BJ/KJ installation is found to
have more than one out let, it shall be billed as per Tariff Schedule LT 2(a).

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-2(a)

Applicable to lighting/combined lighting, heating and motive Power installations of residential
houses and also to such houses where a portion is used by the occupant for (a) Handloom
weaving (b) Silk rearing and reeling and artisans using motors up to 200 watts (c)
Consultancy in (i) Engineering (ii) Architecture (iii) Medicine (iv) Astrology (v) Legal matters (vi)
Income tax (vii) Chartered Accountants (d) Job typing (e) Tailoring (f) Post Office (g) Gold
smithy (h) Chawki rearing (i) Paying guests/Home stay guests (j) personal Computers (k)
Dhobis (l) Hand operated printing press (m) Beauty Parlours (n) Water Supply installations,
Lift which is independently serviced for bonafide use of residential complexes/residence, (o)
Farm Houses and yard lighting limiting to 120 Watts, (p) Fodder Choppers & Milking
Machines with a connected load up to 1 HP.

Also applicable to the installations of (i) Hospitals, Dispensaries, Health Centers run by
State/Central Govt. and local bodies. (ii) Houses, schools and Hostels meant for
handicapped, aged destitute and orphans (iii) Rehabilitation Centres run by charitable
institutions, AIDS and drug addicts Rehabilitation Centres (iv) Railway staff Quarters with
single meter(v) fire service stations.

It is also applicable to the installations of (a) Temples, Mosques, Churches, Gurudwaras,

Ashrams, Mutts and religious/Charitable institutions (b) Hospitals, Dispensaries and Health
Centres run by Charitable institutions including X-ray units (c) Jails and Prisons (d) Schools,
Colleges, Educational institutions run by State/Central Govt.,/Local Bodies (e) Seminaries (f)
Hostels run by the Government, Educational Institutions, Cultural, Scientific and Charitable
Institutions (g) Guest Houses/Travelers Bungalows run in Government buildings or by
State/Central Govt./Religious/Charitable institutions (h) Public libraries (i) Silk rearing (j)

200
.

Museums (k) Installations of Historical Monuments of Archaeology Departments(l) Public

Telephone Booths without STD/ISD/FAX facility run by handicapped people (m) Sulabh /
Nirmal Souchalayas (n) Viswa Sheds having Lighting Loads only.

RATE SCHEDULE

LT-2(a)(i) : Applicable to areas coming under Bruhat Bangalore Mahanagara Palike

(BBMP), Municipal Corporation and all Urban Local Bodies.
Fixed charges per month For the first KW Rs 25/- per KW
For every additional KW Rs 35/- per KW
Energy charges For 0 - 30 units (Lifeline 270 Ps/unit
consumption)
31 to 100 units 400 Ps /unit
101 to 200 units 525 Ps/unit
Above 200 units 625 Ps/unit
LT-2(a)(ii): Applicable to Areas under Village Panchayats

Fixed charges per month For the first KW Rs 15/- per KW

For every additional KW Rs 25/- per KW
Energy charges For 0 - 30 units (Lifeline 260 Ps/unit
consumption)
31 to 100 units 370 Ps /unit
101 to 200 units 495 Ps/unit
Above 200 units 575 Ps/unit

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-2(b)

Applicable to the installations of Private Professional and other Private Educational

Institutions including aided, unaided institutions, Nursing Homes and Private Hospitals
having only lighting or combined lighting & heating, and motive power.

RATE SCHEDULE

LT-2(b)(i): Applicable to Areas under Bruhat Bangalore Mahangara Palike (BBMP) and
Municipal Corporation and all areas coming under Urban Local Bodies.
Fixed charges Rs 35 Per KW subject to a minimum of Rs 65 PM
Energy charges 0 to 200 units 600 Ps/unit
Above 200 units 720 Ps/unit

LT-2(b)(ii): Applicable in Areas under Village Panchayats

Fixed charges Rs 25 Per KW subject to a minimum of Rs 50 PM
Energy charges 0 to 200 units 550 Ps/unit
Above 200 units 670 Ps/unit
Note: Applicable to LT-2 (a), LT-2 (b) Tariff Schedules.

201
.

1 A rebate of 25 Ps. Per unit shall be given for installation of a house/ School/ Hostels meant
for Handicapped, Aged, Destitute and Orphans, Rehabilitation Centres run by Charitable
Institutions.
2 (a) Use of power within the Consumer‟s premises for temporary purposes for bonafide use
is permitted subject to the condition that, the total load of the installation on the system does
not exceed the sanctioned load.
(b) Where it is intended to use floor polishing and such other portable equipment temporarily,
in the premises having permanent supply, such equipment shall be provided with an earth
leakage circuit breaker of adequate capacity.

3 The laboratory installations in educational institutions are allowed to install connected

machinery up to 4 times the sanctioned load. The fixed charges shall however be on the basis
of sanctioned load.

4. Besides lighting and heating, Electricity supply under this schedule can be used for fans,
Televisions, Radios, Refrigerators and other house-hold appliances including domestic water
pump and air conditioners, provided, they are under single meter connection. If a separate
meter is provided for Air conditioner Load, the consumption shall be under commercial tariff
till it is merged with the main meter.

5. SOLAR REBATE: A rebate of 50 Paise per unit of electricity consumed to a maximum of

Rs.50/- per installation per month will be allowed to Tariff schedule LT 2(a), if solar water
heaters are installed and used. Where Bulk Solar Water Heater System is installed, Solar
Water Heater rebate shall be allowed to each of the individual installations, provided that,
the capacity of Solar Water Heater in such apartment / group housing shall be a minimum
capacity of 100 Ltr, per household.

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-3

Applicable to Commercial Lighting, Heating and Motive Power installations of Clinics,

Diagnostic Centers, X-Ray units, Shops, Stores, Hotels / Restaurants / Boarding and Lodging
Homes, Bars, Private guest Houses, Mess, Clubs, Kalyan Mantaps / Choultry, permanent
Cinemas/ Semi Permanent Cinemas, Theatres, Petrol Bunks, Petrol, Diesel and oil Storage
Plants, Service Stations/ Garages, Banks, Telephone Exchanges. T.V. xxxv Stations,
Microwave Stations, All India Radio, Dish Antenna, Public Telephone Booths/ STD, ISD, FAX
Communication Centers, Stud Farms, Race Course, Ice Cream Parlours, Computer Centres,
Photo Studio / colour Laboratory, Xerox Copiers, Railway Installation excepting Railway
workshop, KSRTC Bus Stations excepting Workshop, All offices, Police Stations, Commercial
Complexes, Lifts of Commercial Complexes, Battery Charging units, Tyre Vulcanizing Centres,
Post Offices, Bakery shops, Tailoring Shops, Beauty Parlours, Stadiums other than those
maintained by Govt. and Local Bodies. It is also applicable to water supply pumps and street
lights not covered under LT 6, Cyber cafés, Internet surfing cafés, Call centers, I.T. based
medical transcription centers, Private Hostels not covered under LT -2 (a), Paying guests
accommodation provided in an independent / exclusive premises.

202
.

RATE SCHEDULE
LT-3 (i): Applicable in areas coming under Bruhat Bangalore Mahanagara Palike
(BBMP), Municipal Corporation and all areas under urban local bodies
Fixed charges Rs 40 per KW
Energy charges For 0-50 units 675 Ps/unit
Above 50 units 775 Ps/unit

Demand based tariff (optional) where sanctioned load is above 5 KW but below 50 KW
Fixed charges Rs. 55 per KW
Energy charges As above

RATE SCHEDULE
LT-3 (ii):Applicable in Areas under Village Panchayats
Fixed charges Rs 30 per KW
Energy charges For 0-50 units 625 Ps/unit
Above 50 units 725 Ps/unit

Demand based tariff (optional) where sanctioned load is above 5 KW but below 50 KW
Fixed charges Rs. 45 per KW
Energy charges As above

Note: 1. Besides Lighting, Heating and Motive power, Electricity supply under this Tariff can
also be used for Yard lighting/ air Conditioning/water supply in the premises.
2. The semi-permanent Cinemas should have semi-Permanent Structure with permanent
wiring and licence for duration of not less than one year.
3. Touring Cinemas having an outfit comprising Cinema apparatus and accessories taken
from place to place for exhibition of cinematography film and also outdoor shooting units shall
be billed under LT- 7 Tariff.

4. A rebate of 20% on fixed charges and energy charges shall be allowed in the monthly bill
in respect of telephone Booths having STD / ISD/FAX facility run by handicapped people.

5. Demand based Tariff at the option of the consumer can be adopted as per Para 1 of the
conditions applicable to LT installations.

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-4 (a), LT-4 (b) & LT-4(c)

Applicable to (a) Agricultural Pump Sets including Sprinklers (b) Pump sets used in (i)
Nurseries of forest and Horticultural Departments (ii) Grass Farms and Gardens (iii)
Plantations other than Coffee, Tea, Rubber and Private Horticulture Nurseries.

203
.

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-4 (a)

Applicable to I.P. Sets Up to and inclusive of 10 HP
RATE SCHEDULE
Fixed charges Free
Energy charges

Commission Determined Tariff (CDT) for LT4 (a) category is 203 paise per unit
In case the GOK does not release the subsidy in advance in the manner specified by the
Commission in K.E.R.C. (Manner of Payment of subsidy) Regulations, 2008, CDT of 203 paise
per unit shall be demanded and collected from these consumers.

Note: This Tariff is applicable for Coconut and Areca nut plantations also.

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-4 (b):

Applicable to IP sets above 10 HP
RATE SCHEDULE
Fixed charges Rs 30 per HP per month
Energy charges 215 paise per unit

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-4 (c) (i):

Applicable to Private Horticultural Nurseries, Coffee, Tea and Rubber plantations of
sanctioned load up to and inclusive of 10 HP.
RATE SCHEDULE
Fixed charges Rs 20 per HP per month
Energy charges 215 paise per unit

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-4 (c) (ii):

Applicable to Private Horticultural Nurseries, Coffee, Tea and Rubber plantations of
sanctioned load above 10 HP.
RATE SCHEDULE
Fixed charges Rs 30 per HP per month
Energy charges 215 paise per unit

Note:
1) The energy supplied under this tariff shall be used by the Consumers only for Pumping
water to irrigate their own land as stated in the I.P. Set application / water right certificate
and for bonafide agriculture use. Otherwise, such installations shall be billed under the
appropriate Tariff (LT-3/ LT-5) based on the recorded consumption if available, or on the
consumption computed as per the Table given under Clause 42.06 of the Conditions of Supply
of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka.

2) The motor of IP set installations can be used with an alternative drive for other
agricultural operations like sugar cane crusher, coffee pulping, etc., with the
approval of the Licensee. The energy used for such operation shall be metered separately by

204
.

providing alternate switch and charged at LT Industrial Tariff (Only Energy charges) during
the period of alternative use. If the energy used both for IP Set and alternate operation, is
however measured together by one energy meter, the energy used for alternate drive shall be
estimated by deducting the average IP Set consumption for that month as per the IP sample
meter readings for the sub division as certified by the sub divisional Officer.

3) The Consumer is permitted to use the energy for lighting the pump house and well limited
to 2 lighting points of 40 W each.
4) The water pumped for agricultural purposes may also be used by the Consumer for his
bonafide drinking purposes and for supplying water to animals, birds, Poultry farms, Dairy
farms and fish farms maintained by the Consumer in addition to agriculture.

5) Billing shall be made at least once in a quarter year for all IP sets.

6) A rebate of 2 paise per unit will be allowed if capacitors are installed as per Clause 23 of
Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka in
respect of all metered IP Set Installations.

7) Only fixed charges as in Tariff Schedule for Metered IP Set Installations shall be collected
during the disconnection period of IP Sets under LT 4(a), LT 4(b) and LT 4(c) categories
irrespective of whether the IP Sets are provided with Meters or not.

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-5

Applicable to Heating & Motive power (including lighting) installations of industrial
Units, Workshops, Poultry Farms, Sugarcane Crushers, Coffee Pulping, Cardamom drying,
Mushroom raising installations, Flour, Huller & Rice Mills, Wet Grinders, Milk dairies, Dry
Cleaners and Laundries having washing, Drying, Ironing etc., Bulk Ice Cream and Ice
manufacturing Units, Coffee Roasting and Grinding Works, Cold Storage Plants, Bakery
Product Mfg. Units, KSRTC workshops/Depots, Railway workshops, Drug manufacturing
units and Testing laboratories, Printing Presses, Garment manufacturing units, Bulk Milk
vending Booths, Swimming Pools of local Bodies, Tyre retreading units, Stone crushers, Stone
cutting, Chilly Grinders, Phova Mills, pulverizing Mills, Decorticators, Iron & Red-Oxide
crushing xxxix units, crematoriums, hatcheries, Tissue culture, Saw Mills, Toy/wood
industries, Viswa Sheds with mixed load sanctioned under Viswa Scheme, Cinematic
activities such as Processing, Printing, Developing, Recording theatres, Dubbing Theatres and
film studios, Agarbathi manufacturing unit., Water supply installations of KIADB & industrial
units, Gem & Diamond cutting Units, Floriculture, Green House, Biotech Labs., Hybrid seed
processing units. Information Technology industries engaged in development of hardware &
Software, Information Technology (IT) enabled Services / Start-ups/ Animation / Gaming /
Computer Graphics as certified by the IT & BT Department of GOK/GOI, Silk filature units,
Aqua Culture, Prawn Culture, Brick manufacturing units, Silk / Cotton colour dying, Stadiums
maintained by Govt. and local bodies, Fire service stations, Gold / Silver ornament
manufacturing units, Effluent treatment plants, Drainage water treatment plants, LPG bottling
plants and petroleum pipeline projects, Piggery farms, Analytical Lab. for analysis of ore

205
.

metals, Satellite communication centers, Mineral water processing plants / drinking water
bottling plants and soda fountain units.

RATE SCHEDULE
LT-5 (a): Applicable to Bruhat Bangalore Mahanagara Palike and Municipal
Corporation.
i. Fixed charges
Fixed charges i) Rs. 30 per HP for 5 HP & below
ii) Rs. 30 per HP for above 5 HP & below 40 HP
iii) Rs. 40 per HP for 40 HP & above but below 67 HP
iv) Rs. 110 per HP for 67 HP & above

ii. Demand based Tariff (optional)

Fixed charges Above 5 HP and less than 40 HP Rs. 50 per KW of billing
demand
40 HP and above but less than 67 HP Rs. 70 per KW of billing
demand
67 HP and above Rs.160 per KW of billing
demand

iii. Energy Charges

0 to 500 units 475 Ps/unit
Above 500 units 585 Ps/unit

RATE SCHEDULE
LT-5 (b): Applicable to all Areas other than those covered under LT-5(a).
i. Fixed charges
Fixed charges i) Rs. 25 per HP for 5 HP & below
ii) Rs. 30 per HP for above 5 HP & below 40 HP
iii) Rs. 35 per HP for 40 HP & above but below 67 HP
iv) Rs. 100 per HP for 67 HP & above

ii. Demand based Tariff (optional)

Fixed charges Above 5 HP and less than 40 HP Rs. 45 per KW of billing
demand
40 HP and above but less than 67 HP Rs. 60 per KW of billing
demand
67 HP and above Rs.150 per KW of billing
demand

iii. Energy Charges

206
.

0 to 500 units 455 Ps/unit

501 to 1000 units 535 Ps/unit
Above 500 units 565 Ps/unit

TOD Tariff applicable to LT5 (a) & (b): At the option of the Consumer
Time of Day Increase+ / reduction (-) in energy charges over
the normal tariff applicable
22.00 Hrs to 06.00 Hrs (-) 125 paise per unit
06.00 Hrs to 18.00 Hrs 0
18.00 Hrs to 22.00 Hrs + 100 paise per unit

NOTE:
1. DEMAND BASED TARIFF
In the case of LT Industrial Consumers, Demand based Tariff at the option of the Consumer
can be adopted. The Consumer is permitted to have more connected load than the sanctioned
load. The billing demand will be the sanctioned load or Maximum Demand recorded in the Tri-
Vector Meter during the month whichever is higher. If the Maximum Demand recorded is more
than the sanctioned load, penal charges at two times the normal rate shall apply.

2. Seasonal Industries: The industries which intend to utilize seasonal industry benefit
shall comply with the conditionalities under para no. 24 of general terms and conditions
applicable to LT.

3. Electricity can also be used for lighting, heating, and air-conditioning in the premises.

4. In the case of welding transformers, the connected load shall be taken as (a) Half the
maximum capacity in KVA as per the name plate specified underIS1851 or (b) Half the
maximum capacity in KVA as recorded during rating by the Licensee, whichever is higher.
TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-6

Applicable to water supply and sewerage pumping installations and also Applicable to Public
Street lights/ Park lights of village Panchayat, Town Panchayat, Town Municipalities, City
Municipalities / Corporations / State and Central Govt. / APMC, Traffic signals, subways,
water fountains of local bodies. Also applicable to Streetlights of residential Campus of
universities, other educational institutions, housing colonies approved by local
bodies/development authority, religious institutions, organizations run on charitable basis,
industrial area / estate and notified areas, also applicable to water supply installations in
residential Layouts, Street lights along with signal lights including the gateman‟s shed with
associated equipment provided at the Railway level crossing.

RATE SCHEDULE
Water Supply- LT-6 (a)
Fixed charges Rs. 35/HP/month
Energy charges 330 Paise/unit

207
.

Public lighting- LT-6 (b)

Fixed charges Rs. 50/KW/month
Energy charges 500 Paise/unit
LED Lighting 400 Paise/unit

TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-7

Temporary Supply & Advertising Hoardings

RATE SCHEDULE
Less than 67 HP: Energy charge at 900 paise/unit, subject to a weekly
minimum of Rs160 per KW of the sanctioned load.
TARIFF SCHEDULE LT-7 (b)

Applicable to Hoardings& Advertisement boards, Bus Shelters with Advertising

Boards, Private Advertising Posts / Sign boards in the interest of Public such as
Police Canopy Direction boards, and other sign boards sponsored by the Private
Advertising Agencies/firms on permanent connection basis.

Less than 67 HP: Fixed charges at Rs 40 per Kw/month energy charges at

900 paise/unit.

Note:
1. Temporary power supply with or without extension of distribution main shall be arranged
through a pre–paid energy meter duly observing the provisions of Clause 12 of the
Conditions of Supply of Electricity of the Distribution Licensees in the State of Karnataka.

2. This Tariff is also applicable to touring cinemas having licence for duration less than one
year.

208
.

CHAPTER -15

BESR

• Recruitment & Promotion Regulation

• Employees (Probation) Regulation
Appointment • Employees (Seniority) Regulation

Controlling & • Employees Services (Conduct) Regulation

Regulating the
Services of Employees • Board Employees Classification, Disciplinary,
Control & Appeal Regulation

• Mysore Civil Services Rules

• Electricity Supply Act 1948 – Section 79 C
Regulation of • KEB formed w.e.f. 1.10.1957
Employee‟s Service • Formation of separate set of Regulation - BESR
Conditions • Came into effe`ct from 1.12.1965
• First Edition : January 1966
• Second Edition : March 1997
1. Introductory 7. Leave
2. Definitions 8. Pensions
3. General 9. Re-employment of Pensioners
Conditions of 10. Maintenance of Records of Service
Service 11. Foreign Service
4. Pay & 12. Traveling Allowance
Allowances

5. Joining Time
6. Age of
retirement

• Age • Holiday
• Cadre • Lien
• Class & • Honorarium
Grade • Officiate
• Competent • Pay
Authority • Probationer
• Employee • Stagnation Increment
• Family • Time Scale Pay
Age Calculated from the date of birth of an employee, based on the
evidence produced by the employee at the time of his
appointment Eg., SSLC Marks Card, Birth certificate etc.,

209
.

Apprentice Candidate selected by the Board for training and paid at

monthly rate.
Cadre Independently sanctioned posts of definite nature

Class & Grade Posts bearing same designation are said to be in same class.
Appointments in the same class are divided into „Grades‟
according to Pay.
Continuous Service Comprising the periods of duty and leave with allowances
from date of appointment
Compensatory Allowance granted to meet personal expenditure necessitated
Allowance by the special circumstances in which duty is performed. (TA)
Duty It includes following periods
 Probationary period
 Joining time
 Training Period
 Ist two attempts for Departmental examinations
 Waiting for postings after appointments, after
leave, after training, return from deputations etc.,
 Attending Sports Events deputed by the Board.
Fees Amount paid to employee from other than Board funds, Funds
of the State/India for performing a specified service.

Foreign Service Period for which employee receives his pay from any source
other than Board Funds with the sanction of the Board.

Honorarium A payment to an employee from the funds of the Board or

Government for special work of an occasional Character
Lien Title of an employee to substantively hold a permanent post
to which he has been appointed.
Pay Amount drawn monthly by an employee for position in a cadre
at a rate sanctioned by the Board including Basic Pay, Special
Pay and Personal Pay.
Personal Pay Additional Pay granted to make good , a loss because of
revision of Pay Scale.
Probationer An employee appointed on probation against a substantive
vacancy in any cadre of the Board
Traveling Allowance Allowance granted to an employee to cover the expenses
incurred while traveling in the interest of Board Service.

210
.

General conditions While reporting for the duty for Ist time a Medical Certificate in
of Service the prescribed form, signed by Medical Officer in the rank of
Assistant Surgeon need to be furnished in order to ensure:
 The employee is not suffering from any disease
 He has been vaccinated
 Confirmation of Age and his fitness
Charge of Office An relieving employee should be physically present while
handing over the charge of the office on transfer or otherwise,
and relieve report should be countersigned by the higher officer.
Failing this LPC will not be issued.
Headquarters A place where the employee is executing the work or station
where the records of his office are kept.
Whole time Once appointed the whole time of an employee is at the disposal
Employment of the company without claim for additional remuneration.
Leaving Employee is not supposed to leave the geographical jurisdiction
Jurisdiction without prior permission from the higher authority. He will not be
entitled to pay or allowances for the time spent outside his
jurisdiction without proper authority. However, for following
journey beyond jurisdiction this rule will not apply:
 When an employee passes through a station outside his
jurisdiction in order to shorten the journey.
 To give evidence court of law
 Attending departmental examination
 To give evidence or attend departmental enquiry

Regulation of Pay
 An employee will be eligible for pay and allowances with effect from the day he
assumes the duties of that post and shall cease to draw them as soon as he is
relieved.
 Exception-
1. If the employee assumes duty after 12 noon, he will be entitled to P & A from the
following day
2. When he is relieved his duty after 12 noon his pay will be regulated from the next day
as per new post.
 While transfer involving promotion the P & A as per promoted post can be paid only
after the employee assumes the duties of promoted post.
o On Appointment
o Probationary period declaration
o Annual Increment
o Additional Increment
o Advance Increment
o Promotional Fixations
o Time-Bound-Increment
o Career Advancement Increment
o Revision of Pay Scales
Advance Increment (Reg. 47 a)

211
.

Advance Increment shall be sanctioned to the eligible employees who acquires higher /
additional qualifications prescribed for the post held as per the R&P Regulations and also as
per the decision by the Board from time to time.
 The grant of advance increments shall be without prejudice to the normal
increments.
 The benefit of advance increments shall be admissible only once during the entire
service.
 Advance increments shall not be granted beyond the maximum time scale
applicable to the post held by the eligible employee at the time of grant of advance
increment.
 Advance increment shall not be during probationary period
 Advance increment shall be granted from the date of satisfactory completion of
probationary period OR
 Advance increment granted from the date of announcement of results of the higher
/ additional qualification whichever is later.
Additional Increments (Reg. 47 b)

Employees who passes the prescribed departmental examination / test and get
qualified either for satisfactory completion of probationary period or Promotion to higher post
as per R&P Regulations.
 One increment in the existing time-scale shall be allowed to eligible employees as
additional increment
 This will be allowed only once during the entire service without prejudice to the
normal increment.
 Additional increment shall be sanctioned only after passing the required
departmental examination which is mandatory for the post held and Kannada
language test prescribed if necessary or should have been exemption from passing
Kannada language test.
 The date of effect will be the date of announcement of result of Kannada Exam or
Departmental Exam whichever is later

Stagnation Increment:

It is sanctioned to the Officers above the rank of AEE / AO who has reached the maximum
of the time scale of pay.
 Increment sanctioned over and above the maximum of the time scale of pay of the post
held by the employee
 Maximum of 5 increments can be sanctioned at the rate of one increment annually
 The increment rate will be equal to the rate of increment last drawn while reaching the
maximum of time scale.
 Such increments should be treated as part of „Pay‟ for all the purposes
 Conditions on the part of the officer are
 Officer should have satisfactory record of service i.e., determined in the
same manner as for promotion.
 Officer should be eligible for normal increments.

212
.

 Benefit of stagnation increment is not admissible to officer who foregoes his

promotion voluntarily.
 NOTE: In case of officers who have drawn stagnation increment, the maximum time
scale shall be treated as increased to that extent of increments on personal basis.

Special Increments

Increment sanctioned over and above the normal increments referred above for a
particular cause is called Special Increments. There are two types of Special Increments
LEAVE
Reg. 105 Authorised absence from duty is called as leave. Leave cannot be claimed as a
matter of right. There are different kinds of leave which are as under:
1. Earned Leave
2. Half Pay Leave
3. Full pay Leave
4. Maternity Leave
5. Paternity Leave
6. Study Leave
7. Special Disability Leave
8. Extraordinary Leave
9. Leave after the date of superannuation

 First seven kinds of lave may be taken either singly or in combination with one
another.
 Casual Leave is not treated as Leave for the purpose of these regulation
 As Leave cannot be claimed as a matter of right, it is left to the discretion of the
competent authority to accept or reject the leave application
 Competent Authority can even sanction the leave requested in part, or revoke a
sanction already accorded based on the exigencies of the Corporate service
 Exception :
 Leave claimed by male employee for attending his wife during her
confinement shall not be refused.
 However grant of such leave is subject to following conditions:
 Period of leave should not exceed any reasonable period, before and
after the child‟s birth. This shall be determined by the authority
competent to sanction the same.
 Grant of such leave should be restricted to First and Second delivery.
 The leave availed should be debited to the normal leave account.
 This leave cannot be sanctioned to the employee
1. on suspention
2. whom a competent authority has decided to dismiss / remove
from service / compulsorily retire
 All leave except Earned Leave at the credit of an employee lapses on his retirement.
Exception – refused leave and retired after the date of superannuation.

213
.

Earned Leave & Leave Salary

 30 days of EL will be credited to the leave account of each employee in each calendar
year.
 This should be done in two installments i.e., 15 days on the first of January and July
of every year.
 1/10th of the extraordinary leave availed during the previous calendar half-year shall
be reduced while affording the credit but subject to a maximum of 15 days.
 Leave balance at the credit of the employee at the end of the half year should be
carried forward to the next half year.
 However, sum of leave carried forwarded and credited for the half year should not
exceed the maximum limit of 300 days.
 On first appointment, EL should be credited at the rate of 2 ½ days for each
completed month of service in the calendar half-year.
 Eg. If appointed on 13th March, the number of competed months available will be 3
and credit will be 3 X 5/2 =7 ½ days, rounded to 8 days.
 For the period of last half year during which the employee retires, EL shall be credited
only at the rate of 2 ½ days per completed month
 If employee is on leave on the 1st day of a half year, EL can be credited to his account
provided that competent authority is sure of employee returning to duty on its expiry.
 Un-availed portion of Joining Time shall be credited to the EL account of the employee
subject to condition that maximum limit of 300 days is not exceeded.
 On closure of first or last half year, fraction of the day of EL shall be rounded off to the
nearest day.
 Maximum limit for availing EL is 120 days in India and 180 days if availed partly or
wholly outside India.
 If the leave availed is partly in India and partly outside, number of days spent in India
should not cross 120 days.
 EL can be prefixed or suffixed to HPL, FPL, Study leave, Maternity leave, Special
disability leave and extraordinary leave.
 Leave salary shall be equal to pay drawn by him immediately before proceeding on
leave.

Half – Pay Leave

 Half – Pay Leave includes „Half – Pay Leave not due‟ granted in anticipation of
earning it
 It is credited at the rate of 10 days of HPL for every half year on 1st of January & 1st
of July every year
 HPL not due is sanctioned on the condition that competent authority to sanction the
leave has reason to believe that the employee will return to duty on its expiry
 HPL not due granted to a permanent employee is limited to a maximum of 360 days
during his entire service
 Out of this, not more than 90 days can be granted at a time, not more than 180 days
in all shall be granted without medical certificate.

214
.

 An employee on HPL is entitled to a leave salary equal to half of what he would have
drawn if he were on earned leave

Full Pay Leave

 Full Pay Leave may be granted to an employee at the rate not exceeding half the
amount of HPL – due
 It may be granted in combination with Earned Leave
 On domestic grounds, FPL can be granted upto 120 days at a time provided that,
where it is combined with earned leave, the total period shall not exceed 180 days
 FPL Account will not be maintained separately, rather twice the amount of FPL granted
and availed will be debited against HPL Account
 IF an employeee granted with FPL Is terminated from service for the reason other than
superannuation, FPL granted and availed can be converted to HPL excess leave salary
recovered
 In case of death of an employee such conversion is not allowed
 Employee on FPL is entitled to a leave salary equal to that admissible if he were on
earned leave

Maternity Leave

 A female employee may be granted Maternity Leave for a period of 180 days
 She is eligible for a leave salary equal to the pay drawn immediately before proceeding
on such leave
 Sanction of Maternity Leave is subject to following Conditions:
o ML should not exceed a period of 180 days at one instance
o Application for leave should be supported by a Medical Certificate
 Grant of this leave is limited to first two living children only
 ML is not debited against the leave account
 It can be combined with any other kind of leave
 Extension of other leave should be limited to 60 days without production of Medical
Certificate
 Further extension of leave is permissible only in case of illness of Mother or the New
Born Child, only with production of Medical Certificate

Paternity Leave

 A Male employee with less than Two surviving children may be granted Paternity
Leave
 Paternity Leave may be granted for a period of 15 days during the confinement of his
wife
 He will be entitled to leave salary equal to the pay drawn immediately before
proceeding on leave
 It may not be normally refused
 Paternity leave cannot be en-cashed or merged with Earned Leave

215
.

Study Leave:

 With a view to meet the requirement of Foreign Trained personnel in the company
study leave may be granted to employees
 This is granted to undergo advanced studies or training Abroad
 Study leave is admissible only way employee has not enough EL and HPL at his
credit.
 For employees who has been granted scholarship by GOI, on Merit study leave may
be granted for the period excluding first six months which is treated as on deputation
 Study leave in combination with travel time and other kind of leave shall not exceed :
o 12 months - at one time save in exceptional circumstances
o 24 months - during the entire service
 When the study period short falls the period of leave sanctioned, the study leave shall
be deemed to have been reduced correspondingly.
 During study leave employee is entitled to a leave salary equal to that of HPL
 Study allowance payment towards essential apparatus books, TA fees etc. admissible
to employees on deputation on study leave.
 Employees who have put in service at least five years and are below 45 years of
age are eligible to study leave benefits.
 The age limit may be relaxed upto 48 years

Special Disability Leave

 It may be combined in any Special disability leave is sanctioned to an employee who

are disabled by injury while performing his official duties or illness consequent to his
official position
 Disability should have manifested within 3 months of the attributable cause
 Disability is certified by authorized by medical attendant
 Medical attendant certifies that the period of leave are its extension is absolutely
necessary
 The total period of leave in respect of single disability shall not exceed 24 months
 SDL may be granted for a second time if the disability recurs or gets aggravated at a
later date within 3 months.
 SDL can be clubbed with any kinds of leave.
 Periods of SDL will count as duty for the purpose of pension but not for leave
 SDL will not interrupt service and shall not be debited to leave account of the employee
 In case of workmen covered under workmens‟ compensation act applies salary
payable shall be reduced by the amount of compensation
 During SDL an employee shall draw leave salary equal to FPL during first 3 months or
for the period of hospitalisation, whichever is later and equal to HPL during the
remaining period

216
.

Extraordinary Leave

 Extraordinary Leave may be granted in circumstances when no other leave is at the

credit of the employee.
 It is also admissible when an employee applies for grant for such leave even when
other leave is admissible
 Maximum period of Ex. L granted on one accession shall not exceed:
o In case of permanent employees 5 years
o For temporary employees who have put in not less than one year service – 18
months
 Employees desirous of starting own industries may also avail this leave for a
continuous period of not exceeding 5 years
 If the employee does not return after availing Ex.L for the purpose of new industry his
service will automatically stand terminated
 Employees desiring to retire after 5 years should give a notice at least six months
before
 Employees is not entitled to any salary during this l eave
 He shall also loose the seniority in the cadre with reference to those who might be
promoted before he rejoins duty

Leave after the date of superannuation (Reg. 151)

 Leave after the date of superannuation shall be sanctioned und

 er following circumstances:
o Formally applied EL at the credit of the employee as leave preparatory to
retirement has been refused
o Ascertained in writing from the sanctioned authority that such leave if applied
for would not be granted
 Employee may be granted such leave after the date of retirement, the amount of EL so
refused subject to a maximum of 240 days
 Where earned leave applied for preparatory to retirement is refused only in part, that
part of the leave refused may be granted as Leave after the date of superannuation

Travelling Allowance

 TA should be so administered that it is not a source of income to the employee.

 It is paid to compensate the extra expenditure incurred by the employee while
undertaking journey in the interest of corporate service.
 TA should be drawn monthly soon after the close of the month to which the journey
relate.
 If the journey extends beyond any month TA bill in the prescribed format shall be
submitted to the extent the journey is completed on the last day of that month.
 Failure to comply with the above provision shall cause forfeiture of the claim
 Revival of the claim can be considered if competent authority condone the delay only
before 3 months of close of the month of journey.

217
.

 When the journey is performed beyond the jurisdiction order reference which
necessitated such journey should be quoted on the bill.
 All the TA bills should be countersigned.
 In case of Group A & B officers drawer of the bill shall be the controlling officer
otherwise the next higher officer shall be the controlling officer.

Duties of Controlling Officer

 scrutinize the bill in view of necessity, frequency and duration of journey and halts.
 He may disallow the whole or a portion of the TA claim
 The distance as entered in the bill should be verified with the actual claim.
 He is responsible for correctness of admitted TA claims
 A controlling officer can not delegate his duty of countersignature to his subordinates.

General Conditions

For the purpose of TA employees are classified into different categories based on the pay
drawn by them.
Category Pay range per month
I a) Rs.33,530/- & above
b) Rs.27,460 & above but bleow 33,530/-
II -
III -
IV -

 No revision of claims of TA is permissible in case of change in the pay of the employee

with retrospective effect or TA rate admissible
 TA is admissible only when the distance of journey exceeds eight kilometers.
 For journey within 8 KM actual amount spent by him may be reimbursed
 Prescribed route - for the purpose of TA a journey between two stations shall be
performed by the shortest two or more practicable routes or cheapest route.

Point at which journey commences or ends:

 For journey on transfer - journey shall begin or end at the actual residency of the
employee concern.
 For other journey it shall beat the duty point in that station
 Supplemental - In special circumstances company may by journal or special order
increase the rate of TA admissible to a particular employee or all the employees.
TA for journeys on Tour:

 When there is an option for the journey by Rail and Road, the TA can be accepted for
the travel involving less cost.
 Entitlement for Railway accommodation of employees for journeys on tour shall be
regulated as under

218
.

Category to which Entitlement

employee belongs
I I class/A.C.
Ia I class/A.C., Two Tier
Sleeper
II I class/ Two Tier Sleeper
III I class/A.C. Chair Car
IV II Class Sleeper

Daily Allowance

 DA is intended to cover the ordinary daily charges of an employee on tour

 It is admissible only when an employee reaches a point beyond 8 Kms. From the
prescribed point at his head quarters
 For computation of DA, total No. of hours spent outside the HQ commencing from time
at which employee leaves the Head quarters and time at which he
reaches back shall be reckoned and regulated as under:

(i) Not exceeding 6 hours No daily allowance

(ii) Exceeding 6 hours, but not exceeding Half daily allowance
12 hours
(iii) Exceeding 12 hours, but not exceeding Full daily allowance
24 hours
(iv) Exceeding 24 hours Full daily allowance for
every 24 hours and
part thereof regulated
as at (i) to (iii) above.

 Computation of DA on tour shall begin when on employee actually leaves his head
quarters and ends when he returns
 Company may by special or general order enhance the minimum rates of DA to
employees deputed for special duties
 In the normal course DA may not be drawn for more than 10 days at one stretch
 For halts exceeding 30 days full DA for first 30 days and the next 60 days half DA
shall be payable
 DA is not admissible for a halt within 8 Kms from HQ or with in the jurisdiction of an
Urban agglomeration of HQ
 Employees who avails CL for half a day shall draw only half DA
 Places where free boarding & lodging is provided the DA shall be restricted to 1/4th
portion instead of full
 If either boarding or lodging is provided freely then half DA is admissible

219
.

Rate of Daily Allowance:

Category Halts within the State Halts outside the State

Of the Places with
Employee Bangalore City Other Major Cities Other
Corporation Places Places
I 340 285 225 405 340
II 250 195 165 340 250
III 195 165 145 285 165
IV 135 130 115 195 135

Reimbursement of Halting Expenses:

Category Halts within the State

Of the Employee District Head Quarters Other Places
I 280 190
II 240 140
III 190 95
IV 140 65

Daily Allowance - Special rates on notified tariff i.e., officers halting in hotels
where both Boarding & Lodging providing or in registered firms providing daily
Special Allowances.
Category Halts within the State
Of the Employee Ahmedabad, outside the
Mumbai,Kolkatta,Delhi,Gaziabad,Hyderabad, state
Chennai,Kanpur,Mussori,Pune,shimla,Nagpur,Srinagar,
Goa, Diu&Daman
I 750 600
II 600 450
III 450 375
IV 330 300

Conveyance Allowance on Tour

 When an employee has large amount of traveling within short distance from the HQ for
which TA is not admissible, a monthly conveyance allowance may be granted under
special order
 This CA shall be paid in addition to TA admissible under this regulation

Traveling Allowance on Transfer

 On employee on transfer in the interest of corporate service is entitled to TA

 Transfer on one station to another within the jurisdiction of Urban agglomeration is not
treated as transfer
 For this purpose Family means

220
.

 Employee
 His wife or Husband
 Legitimate Children &
 Step Children
 Parents if residing with & wholly dependent on him
 Children seeking education in old station may join the parents at the later date for
which TA is admissible

Transfer Grant

[Link]. Category to which For transfer For transfer

Board employee within the outside the
belongs district district
1 I 3750 6000
2 II 3750 6000
3 III 1500 3000
4 IV 1500 3000

Allowance Admissible on Transfer

 An employee drawing pay of Rs.13,600/- or above is entitled to traveled by Air on
transfer
 An employee drawing pay of Rs.8550/- or above may undertake journey by own Car
or hired taxi and may claim single mileage at the rate of Rs.3/- per KM irrespective of
the No. o f the members of the family
 One fare for each of himself and his family shall be admissible for journeys by Bus or
Rail

Transportation of personal effects

 A Board employee drawing a pay of Rs.10,950/- or above may avail a whole railway
wagon
 When the charges for railway wagon exceeds maximum permissible quantity,
minimum railway charges for a wagon and road mileage for transportation between
residence and railway station shall be admissible.
 Maximum permissible quantity for employees is categorized as under
Category Kilograms
I 5000
II 3000
III 2000
IV 2000

 If other means are undertaken for transportation of personal effects, the amount
reimbursable may be limited to Goods Train Charges
 An employee shall be entitled to draw TA on transfer in accordance with his eligibility
without production of vouchers / Certificates
 An employee may at his own risk draw the actual cost of transportation provided that:
o Distance traveled exceeds 120KM

221
.

o The new post of joining requires conveyance from the view point of efficiency

Home Travel Concession

 An employee who has put in 1 year continuous service is entitled to HTC
 HTC may be extended once in a block period of two calendar years
 Employee shall avail this facility during a regular leave or CL
 When the Wife / Husband of the employee is also a Board Employee, only one of them
is entitled for this benefit
 It is not necessary that employee and his family should travel together for this purpose
 Block of two years commences form 1970 - 71, 1972 – 73 and so on
 Home Town should be located in jurisdiction of India
 Employee drawing a pay of Rs. 11300/- or above may travel by own car and claim
single mileage at Rs. 3.00 per KM by the shortest direct route
 Or First Class Railway fare for himself and the members of his family, which ever is
less

Calculation of Home Town

 The term Home means the permanent home town or village or such other place
declared by the employee
 Home Town shall be declared by the employee within six months of his entry into
service
 General Manager of the company, Financial Advisor & Chief Engineers may order for
alteration in the Home Town of the employee provided he is satisfied
 This alteration can be done only once in service
 Journey on HTC may at the option of the employee be combined with a journey on
transfer or tour
 Details of HTC availed shall be recorded in the „Service Register of Group B, C, D
employees and History of service with respect to Group „A‟ employees
 Journeys under HTC require previous sanction of Controlling Authority

Leave Travel Concession Scheme

 Under this scheme, an employee shall be eligible for Leave Travel Concession for
journey to any place in India
 The concession shall be admissible to an employee only Twice during the entire service
 This concession shall be admissible to an employee who has completed a continuous
service of not less than ten years
 The concession shall be admissible to an employee during EL, HPL, Commuted Leave
and vacation, the duration of which shall not be less than fifteen days
 An employee may utilize the concession for himself and members of his family
 The term „family‟ for this purpose means, employee, his / her spouse, legitimate
children not exceeding two, who are residing with nd are entirely dependent upon him.
 Only one wife is included in the term „family‟

222
.

 Where both husband and wife are employee of the company, the concession shall be
admissible to either one of them not both.
 The concession is available for places in India, which is connected by rail or public
transport system, at regular intervals and charging fixed rates.
 Note : Journey by air or y I class A/C by train or II class A/C II tier sleeper or by A.C.
shall not be the entitled mode of journey for the concession to any class of employees
 Journey by private car is not admissible
 No incidentals, and DA or any other extra allowance shall be payable as part of the
concession
 Intending employee shall submit application in the prescribed form
 The Controlling Officer shall be verified the records accord the sanction for availing
LTC
 Copy of the order sanctioning the concession shall be endorsed to the Internal Audit.
 Necessary entries in the service book / History of service shall be made without fail
 A separate register for sanctioning LTC including the details of advance drawn shall
be maintained
 An employee availing LTC is eligible for an advance against the expected claim
 An employee who has drawn the TA advance for LTC should undertake journey within
15 days
 Non refund of advance shall be recovered from the salary of the employee and he will
b e liable for disciplinary action.
 TA bill for claim of journey shall be submitted within one month from the date of
completion of the journey.

223
.

CHAPTER -16

Inspection of Cash book

CASH

BESCOM Money shall be received by authorised employee under proper receipt in prescribed
form and accounted for without delay

The private cash or account of the staff should not be mixed up with BESCOM cash or
account

BESCOM Money received shall be remitted to authorised Banks without delay

• The money received shall be credited to non-operative account.

• The Bank shall transfer the funds to the Central office of the Bank at Bangalore.
• By T.T. when the balance is Rs.25,000/- or more.
• By M.T. when the balance is less than Rs.25,000/-
• Weekly statement shall be furnished by the Bank.
• Monthly statement showing the Opening balance, debits & credits and closing balance
of the amount at the credit of BESCOM in the central office of the Bank.
• The amounts deposited to the non-operative account during the month should be
reconciled by cashier in charge.

Appropriation of receipts to expenditure is strictly prohibited.

BESCOM receipts normally shall be legal tender coins or currency notes issued by RBI only.

Cheques payable on demand including crossed cheques, cash orders, demand drafts drawn
on local banks may be accepted.

The officers who are authorised to collect money on behalf of the BESCOM should keep a
stock register of receipt books called register of blank receipt books.

Normally not more than one receipt book shall be operated.

Cheques drawn on local banks only shall be accepted and crossed.

All consumers cheque received shall be recorded in Cheque received Register.

If cheque dishonored the same shall be recorded in cheque dishonored register and credit
afforded shall be withdrawn in the consumer ledger, duly making entry in Cash book.

Further Cheques shall not be accepted from persons/consumers whose cheque is dishonored.

CUSTODY OF CASH

• BESCOM Money shall be kept in strong treasure chests which should be and secured
by two locks of different patterns.
• One set of key over lock shall be with Cash Officer and another set of key inner lock
with Cashier.

224
.

• The set of keys in possession of Cash officer should under no circumstances, be given
to the custody of the cashier or any other person.

Safe custody of DUPLICATE keys:

• In case of Section office one set of keys should be deposited in division office.
• A register should be maintained in all offices to serve as a record showing the disposal
of duplicate keys.

• The divisional officer / Accounts officer while inspecting the Section will take with
them the duplicate keys kept in their custody for annual examination and test with the
cash chests to which they pertains and make a record for having tested.

MOVEMENT REGISTER:

• Every office dealing with cash should maintain a Register in which employee in-charge
of cash will enter items as and when he hands over cheques, DDs and bills etc. for
encashment to an employee and obtain his signature.
• Before commencement of cash transactions each day, the cash in the chest must be
counted and recorded in a register, the cashier and cash office must sign in the
register.

Date C/B Date O/B Time of checking Signature of

Cashier Cash Officer

• Office shall maintain detailed accounting showing the cheques remitted – Register
Remittance by cheques
• On receipt of weekly advice of transfers to the central office, cashier should reconcile
the difference.
• A Register of dishonored cheques should be maintained, showing the details of
dishonored cheques and their subsequent disposal.
• Collection of Revenue by cheques & M.O, The consumers should be advised to cross
the cheques issued by them, uncrossed cheques received by post or personal delivery,
should be impressed with a rubber stamp crossing the cheques and making at “Not
negotiable”

225
.

• In case where currency notes, etc. are found enclosed in a letter received by post, a
note there of should be made immediately in the “Diary” and credit the amount into
cash account.

A register in the prescribed form should be maintained showing full particulars of money
orders received daily in the Office. Daily review and verification of these in the cash account
should be attended to in the same manner as in the case of cheques.

• The General Cash book shall be maintained in all offices.

• The General Cash book is the most important initial record of receipt and disbursement
of money passing through the hands of the officer and he is personally responsible for
his money which passes through his hands.
• Entries to be Concise and in the Order of occurrence.
• Lines not be left blank and interpolations to be avoided
• Balancing
• Rectification of errors
• Section offices should maintain the addition to General Cash book a separate Revenue
Cash Book in prescribed form for recording all receipts in detail and the daily total
receipts being entered as one item for the day in the General Cash Book with the
necessary classification of account heads in the remarks column.
• In case of receipts drawn by NCR/ Registrex Machines, the receipt rolls recorded by
machines will be carefully and neatly pasted to Revenue Cash Book.
• The cash officer is required to check all the entries in his cash book. He should see that
all receipts have been properly brought into account. He should put his signature
against the last entry in each page and the last entry of the day.
• The Cash book should be signed by Cash Officer at the end of the month and such
signature will be understood as fixing his responsibility for all the entries of the month
inclusive closing balance.

COUNTING OF CASH BALANCE

• The balance of cash should be counted by the officer in charge of cash at the close of
transaction every day and the details recorded in a denomination register.

• Surprise visits should be made by the officer in charge of cash two or three times a
month during office hours, the cash counted and the result recorded in the cash book.

• Shortage of Rs.100/- & Less:

If shortage of cash is found and if the amount of shortage is Rs. 100/- or less, the
official responsible of the shortages should be required to make good the amount. The
person responsible for shortage should be warned first time, if a second shortage is
noticed the fact should be reported to the Zonal Chief Engineer.

• If the shortage is above Rs.100/- the same should be recorded in the cash book and
the matter reported to the Zonal Chief Engineer, immediately person responsible for the
shortage being required to make good the amount at once.
• If on the other hand, any surplus cash is found the amount should be immediately
credited to deposits 56.965 – Misc. liabilities and the fact reported to Zonal Chief
Engineer.

226
.

IMPREST

• An imprest is a standing advance of a fixed sum of money to an officer to enable him

to make certain classes of disbursements.
• The Chief Engineer, SEE and EEE can sanction to the extent of powers delegated to
them.

LIMIT OF PAYMENT FROM IMPREST

• Advance of Pay and TA

• Telephone and Trunk call charges
• Railway Freights
• Lorry Taxes and premiums
• Postal Stamps and Revenue Stamps
• Inspection Fee
• Small purchases of local materials

RECOUPMENT OF IMPREST

• The expenditure incurred from imprest account should be recouped as often as if

necessary on a recoupment bill as soon as 40% of the imprest amount is spent and
invariably on the 25th of the month including transaction up to that date.

CHECKS TO BE EXCERCISED BY CASH OFFICER TO AVOID

MISAPPROPRIATION OF CASH

 Cash Officer should check the accounts as frequently as possible in order to see that
his/her subordinates do not commit FRAUD, MISAPPROPRIATION OR ANY
IRREGULARITY.
 He/She may be held personally responsible for any loss that may found due to neglect
of the duties laid upon him/her by the Regulations framed by Company.

REGISTERS MAINTAINED IN CASH SECTION

 General Cash Book

 Revenue Cash Book
 Denomination Register
 Register of Cheques Received
 Register of Cheques Remitted to Bank
 Register of Cheques dis-honored
 Register of Cash Remittance to Bank
 Register of Blank Receipt Books
 Register of Completed Receipt Books waiting for Audit
 Register of Duplicate keys
 Register of opening of Daily Cash
 Register of money orders received
 Till Register
 Movement Register

227
.

General Cash Book

RECEIPTS

Date Particulars Revenue Imprest Other Cash Total

Cash

1 2 3 4 5 6

REMITTANCE/PAYMENTS

Date Particulars Revenue Imprest Other Cash Total

Cash

7 8 9 10 11 12

DAILY CLOSIBNG OF CASH TRANSACTION

Particulars Receipts Remittance/Payments

Revenue Imprest Other Total Revenue Imprest Other Total
Cash Cash Cash Cash
Days Total xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Previous xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Total
Progressive xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
Total
Closing xxxx xxxx xxxx Xxxx
Balance
Signature of Cashier & Cash Officer:

Revenue Cash Book

 Register will be in unrulled blank Register

 Copy of Receipts passed is to be pasted
 Original and copies in duplicate of Cancelled Receipts is to be pasted
 Abstract is to be shown as follows:
Amount of Total Receipt Passed Rs. xxx
Amount of Total Cancelled Receipt Rs. xxx
Net Receipts: Rs. xxx
By Cash Rs. xxx
By Cheque Rs. xxx
 Ensure that the First Receipt drawn on each working day is in continuity with the last
receipt drawn on the previous working day

228
.

 Ensure that the totals on each page of hand receipt books and the amount brought
forward from page to page are correct in respect of all the hand receipt books used.

 Verify all cancelled receipts pertaining to Registrix machine and hand receipts and
ensure that all the three copies of the cancelled receipts of Registrix machine
are pasted in a book along with Z report and the cancelled receipt of hand
receipts are retained in the receipt book.

 Ensure that total collections made in cash & cheques are accounted correctly in the
Cash Book

 Check the totals struck in the register of cheques and ensure that the total for
the day as per the register tallies with the total amount of receipts by cheques
accounted in the cash book
 Ensure that the opening balance for the day agrees with the closing balance of
the previous working day (Un remitted revenue) as per the cash book
 Verify the arithmetical accuracy of the receipt side of the cash book
 Ensure correctness of remittances of cash to bank with reference to original
dated acknowledged bank Challan.

 Ensure correctness of remittance of cheques with reference to bank acknowledged

original challan / statement / register of cheques remitted
 Ensure that the amount written in words and figures in challan agrees
 Ensure that the figures of remittance of cash and cheque show in the cash book are
correct
 Check the total struck on the payment side of the cash book and ensure the
correctness of the balance arrived for the day in the cash book
 Verify the denomination register and ensure the correct of the opening balance,
revenue receipts and remittances shown in the Till register also ensure whether the
figures tally with the figures in the cash book

Till Register

1. For Receipt of Cash book

Balance at the end of the previous day Rs.

Add Receipts of Cash / Cheques during the day Rs.

Total Rs.
Less: Amounts deposited in Bank during the day Rs.
Balance at the end of the day Rs.
2. For expenditures of cash book:

Balance at the end of the previous day Rs.

Add: Amounts withdrawn from Bank during the day Rs.
Total Rs.

229
.

Less: Cash payments during the day Rs.

Balance at the end of the day Rs.
The balance will be tallied with the denomination register.

 Check the correctness of the

 denomination and total struck in the denomination register for the day
 Ensure the correctness of the un- remitted revenue in the form of cash and cheques
shown in the denomination register with reference to cash book
 Ensure whether the total amount of un-remitted cheques show in the register agrees
with the figure shown in the cash book and denomination register also physically
check the cheques on hand
 Ensure that un-remitted revenue for the day shown in the denomination register and
cash book agrees and is equal to Opening Balance + Total collection for the day – Total
remittance to Bank during the day

REGISTER OF MONEY ORDERS

 Ensure whether the details of the money orders received in the day has been
recorded in the register with the dated signature of the cashier. Ensure that the
counter foils of M.O. are pasted in the register & Receipt drawn for correct R.R. Nos.

REGISTER OF CHEQUE DIS-HONOURED

 Ensure that the date wise details of cheque dishonored are recorded in a register and
the total struck for the day in the register agree with the amount withdrawn in the
cash book
 Ensure whether all the cheque dishonored during the day have been withdrawn from
the cash book and also from the ledger accounts of the concerned RRNos.

BANK PASS SHEET

 Ensure that the bank pass sheet in original is obtained once in a week invariably,
since amount remitted can be manipulated in Xerox copies.
 Ensure that the date wise credits shown in the original bank pass sheets agree with
the figures shown in the bank challan and cash book
 Ensure that the remittances made are transferred to main account at Bangalore as
per the standing instructions and no huge balances are retained in the bank.

BANK RECONCILATON STATEMENT

Ensure that the opening balance for the month shown in the bank reconciliation statement
agrees with the Closing balance of the previous month – as per Bank pass sheet.

230
.

CHAPTER -17

DSM
Demand Side Management

What is Demand Side Management?

using high efficiency equipment and efficient use of electricity through good operating
practice.
Demand Side Management is a set of initiatives partnered between
the utility and the customer with benefits to both.
With increase in electricity consumption, the rational use of
electricity both on the demand and supply sides is a must to avoid shortfall.
DSM calls for adoption of energy conservation since electricity
saved is better than electricity generated or purchased.

Consumption details of Incandescent bulb and CFL

Type of lamp Incandescent Bulb CFL

Typical wattage 60 11

Daily Usage, hours 4 hours/day 4 hours/day

Monthly Electricity 7.2 units 3.2 units

Consumed
Monthly electricity bill** Rs.21 Rs.4

Monthly you save** -- Rs.17

Annually you save -- Rs.204

Lifespan 1000 hours 6000-8000 hours

ENERGY EFFICIENCY INTIATIVES

BELP – Program Overview
 Program design support by International Institute for Energy Conservation (IIEC) under
funding from United States Agency for International Development (ECO II initiative)
 Collaboration with the Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE)

231
.

BELP – Program Overview

 Key Elements
 Lighting Technologies
• Promotes Compact Fluorescent Lamps (CFLs)
 Program Area and Scope
• Demonstration project initially implemented in Bangalore Urban District
• Program open to LT-1 and LT-2 Customers (Domestic only)
• Eligible customers = 1.3 Million (Latest: 2.7 M)
 Lighting Suppliers
• Reputed lighting suppliers selected through tender
• Philips
• Osram
• Asian Electronics
 CFL Purchase Options
• Direct Purchase
• CFLs were offered at discounted prices for outright purchase
• Installment Scheme
• Payment in 9 monthly installments through BESCOM electricity bills
 Other Features
• CFLs distributed through approved retail stores
• CFLs purchased had a minimum warranty of 1 year
• BESCOM collected payments and passed it on to lamp suppliers monthly
• Unique tamper-proof hologram used to protect suppliers‟ interests

BELP
CFL Prices

 Direct sales
 Average Price ~ Rs 125
• Approx 15% below current retail price (Rs 150)
 Installment Scheme
 Average Price ~ Rs 135
 12-months warranty in both cases

232
.

Program Benefits
 Monthly Savings
 CFLs
• Average Saving per CFL = Rs 17
• Average installment = Rs 15
• Customers pay from their savings
Supporting Activities
 Customer education
 Leaflets describing right application for right areas
 Road Shows
 At selected Sub-Divisions
 Suppliers set-up stalls at the sub-divisions

Program Marketing
 Program leaflets distributed by meter readers
 Posters in BESCOM offices and payment centers
 Posters in approved Retail Stores
 Car stickers
 Road shows

Monitoring & Evaluation Results

 Monitoring and evaluation jointly carried out by IIEC, BESCOM, Central Electricity
Authority and the Bureau of Energy Efficiency
 Encouraging results supported replication of the program in India

Monitoring and Evaluation Results

 Sales over the last year – same period increased by at least 70% year-on-year
 Progress was encouraging
 Total sales under BELP till October 2005 ~ 431,000 compared to 250,000 last year
 Non-participating suppliers‟ sales has also shown an increase

Monitoring & Evaluation Results

Program phases Load Units saved

(No. of CFLs) reductionMW annually MU

Pilot stage (~175,000/430,000) : 10.4/25.7 15.3/37.50

Bangalore-wide potential : 117 210

(~2.6 Million)

BESCOM-wide Potential : 257 460

(~5.7 Million)

State-wide Potential : 585 1050

(~13 Million)

233
.

Bachat Lamp Yojana (BLY)

• Bachat Lamp Yojana, a scheme to promote CFLs in place of
incandescent lamps under CDM project announced by
MoP, GoI.

• Maximum of 4 CFLs per customer to be distributed. Each

CFL to be distributed at a cost of `.15/-.

• The difference amount of CFL cost to be obtained by the

implementing agency through CDM in the form of trading CERs.

• Tenders were invited for implementation of BLY scheme in 4

rural O&M circles covering seven rural districts.

• Only one implementing agency M/s. HPL Electric & Power

Pvt. Ltd. was qualified. Two rural Circles namely Bangalore
Rural and Kolar covering 4 districts are awarded to M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd.
Letter of Intent has been issued on 22nd May 2010. Re-tendered for other two O&M circles
namely Tumkur and Davanagere. M/s Banyan Environmental Innovations [Link]. has been
entrusted to these two circles. Later it was withdrawn as the firm did not comply with the
contractual requirements. We are planning to float a fresh tender in this regard.

• M/s. HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd. has agreed to part 9% CERs
with BESCOM as and when they receive during the project period.

• BESCOM is also planning to entrust Bachat Lamp Yojana scheme

in Bangalore City to M/s. Energy Efficiency Services Limited, a joint
venture company of Public Sector Undertakings of Ministry of
Power, Government of India.

BEIPP
• Promotion of Energy Efficient pump sets in agriculture
through BEIPP.
• Innovative BEIPP scheme supported by International Copper
Promotion Council (India) (ICPCI) and launched.
• The official suppliers were(selected through tender)
• M/s Kirloskar Brothers Ltd
• M/s KSB Pumps Ltd
• M/s Crompton Greaves Ltd
• 1074 Energy Efficient IP Sets were sold under the scheme.

Agriculture Demand Side Management, WENEXA-USAID

 M/s ENZEN Global Solutions, an ESCO is engaged for replacement of existing IP sets
in Doddaballapura on four 11 KV HVDS feeders under USAID - WENEXA. This ESCO

234
.

Agriculture Demand Side Management model was designed by us in association with

USAID-PA Consulting.
 About 604 IP sets existed.
 Agricultural DSM being implemented on these four 11 kV HVDS feeders.
 Replacement of existing IP sets by Energy Efficient IP sets.
 Baseline data being established through M/s ERDA, Baroda.
 Baseline data process under way – calibration of meters completed.

Agriculture Demand Side Management, WENEXA-USAID

 ESCO quoted 46.67% Energy saving parting 24.8 % of the
guaranteed savings to BESCOM.
 BESCOM is able to successfully establish a system of appointing ESCO and has been
awarded with “National Power Award-2009” under category “ENERGY EFFICIENCY,
CONSERVATION AND DEMAND SIDE MANAGEMENT” for Agriculture Demand Side
Management initiative.
 This pilot is the first of its kind in India to undertake Agriculture Demand Side
Management under ESCO model.

Agriculture Demand Side Management, WENEXA-USAID

Scalability:

Savings Pilot project State level National –

(per year based on 2008) (BESCOM) BESCOM (Karnataka) level
(India)

Energy savings (in MU) 3.27 1845 3386 31225

:
Cost savings (in Rs. Crores) 0.86 512.5 1016 9368
:
Capacity savings (in MW) 1.4 1501 4114 34768
:

Lifestyle change approach to Best Energy Conservation Practices- a pilot by M/s CSD

A pilot entrusted to M/s CSD:

• Centre for Sustainable Development (CSD), a non
profit NGO.
• To bring in awareness on use of Energy Efficient
bulbs and appliances among commercial and
domestic customers.
• Area selected - Brigade Road, M.G. Road,
Cambridge layout and Residency road.
• About 1601 customers participated.

235
.

OBJECTIVE:

 To document and study electricity consumption

behavior of commercial and domestic customers.
 To monitor Energy consumption using energy
conservation strategies and methods.
 To influence customers to change their life style for
energy conservation and energy saving.
 M/s CSD have submitted the final report and the results are encouraging
which indicate a saving of an average 8-10% of energy by all
participating customers in this scheme.
• First of its kind in India conducted by a public utility
using an NGO.
NIRANTHARA JYOTHI SCHEME
 Segregation of Non - Agricultural loads and Agricultural loads in Rural areas
 This will enable BESCOM to give 24x7 supply to Non-Agricultural loads in Rural areas
 Reduction in transformer failure
 Increase in metered sales
 Reduction in technical losses
 Improved load management
NIRANTHARA JYOTHI SCHEME

Details I Phase II Phase

No. of Talukas covered 70 56
:
No. of Villages covered 12689 10297
:
Cost in Rs. Crores 1203 920
:
ESCOM Taluk Feeder Taluk Feeder
(No.s) (No.s) (No.s) (No.s)
BESCOM 20 292 20 248
:
HESCOM 20 247 14 183
:
GESCOM 20 227 08 76
:
CESC 10 161 14 180
:
Total 70 927 56 687

Completion Dates March 2011 2011 - 12

Names of 20 Talukas where Niranthara Jyothi being under taken in BESCOM in

I Phase at a cost of Rs.382 Crores.

236
.

 Anekal  Tumkur  Sira  Jagalur

 Devanahalli  Tiptur  Bagepalli  Harappanahalli
 Hosakote  Gubbi  Sidlaghatta  Honnali
 Kanakapur  Kunigal  Hosadurga  Harihar
 Magadi  Madhugiri  Chennagiri  Hiriyur

NIRANTHARA JYOTHI SCHEME

• A Pilot was undertaken at Rs. 18 Crores - Malur Sub-division.

• Results Reveal;
Particulars Before After NJ
NJ
Improvement 150V 218 V
in voltage
(single phase)
:
Reduction in 1.37% 0.8%
Distribution
Transformer :
failure rate
Reduction in 20.70% 17.32%
Technical
losses
:
Increase in 91180 100342 units
billed energy Units
& Demand
:
(by 10%)
Reduction in 85 Nos. 22 no.s
interruptions
(by 74%)
:
Reduction in 213.7 6.45 hrs.
interruption Hrs
period (by
97%) :
• On completion of Niranthara Jyothi works, will be a boon to
develop rural economy.

237
.

Smart Grid – A Pilot

• Smart Grid: “A Smart Grid delivers electricity from suppliers to customers using
digital technology to save energy, reduce cost and increase reliability.”

 BESCOM has distinction of leading the Indian Power sector by setting examples
; (Pilots)
 Energy Efficient lighting system (BELP)
 Agriculture DSM on ESCO model

 Identified the following 5 sites for study to findout suitability of them for pilot
Smart Grid project.
 Electronic City
 EPIP White Field
 Peenya Industrial Area
 MG Road/Brigade Road
 Rajajinagar Industrial Area

• After study, National consultant( CPRI) has selected Electronic city for pilot.

Smart Grid – A Pilot

• One day workshop conducted on 5th January 2010 on “Smart Grid” to take
inputs from key stake holders.

• Key stake holders like Ministry of Power, Government of India, Government of

Karnataka, USAID, Private Sector Vendors and Service providers attended the
workshop.

• USAID is providing technical assistance in the form of

Consultant.

• They have appointed M/s CPRI as the Local Consultant.

• USTDA is providing technical assistance in the form of Internal Consultant.

Smart Grid – A Pilot

• A proposal has been sent to Ministry of Power, Government of India seeking
financial assistance.

• Government of India has responded positively and proposal is being processed.

• Many private sector vendors/service providers have also expressed desire to

partner the pilot apart from USAID.

• Pilot project is going to be on “Public Private Partnership” model.

238
.

• Bangalore is best to test the Smart Grid technology in India as plat form being
created through implementation of SCADA in Transmission by KPTCL and DAS
in 11kV system by BESCOM.

• Smart Grid pilot is going to be first of its kind in India.

Involvement of Various Agencies

Involvement of BBMP:-

BBMP was requested to reduce energy consumption in street lights, hoardings and
parks etc.
 To switch ON the street lights just at the dusk i.e. 6.30 pm and switch OFF just before
the sunrise i.e. by 5.30 am.
 To switch OFF lights (except for security lighting) in parks and gardens immediately
after exit of public in the evenings i.e. by 8.00 pm.
 To take action for reduction of 50% of power in respect of hoardings, boards and
advertising illuminations.
 Make provision for dimmers, for street lights and put them on 3 phases in such a
manner that alternative street lights are ON in different phases with a facility to switch
off the lights whenever required.
 To switch off 1/3rd of the street lights on high masts after 10.00pm.

Involvement of Hoardings and Advertising Agencies:

 To Switch OFF illumination on hoardings not given to the clients.

 Switch OFF illumination after 10.00 pm.
 Reduce 1/3rd of the illumination.
 To use LEDs for illumination.

Involvement of Commercial Establishments:

 To reduce lighting illumination by 25%.

 Non usage of more decorative lights.
 To reduce Air conditioning.
 Stoppage of downward escalators.
 To reduce hoarding lights.
 To reduce lights in car parking area and passage area.

Implementation of Government Of Karnataka policy on Solar Water Heating System

• Government orders being implemented
• Mandatory to install water heating system for new electric connection (on 1200 Sq. Ft
and above Sites)
• A strong mechanism placed in position for systematic monitoring.
• Massive promotion program undertaken with the help of meter readers and linemen.
• No. of Solar Water Heating Systems installed during:

239
.

2008-09 : 6187
2009-10 : 47218
2010-11(April to Dec-10) : 39933

• Total number of Solar Water Heating Systems existing are 1,95,565 with 14,66,738
[Link] of solar area.

VIDHYUTH JAGRUTHI YOJANE

• “Vidhyuth Jagruthi Yojane” an awareness program introduced for Higher Primary &
High school children to bring in awareness among the children who in-turn
communicate this in their families.

• A booklet with information of Electricity Generation, Transmission, Distribution,

Regulators and Energy Conservation methods was distributed among the children.

• An objective and pick and speak test were conducted after a week and cash prizes
awarded for the top three students in both the test.
For Objective type test:
I prize :Rs. 700/-
II prize :Rs. 300/-
III prize :Rs. 200/-

For Pick and speak test:

I prize :Rs. 300/-
II prize :Rs. 200/-
III prize :Rs. 100/-

Bureau of Energy Efficiency

• Established in 2002, under the Energy Conservation Act, 2001. Improve energy
efficiency through various regulatory and promotional instruments
 Plan, manage and implement provisions the EC Act
 Appliance standards and labeling
 Industrial energy benchmarks
 Energy Conservation Building Codes
 Monitor energy use in high energy‐ consumption units
 Certify and accredit energy auditors and energy managers

 Provide a policy framework and direction to national energy conservation activities

 Disseminate information and knowledge, and facilitate pilot and demonstration
projects
 Establish EE delivery systems through Public ‐ Private Partnerships (PPP).

240
.

About Standards & Labeling Programme

Energy Conservation Act, 2001:

• Act empowers Bureau and Central Government to specify Energy Consumption
Standards.
• Prohibit manufacture or sale or import of equipments and appliances that do not meet
standards.
• Require display of Energy performance labels on equipments and appliances.

About Standards & Labeling Programme

• The Objectives of Standards &Labeling Program is to provide the
consumer an informed choice about the energy saving ,and thereby the
cost saving potential of the marketed household and other equipment.
This is expected to impact the energy savings in the medium and long run
while at the same time it will position domestic industry to compete in
such markets where norms for energy efficiency are mandatory.

• The scheme was launched by the Hon'ble Minister of Power in May,2006

and is currently invoked for equipments/appliances:
- Frost Free Refrigerator
- TFL
- Room Air Conditioners
- Direct Cool Refrigerator
- Distribution Transformer
- General Purpose Industrial Motors
- Monoset Pumps
- Openwell Pump Sets
- Submersible Pump Sets
- Ceiling Fans
- Domestic Gas Stoves
- Stationary Storage Type Water Heaters
- Color Televisions

About Standards & Labeling Programme

Future ‐ Equipments / appliances for S&L Programme

Home Appliances:
- Washing Machines
- Electronic Ballast
- Computer Monitors
- Kerosene Stoves
- Consumer Electronics

241
.

Industrial Equipments:
- Industrial Fans & Blowers
- Diesel Generating sets
- Boilers
- Compressors

Other Appliances:
- Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)
- External Power Supplies (EPS)
- Battery Chargers (BCs)
- Standby Power equipments

Refrigerator &AC Systems:

- Adaptive Defrost
- Commercial Freezers
- Visi Coolers
- Chocolate Coolers
- Chest Coolers
- Heat Pumps
- Multi Split Systems

Awareness Program
• Six agencies participated in the DSM(K) centre. Several
stake holders visited.
- Representatives from NGOs : 547
- College / School students : 1716
- Employee Trainee : 2232
Total : 4495

• Coordinated with M/s. KREDL for promotion of various Energy

Efficient / DSM methods in the State.

- Through Working Group on Energy Conservation.
- National Energy Conservation Day observed.
- Pilot Solar Street lighting initiated.

• Earth Hour observed on 27.03.2010 by all the employees of

BESCOM in offices and their residences. Public were also
requested to participate. This resulted in a saving of 53-55 MWs in
peak demand during Earth Hour in Bangalore City.

• A Workshop on DSM measures conducted through M/s ISLE.

242
.

Awareness Program
• Awareness brought in on :
 Necessity of energy saving and energy conservation.
 Benefit of using energy efficient appliances
 Use of CFLs/ LEDs
 Use of Solar Water Heaters.
 Do‟s and Don‟ts
 Climate change – reduction of Carbon print.
• Communication Modes Utilized:

 Advertisements in Newspapers, Magazines, Souvenir etc.

 Jingles in Doordarshan, AIR, Big FM etc.
 Posters, Pamphlets, Brochures, Car Stickers etc.
 Street plays in 400 villages across BESCOM.
 20 Minute documentary film developed and displayed in Rural areas through
Department of Information, GOK.
 Janasamparka sabhas.
 Interaction meetings etc.

Restructured Accelerated Power Development and Reforms Programme(R-APDRP)

 R-APDRP is a flagship distribution strengthening programme of Government of India.

 Aims at reducing the overall Aggregate Technical and Commercial (AT&C) losses of
distribution companies.
 The Project area comprises of Towns having population more than 30,000
 The Scheme is taken in two parts:
• Part-A shall include the projects for establishment of baseline data and IT applications
for energy accounting/auditing & IT based consumer service centres. It consists of 100
towns and project cost is Rs. 469.60 Crores.
• Part-B shall include distribution strengthening projects. It consists of 88 towns and
project cost is Rs. 800 Crores.

Objectives:-

► To reduce AT&C Losses of selected towns to less than 15% over

a period of 5 years
► To reduce annually overall AT&C losses of ESCOMs :-
► By 3% if the existing AT & C Losses are more than 30%
► By 1.5 % if the existing AT & C Losses are less than 30%

 PART ‘A’ COVERS:-

• IT initiatives to convert ESCOMs into a modern dynamic entity which uses IT for
detection of thefts through auditing, reduction of operational losses by properly
monitoring the assets. Customer relationship management through computerization
and improvement in billing efficiency.

243
.

• M/s Reliance Infrastructure Limited (RIL) were appointed as Common IT Consultant

(ITC) for all ESCOMs on 29-06-2009 at a cost of Rs 2.5 Crores.
• M/s Infosys Technologies Ltd (L1 bidder) have been appointed as the IT Implementing
Agency at a cost of Rs.386.68 Crores.
• Government will provide 100% Loan for part A of the R-APDRP schemes. The entire
amount shall be converted into grant after establishment of the required Base-Line
data system within a stipulated time frame and duly verified by TPIEA.

 PART ‘B’ COVERS:-

Projects under Part-B are the regular distribution strengthening projects
which include:

• Renovation & Modernization of 11KV s/s, DTRs/DTCs

• Re-conductoring of lines 11KV & below
• Feeder separation
• Load Balancing
• Replacement of Meters etc

• GoI will provide up to 25% Loan for Part B of the R-APDRP schemes which shall
include regular distribution strengthening projects. The balance 75% shall be sourced
from Financial Institutions.

• Up to 50% loan for Part-B projects shall be converted into grant in five equal trenches
on achieving 15% AT&C loss in the project area on a sustainable basis for a period of
five years and the project is completed within the time schedule fixed by the steering
committee which shall, is no case exceed five years from the date of project approval.

• If the utility fails to achieve or sustain the 15% AT&C loss target in a particular year,
that year‟s trench of conversion of loan to grant will be reduced in proportion to the
shortfall in achieving 15% AT&C loss target from the starting AT&C loss target from
the starting baseline assessed figures.

• The project areas identified will achieve a sustainable less than 15% AT & C
loss after completion of the project.

244
.

CHAPTER-18
Procurement contracts and CVC Guidelines in Procurement
Contracts

Procurement contracts
Purchasing means the process of buying – learning a need, selecting a supplier, negotiation a
price and fixing terms for delivery and payment. Procurement is a generic term,much broader
than purchasing, which includes purchasing and all additional functions connected with the
acquisition of goods, such as inspection upon arrival, supervision, and inventory control and
salvage operation. However purchasing management‟s role as sub funct ion of materials
management is important, since it is the responsibility of purchasing department to procure
materials economically and efficiently.

Five basic principles of purchasing

There are five basic principles of purchasing buying materials in right quantity of right quality
at right price, from a right source, at right time and place.
1. Right quality vis-à-vis inspection/quality control/specification and standardization
2. Right quantity vis-à-vis inventory control/store and physical up keep/distribution and
warehousing
3. Right price vis-à-vis market analysis and market intelligence/forecasting and market
research
4. Right source vis-à-vis sub-contracting/vendor relations/vendor développent
5. Right time and place vis-a-vis production, store/traffic and transportation/materials
handling.

Inventories
Inventories are stock of materials of any kind stored for future use. Inventories tend to
become big without proper control. Inventories are materials or resources of any kind having
some economic value, either awaiting conversion or use in future.

There is need to maintain some safety or buffer stock in order to maintain the smooth
flow of materials without imparting production.
As more and more stocks of materials are held, this entails grater investment. If
minimum inventory is held with the increase in frequency of buying the cost of ordering and
processing increase. Also this cost of stock-out poses economic problem. This inventory
control is a major material management function which requires the reduction in material cost
without impairing operational efficiency and there for needs careful attention.

245
.

VENDOR DEVELOPMENT
In stores and materials organization, it is essential to have many sources of supplies so that
supplies may be had as per requirement as well as at economic cost. From commercial view-
point it is always preferable to have more than one supplier for a particular item. Vendor
development is, however, a continuous process and may start from the collection of names
and address from the DGS&D Trade journals and also form other trade direction, such as
directory or SS industries etc.

COMPETITIVE BIDDING
Purchaser must not only buy the right material, in the right quantity, at the right time but
also at the right evaluated prices. There must be a primary force requiring broad knowledge
of the requirements, operation and their use and awareness of where new ideas are needed.
The urge shall be to find a better way to buy and a better source of supply and continuous
coordinated buying efforts to improve the purchase of services as related to the works.

Functions of purchase are:

1. Standardisation of specifications
2. Market study and cost analysis
3. Maintaining catalogue library
4. Vendor registration
5. Calling for bids
6. Analysis of bids
7. Negotiations where required
8. Selection of suppliers
9. Entering into contract
10. Follow up actions

The central vigilance commission issues guidelines for procurement of materials for the
government organisations.

A codified purchase manual containing detailed purchase procedure, guidelines and

also proper delegation of powers, wherever required, needs to be made by all the
organisations so that there is a system and uniform approach in decision making. Such an
integrated approach is likely to put a cap on the corruption and would also ensure smoother
and faster decision making.

Procurement files are very important and sensitive documents and thus there is a need
to have a single file system with proper page numbering. The decisions and deliberations of
the individuals or the tender committee also need to be properly recorded and well
documented.

Provisioning of the stores needs to be done with utmost care taking into account the
available stock, outstanding dues/supplies, past consumption, average life of the available
equipment/spares. The requirements also need to be properly clubbed so as to get the most

246
.

competitive and best prices. Requirements should not intentionally be split so as to avoid
approval from higher authorities.

One time purchase for projects or capital equipments / spares should have proper
justification depending on the actual requirements, usage, rate of return etc. Further the
obsolescence factor should also be taken into account i.e., the equipment to be purchased
should confirm to the latest specifications and technologies available in the market.

Estimated Rates

As the estimated rates is a vital element in establishing the reasonableness of prices,

it is important that the same is worked out in a realistic and objective manner on the basis of
prevailing market rates, last purchase prices, economic indices for the raw materials/labour,
other input costs, wherever applicable and assessment based on intrinsic value etc.
The below mentioned methods may be adopted for the purpose of procurement of
materials based on the nature of materials to be procured, the value of purchase, urgency for
the materials and the number of known sources of supply.

OPEN COMPETITIVE BIDDING

For ordering in bulk, with deliveries spread over a long period of time, a brief advert
isement of “notice invit ing bids (nib)” is to be issued in the leading news papers covering
English and other local languages, giving details of materials to be procured and the dates of
opening of bids, for the items covered in the NIB. Full details of the bid specifications are to
be made available on the web address of the purchaser. Interested bidders will download
the required information and submit their bids as per the NIB.

Procurement of materials from registered vendors shall be treated as procurement by

open bids since vendor registration is open to all and all the eligible vendors are free to
participate in the bid.

In case of items for which there is no registered vendors or for major works involving
supply and erection, the purchasing authority may invite bids through proper advertisement
with the prior approval of the competent authority. In all such cases, open bidding may be
resorted to, by advertising in the dailies having wide circulation both within and outside the
state.

Sufficient time must be given, counted from the date of publication of nib, for the
bidders to submit their bids.

The bids should have sufficient validity time to enable the purchaser to evaluate the
bids properly.

There must be a minimum of atleast 3 valid bids to finalize the purchase. In case of
insufficient response, the bids have to be called once again, ensuring wider publicity. If even

247
.

then the response is poor, the bid may be decided on the basis of bids received but with the
prior approval of the competent authority, taking into account rates from earlier orders, duly
taking into account updated rates.

LIMITED COMPETITIVE BIDDING

This is a method of purchase resorted to when the materials are needed urgently and
at short notices. In this mode, the bid invitation and complete specification will be sent by the
purchaser to a limited number of vendors, who are regular suppliers of the materials. Such
vendors are to be selected from out of the registered vendors. These vendors should have
proven past performance, delivery and quality.

In this case the competent authority decides the number of vendors to be addressed
and bids from only those vendors who received the enquiry are eligible to quote. Value of
materials to be procured in such an event shall be small, and subject to delegation of powers
only.

A minimum of 15 days time is to be given for limited competitive bidding process.

Proper justification for procuring materials under this procedure should be recorded by the
purchasing authority and such procurement shall be resorted to only for emergency
requirements.

Validity of bids under this procedure is only 30 days, counted from the date of opening
of bids because the very purpose is emergency purchase.

Limited competitive bidding should be for the entire quantity indented and no split up
shall be made.

When only one quotation is received against competitive bidding this should be treated
as a single bid and should be decided as per the powers under “single bid” system.

SHORT NOTICE BIDDING:

When materials required are for immediate use, short notice bidding is resorted
to,subject to the delegation of powers. In this case, the complete description and standards
applicable are spelt out in enquiry letter itself to be sent to the vendors. No separate
specification need be issued. Generally, time frame of about one week to ten days is given
for the vendors to respond, keeping validity of thirty days from the day of opening of bids.

PURCHASE THROUGH SINGLE BID SYSTEM:

Items of proprietary nature are purchased through single bid process. These are
generally spares etc. These are to be directly procured either from the original manufacturer
or the subassembly manufacturer or one of the dealers approved by the original
manufacturer. These purchases are also subject to the provisions of delegation of powers
and proper recording of reasons for purchase under the system.

248
.

RATE CONTRACT ITEMS:

For such of those items which need to be procured regularly and repeatedly and items
of proprietary nature, it may be advantageous to enter into a rate contract with the
manufacturer. Rate contract shall be entered only with reliable and reputed manufacturers of
proven performance and ability. Term of rate contract shall be for a period of one year. The
rate contract enquiries may be through open/limited/single bid process depending on the
nature of item.

PURCHASE BY REPEAT ORDERS:

Repeat orders may be considered under special circumstances as and when need is
urgent. The procedure enables to cut down lead time of procurement. Repeat orders may be
considered.

1. Quantity in repeat orders should not exceed 50% of quantity ordered in the original order.

2. Rate in the repeat order should be the same as in the original order – make sure that
prices have not gone down.

3. Repeat orders are permitted only once against an order placed and within six months
from the date of completion of execution of the original order.

4. Reasons for going for repeat orders to be recorded by the competent authority.

5. The authority who is empowered to make the purchase is the authority for approving the
repeat order.

6. Repeat order shall be placed when the market is in an up-trend.

Generally a Notice Inviting Bids is issued which contains:

1. The authority authorized to issue the bid documents and the last date for sale of the bid
specifications.
2. The authority authorized to receive the completed bid documents. The last date and time
upto which completed documents would be received.
3. Place, time and date of opening the bid.
4. Cost of bid documents and cost of the documents.
5. Amount of bid security and mode of payment.

Other general conditions are covered in the specification.

Specific mention should be made about price variation formulae, fee. requirement, f.e.
variation risk cover, delivery schedules etc. Preference is for prices in rupees. In case of
foreign bids exchange variation to be clearly mentioned by the bidder. Purchaser has to
clearly indicate quantities. Bidder to submit documents establishing their eligibility criteria
and also qualification criteria. Bidder should ensure that there are no ambiguities.

249
.

In case of competitive bidding documents to contain:

1. Detailed technical specifications and drawings
2. Qualification requirements
3. General terms and conditions of contract
4. Salient features of contract, if any
5. Schedule of quantities
6. Schedule of deliveries
7. Bank guarantee towards bid security and performance guarantee
8. Deviations taken by the bidder, if any.

1. In certain cases, where, only written specifications may not clarify the situation, the
purchaser may hold a pre-bid meeting with the intending bidders and clarify all points to all
the bidders at one place and time. It is also possible that the bidders may supplement latest
technical developments that may be considered, if found advantageous to the purchaser.
2. Discussions during the pre-bid meeting should be copied to all the bidders. All written
questions from bidders should be replied in writing by the purchaser. Bid opening group of
officers shall include one Accounts officer also.

All the officers present should sign in the bid opening register wherein the number of
bids received and the number of bids opened and the number of bids rejected (reasons for
rejection shall be recorded) and they shall sign on all pages of the original bid document.
This is done in the presence of the bidders present for bid opening.

Bids are evaluated in a prescribed proforma following all rules. Each organisation would
have developed their own proforma depending on the long experience. After evaluation of
bids, negotiations might be held with the lowest bidder to explore possibility of further
reduction in prices.

As per government practice, generally, the lowest bidder will get the order.

Considering other than the lowest bidder (l 1) would be limited to the below mentioned
cases:

1. When it is definitely felt that L1 cannot supply the total quantity in the time frame
specified.
2. When it is clearly felt that it is undesirable, in view of the critical nature of items to be
procured, to depend on one supplier.
3. When the local manacturer need to be given an opportunity to match the rate quoted by
L1.
4. Considering other than L 1 shall be limited to two or three bidders only, say upto 4.
5. In case of negotiations L 1 should get atleast 25% of the quantity to be ordered.
a) Prior to expiration of bid validity, the purchaser should notify the successful bidder,
in writing, that their bid has been accepted. This notification of award will constitute the
information of contract. Upon the successful bidder furnishing the performance security, the
purchaser enters into the contract.

250
.

b) The purchaser will also promptly notify each unsuccessful bidder and discharge the bid
security of all of them.

CVC Guidelines in Procurement Contracts

CVC Guidelines For Improvement In The Procurement System And Common Irregularities/
Lapses Observed In Stores / Purchase Contracts:

PURCHASE MANUAL
The cardinal principle of any public buying is to procure the materials / services of the
„specified‟ qualit y, at the most compet it ive prices and, in a fair, just and transparent
manner. To achieve this end it is essential to have uniform and well documented policy
guidelines in the organization so that this vital activity is executed in a well-coordinated
manner with least time and cost over runs. In some of the organizations, the purchase
manual is either not at all there or has not been updated for years together. Thus the system
of procurement is quite adhoc and arbitrary.

A codified purchase manual containing the detailed purchase procedures, guidelines

and also proper delegation of powers, wherever required needs to be made by all the
organizations so that there is systematic and uniform approach in the decision-making. Such
an integrated approach is likely to put a cap on the corruption and would also ensure
smoother and faster decision making.

PROVISIONING
It has been noticed that in certain cases excessive, fraudulent and in fructuous
purchases were made without taking into consideration the important aspects like available
stocks, outstanding dues / supplies, past consumption pattern and average life of the
equipments / items etc. These excessive / infructuous purchases were at times made in
collusion with the firms. This resulted in not only the material lying unutilized for years
together with no residual life but also a lot of extra expenditure was incurred on the inventory
carrying cost. One of the organizations took double procurement action for purchase of tyres
against the same liability. Even the factors like shelf life of 5 years and the past consumption
pattern were ignored while placing the orders. As no action was taken to dispose off the
surplus tyres, the department is incurring inventory carrying cost of about 20-25% per year
for the last 10 years and the salvagevalue of the quantit y held in stocks is likely to be „Nil‟
due to expiry of the shelf life. In fewcases, it was noticed that though the demand for the
stores was simultaneously received fromdifferent wings / field units but, they were not
clubbed together and were rather processedindividually against the established principle of
bulk buying.

The provisioning of the stores needs to be done with utmost care taking into account
theavailable stock, outstanding dues / supplies, the past consumption pattern, average life of
theequipment / spares. The requirements also need to be properly clubbed so as to get the
mostcompetitive and best prices. The requirements should not be intentionally bifurcated /
split so as to avoid approval from higher authorities.

251
.

ESTIMATE RATES
It was observed that the estimated rates are being worked out in an unprofessional
and perfunctory manner, at times by extrapolating the price of the lowest capacity equipment
or byapplying a uniform yearly compounded escalation over the prices of similar
equipmentpurchased few years ago. Consequently, the inflated estimated rates prepared by
theorganizations resulted in acceptance and payment of higher prices to the firms.

As the estimated rate is a vital element in establishing the reasonableness of prices, it

isimportant that the same is worked out in a realistic and objective manner on the basis
ofprevailing market rates, last purchase prices, economic indices for the raw material /
labourother input costs, IEEMA formula, wherever applicable and assessment based on
intrinsic valueetc.

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

Against the most preferred and transparent mode of Global tender enquiry /
Advertised tender enquiry, some of the organizations are generally issuing limited tender
inquiry to selectvenders, irrespective of the value of purchase. Further, the credentials of the
firms and thecriteria adopted or selection of such venders, in most of the cases, are not put on
record. This noonly results in lack of competition but also favoritism to the select vendors.

In some cases of global tenders it was observed that though the organization had
given atime of 6-8 weeks for tender opening but the tender sale was closed 2-4 weeks in
advance of tender opening, thereby effectively giving only one month time to bidders for
purchase of tender documents. The very purpose of floating global tender which is to give
wider publicity andsufficient time to bidders to get the bidding documents and submit their
offers, in such casesseems to have been defeated.

With a view to have wider, fair and adequate competition, it is important that sufficient
time to say 4-6 weeks in case of Advertised/Global tenders and 3-4 weeks in case of limited
tenders is allowed, except, in cases of recorded emergencies, wherein also, a reasonable time
should be permitted and tenders should be sent by faster means like speed post/fax. The
tenders should preferably be kept open for sale till the date of tender opening or just one day
prior to the date of tender opening. With the widespread use of information technology, the
tender notices should also be put on the website and e-mail address of the organization
should be indicated in the tender notice.

In case of proprietary purchases, the detailed justification for purchase from a single
vendor is not being placed on record. As by issuing single tender, the competition is totally
eliminated and the possibility of paying higher prices cannot be ruled out.

It is imperative that the purchase on single tender basis be made with the detailed
justification in its support and with the approval of competent authority, including associated
finance.

252
.

TENDER / BID DOCUMENT

The terms and conditions being stipulated in the bid documents by some of the Organizations
are quite insufficient and sketchy. Sometimes, the bid document contain obsolete, unwanted
matter and conflicting and vague provisions, resulting in wrong interpretation, disputes and
time & cost overruns.

Even the time/date for receipt and opening of tenders is not being incorporated in the
documents.

The important clauses relating to Earnest money, Delivery Schedule, Payment

terms,Performance/Warrantee Bank Guarantee, Pre-despatch inspection, Arbitration,
Liquidated Damages/Penalty for the delayed supplies and Risk-Purchase etc. are not being
incorporated in the bid documents. All these clauses are important for safeguarding the
interest of the purchaser and also have indirect financial implications in the evaluation of
offers and execution of the contracts.

All the important clauses as brought out above need to be incorporated in the bidding
documents so as to fully safeguard the interest of the Govt. and for evaluation of bids on
equitable and fair basis and in a transparent manner.

In some cases, it was noticed that the amount of Earnest Money Deposit stipulated in the
tender document was grossly insufficient to protect the Govt. interest in case of breach
committed by the bidder. Some of the organizations instead of ignoring the bids not
accompanied with earnest money deposit along with the tenders as per bids requirements,
asked the bidders to submit EMD, after tender opening.

The primary objective of submission of Earnest Money Deposit is to establish the earnestness
of bidder so that he does not withdraw, impair or modify the offer within the validity of the
bid. It also helps in restricting if not eliminat ing „speculat ive‟, „frivolous‟ or „wait and see‟
bids. Since any relaxation regarding submission of Earnest Money Deposit has financial
implications besides giving encouragement to the bidders to submit frivolous bids as
indicated above; the terms & conditions should clearly stipulate that the offers wit hout
Earnest Money Deposit would be considered as unresponsive and rejected.

Some of the organizations incorporate a specific delivery schedule inter-alia mentioning that
bids offering delivery beyond stipulated date will be treated as non-responsive and will be
summarily rejected. However, after opening of the tenders, the bid by one of the
organizations with slightly longer delivery period was not rejected as per the bid guidelines,
rather that offer was also considered and evaluation was made after loading the offer by
applying some unilateral loading criteria. The same resulted in inter se change of ranking
position.

The evaluation / Loading criteria with respect to the important terms like payment terms,
delivery period, performance bank guarantee etc. having financial implications need to be

253
.

specified in unambiguous terms in the bid documents so that the evaluation of bids after
tender opening could be made in a transparent manner without any subjectivity.

The exemptions/reservation of a particular item which normally apply to SSI units are not
being specified in the tender notice / bid documents. The applicable purchase preference to
public sector enterprises as per the guidelines circulated by Department of Public Enterprises
is also not being incorporated in the bid documents leading to lot of complaints from SSI/PS
Units.

The Government instructions on reservation of items and price preference to SSI Units
and purchase preference to PSUs need to be incorporated in bid documents.

It has been noticed that some tenderers offer conditional discounts for coverage within a
shorter period, for early inspection/payment etc. and, such discounts are being considered, at
the time of evaluation of tenders by the organizations.

It needs to be ensured that the evaluation of tenders should not be based on such conditional
discounts and suitable clause should be included in the bidding documents.

RECEIPTS OF TENDERS

Some of the organizations do not have proper arrangement for receipt of tenders. There is no
tender box for receipt of tenders at scheduled date and time fixed for tender opening. Instead
the trade representatives leave the tenders with the receptionist or the concerned Purchase
Officer(s). This procedure is highly objectionable as the possibilit y of tampering and
interpolation of offers cannot be ruled out.

A proper arrangement for receipt of tenders at scheduled date and time through tender
box needs to be adopted.

OPENING OF TENDERS
Some of the organizations are not opening the tenders in public i.e. in presence of the trade
representatives. The system of not opening the tenders in public is against the sanctity of
tender system, and is a non-transparent method of handling tenders. There could be a
possibility of tampering and interpolation of offers in such cases. The rates at times are not
quoted in figures and words, cuttings / over-writings are not attested by bidders. Some of
the organizations justify such opaqueness in tendering system by making a reference to their
manuals. This is not acceptable.

POST TENDER NOGOTIATION

As per CVC guidelines circulated vide letter No.8 (1) (h) / 98 (1) dtd. 18.11.98, it has been
brought out that “the tenders are generally a major source of corruption. In order to avoid
corruption, a more transparent and effective system must be introduced. As post tender
negotiations are the main source of corruption, post tender negotiations are banned with

254
.

immediate effect except in the case of negotiations with L-1 (i.e. Lower tenderer)”. In
continuation to these instructions, following further clarifications were issued vide letter NO.
98/Ord./1 dtd. 15.03.99:

i) The Govt. of India has a purchase preference policy so far as the public sector enterprises
are concerned. It is clarified that the ban on the post tender negotiations does not mean that
the policy of the Govt. of India for purchase preference for public sector should not be
implemented.

ii) Incidentally, some organizations have been using the public sector as a shield or a conduit
for getting costly inputs or for improper purchases. This also should be avoided.

iii) Another issue that has been raised is that many a time the quantity to be ordered is much
more than L-1 alone can supply. In such cases, the quantity order may be distributed in such
a manner that the purchase is done in a fair, transparent and equitable manner.

Despite the above instructions, it has been noticed that still repeated negotiations with the
select / all the vendors are being carried out by some of the organizations in gross violation of
the above instructions. The instructions / guidelines circulated by CVC on post tender
negotiations only with L-1 need to be strictly followed.

255
.

CHAPTER-19

MATERIAL MANAGEMENT & STORE ACCOUNTS

Material Budgeting, Planning & Programming

Materials Acquisition
Materials Utilization
Inventory Control
Store Keeping
Value Analysis & Standardization
Disposal of Scrap, Obsolete & Surplus

Material Budgeting, Planning & Programming

 Stores Budget

1. To Plan and Control Purchases

2. To assess and make provision for the financial requirement
3. Plan & Control the Consumption of the materials

Preparation of Store Budget

Annual Store Budget will be prepared by 15th March of each year.

a) Ascertain the programmes, policies and priorities in respect of developmental works

b) Assess the quantum of Material Cost component and funds available as per the
Annual Financial Statement.

c) Prepare the following Statements:

1. Requirement of Materials for Major Capital Works
2. Requirement of Materials for Minor Capital Works
3. Requirement of Materials for O & M works

1. Divisional officer should prepare & submit the statement to Circle office before 15 th of
January

2. Superintending Engineer has to consolidate the statements received from Divisions

and submit Consolidated statement to G.M. (PROCUREMENT) Before 15 th of February

3. G.M. (PROCUREMENT has to consolidate the statements received from [Link] and
submit to the Board before 15th March

256
.

4. While preparing the statement following rules shall be observed:

1. Requisition of Materials For Capital Works is based on– as per Work Order
2. Requisition of Materials For O & M Works is based on– Average Consumption of
Last three years.
Less: Materials in Stores
Materials in Pipe line
Add: Buffer Stock

Custody of stores

1. Store Keeper acts as trustee.

a) Receipt of Materials
b) Storage
c) Preservation
d) Issue of Materials
e) Accounting & Maintenance of Records

Receipt of Materials from:

a) Suppliers against Purchase Order

b) From other Accounting units on Stock Indent
c) From Work Shop
d) From Contractors
e) From Works

• Store Keeper should prepare Receipt Voucher against the Delivery Challan for Supply
of Materials.

• Materials Return from Works and Workshop with Support of Return Material Invoice

• Enter in the Bin Card

• Enter in the Numerical Ledger

• Send Receipt Vouchers/R.I. to

• Accounts Section of Division Office

• Reconcile Balances with Pricing Ledger

Issue of Materials
Issue of Materials against Indent to:
1) Capital Works/O & M Works
2) Other Accounting Units

3) Contractors

257
.

4) Workshop
5) Loaning of Materials to: Govt./ Local Bodies/ Power Consumers/ Contractors
1. 5 copies Indent is to be prepared by the Forman of Work
2. Indent is to be prepared as per Sanctioned Estimate after ascertaining availability of
Materials
3. Indent is to be Countersigned by the Controlling
4. After Countersignature Currency of Indent is THREE days
5. Countersigned Indent is to be submitted to STORE OFFICER
6 After Initials the Indent will be forwarded to STORE KEEPER
7 Store Keeper issue Materials and assign Invoice Number
8 One Copy of Invoice issued to Indenter, One copy retained in Stores, Two copies sent to
Accounts Section of Division Office, for Pricing and Stock compilation.

Loaning of Materials
Rules govern the hire of Tools & Plants, Machinery or any other articles to Govt./Local
Bodies/Contractors/Power Consumers.
• No article shall generally be lent to private parties
• Consumable articles should not be loaned on any account.
• Festoon lamps and flood lights may be hired to private parties at 12 ½% and 4% of the
cost of material per month respectively and 50% of the cost of the broken materials.
• Special Materials such as Transformers, Motors, Trollies etc may loaned to Power
Consumers hire charges 3% per Month.
• In Special urgent cases, heavy machinery or any other Special electrical appliances
and tools may be loaned to GOVT./Local Bodies for a period not Exceeding THREE
MONTHS. The hire Charges will be TWO percent of original cost per month.
• HIRE CHARGES ARE PAYABLE IN ADVANCE

Preservation
Protection of Materials from:
• Fire
• Rust
• Corrosion
• Dust
• Theft
• Weather – Heat – Cold – Moisture etc.
Nature of Stores
• Regional Store under the Control of Superintending Engineer (Elecl.)
• Divisional Stores under the Control of Executive Engineer (Elecl.) of O & M Division
• Major Works Store under the Control of Executive Engineer (Elecl.) of Major Works
Division

258
.

PURCHASES
• Purchase Grants shall be allocated to all the Chief Engineers, Secretary/Financial
Advisers quarterly or at such intervals
• The Zonal Chief Engineer will re-allocate the grants to SEEs & EEEs.
• Purchase of Materials through rate Contract
• Bulk Purchases of budgeted requirement through tenders

TENDERS
Tender is a written document from a supplier, quoting prices and setting out terms and
conditions for supply of materials.
OPEN TENDER – Calling Tenders by Advertisement in News Paper
LIMITED TENDER – Calling Tenders from a limited number of Firms registered or Reputed
Manufacturers
TWO PART TENDER – This system is adopted in case of Purchase of Materials costing over
[Link] [Link] Part of tender relates to Technical Particulars and The Second Part
relates to Price bid
RATE CONTRACT – It is a contract for supply of materials at specified rate during the period
covered under the Contract.

PRICE OF TENDER FORMS

Rs.1,00,000 to 5,00,000 Rs. 500.00
Rs.5,00,001 to 10,00,000 Rs. 1000.00
Rs.10,00,001 to 25,00,000 Rs. 2500.00
Rs.25,00,001 to 50,00,000 Rs. 5000.00
Rs.50,00,001 & above Rs. 7500.00
Plus VAT

Advertisement of Requirement
In respect of Materials costing over Rs.1 Lakhs, Tenders shall be called by Advertisement in
two or more approved Newspapers, both in Kannada and English. The Detailed TENDER
ENQUIRY FORM with Terms and Conditions of tender and Supply shall be in FORM 9.
Advertisement / Notification shall be sent to PUBLIC RELATION OFFICER, KPTCL for
arranging Publication in Newspaper.

Tender Deposit / Earnest Money Deposit;

a) Tender deposit or EMD confers the right to participate in the tender and also serves as
guarantee of the tender.
b) Tenderer shall furnish EMD in cash or by demand draft at ONE PERCENT of the
estimated value of purchase rounded of to the nearest multiple of Rupees TEN subject
to Minimum of Rs.50/. And Maximum of Rs.12,500/- in case of SSI and Rs.50,000/- in
case of others.
c) Alternatively the SSI units Rs.12,500/- and others Rs.50,000/- may deposit
permanently and participate in any number of tenders.

259
.

Security Deposit
Security deposit shall be 5% of the value of the Purchase Order, rounded off to the nearest
multiple of Rupees Ten.
1. If the amount of S.D. is less than Rs.5,000/- it shall be payable by cash or DD
2. If SD is Rs.5000/- or more it shall be payable either by Cash or DD or by furnishing a
Bank Guarantee, subject to a maximum of Rs.50,000/.
3. Alternatively, a Bank Guarantee of Rs.1 Lakh towards SD may be furnished
irrespective of the value and number of Pos placed on the firm.
4. The EMD paid by the Successful tenderer will be adjusted to S.D.
5. Security Deposit is refundable after the Satisfactory completion of Supply and after
the final bill is paid.
6. Security Deposit is retained till the expiry of the warranty/Guarantee period
7. Security Deposit need not be collected for POs for printing and purchase of Stationary
where total cost is less than Rs.5000/-.

Registration of Firms
Manufacturers / Suppliers may get registered their firms:
1. Application Fee Rs. 10/-
2. Registration fee for first Material Rs.100/- fee for additional material Rs.10/- each
3. Applicant shall furnish Solvency Certificate for Rs.50,000/- in case of Manufacturer
and Rs.5000/- in case of Suppliers either from Banker or by Tahasildar
4. Current/Latest Income Tax and Sales Tax clearance Certificates
5. Partnership Deed/Memorandum & Articles of Association
6. Certificate from the competent authority as Manufacturer

REFUSAL OF REGISTRATION
KPTCL may refuse registration in following cases:
1. If satisfactory evidence is available to show that the applicant is participated in any
fraud or dishonesty
2. If KPTCL opines that the applicant is incapable of supplying materials

CANCELLATION OF REGISTRATION
The registration shall be cancelled if:
1. fails to execute a Contract or executes a defective or conditional Contract
2. Violates any one of the conditions of the Contract executed
3. Fails to tender for a period of TWO years
4. Fails to effect supplies against Pos
5. Fails to furnish IT / ST clearance certificate
6. Fails to abide by the conditions of Registration
7. is declared as Bankrupt / Insolvent

260
.

BLACK LISTING
KPTCL MAY BLACK LIST A FIRM:
1. when there is sufficient reason to prove that the firm is guilty of malpractice, such as
bribery, corruption, fraud, etc.
2. When the firm continuously refuses to supply without showing satisfactory reason
3. If the supplier or his partner or his representative has been convicted by a Court of
Law.

RECEIPT OF TENDERS
1. Normally tenders are expected to drop their sealed tenders in the tender box, In case
tender sent by Post it shall be received by the authorized Officer and record the date of
receipt on cover and drop it in the tender Box.
2. The tender Box containing the tenders will be opened on the notified date and time
and sealed covers are taken out. If the cover is unsealed or mutilated / torn condition
or seals damaged, it shall be brought to the notice of competent authority for
acceptance or otherwise.
3. The tenders on receipt shall be entered in “The Register of Tenders Received”

EXTENSION OF TIME
1. Poor response
2. Any materials change in the specifications/quantities
3. Any unforeseen circumstances
Publicity to the extension of time limit for submission of tenders shall be given in the
same manner as given for first invitation of tenders.

RE INVITATION OF TENDERS
Tenders may be re-invited in the event of
1. Any subsequent change necessitated in technical specification
2. 2. Inadequacy of number of tenders
3. Unsuitability of offers
4. 4. Changes in market trends, when the rates quoted are very high
5. Any other compelling reasons to be recorded in writing

OPENING OF TENDERS
1. Tenders shall be opened on the date and at the time notified in the tender enquiry
2. In case the tender opening date happens to be an unscheduled holiday the tenders shall
be opened on the next working day at the same time.
3. The officer opening the tenders, should read out or cause to be read out the salient features
of each tender before the tenderers / representatives present

REJECTION OF TENDERS
Tenders shall be rejected in following cases:
1. Tenders received after due date and time fixed
2. Tenders from Suppliers/Firms who are black listed

261
.

3. Tenders not accompanied by the required amount of EMD

Processing of Tenders
1. To Ignore price reductions offered after opening of tenders
2. Not to negotiate with the tenderers after opening of the tenders
3. To reject offers, if there were t be any deviations from specifications
4. If no order is placed on the lowest acceptable tenderer the negotiation should not be
done for same rates with others.
5. Time Schedule: 80 days from the date of opening tender for finalisation of proposal, 10
days for Audit, 30 days for the KPTCL secretariat for processing and communicating
orders

RATE CONTRACT PROCEDURE

1. The Tenders shall be invited annually for a rate contract, for the supply of an
approximate quantity of common items of store articles for day-to-day works at fixed
rates during a prescribed period.
2. In case KPTCL selects more than one contractor there shall be a clear allocation for
each contractor in respect of the quantity of Materials.

Procedure for Bulk Purchase

Comparative Statement of tenders received, the recommendation of Audit and following

particulars shall be submitted to KPTCL:
1. Quantity held in stock
2. Quantities expected during the year against Pos
3. Gross requirement for the year
4. Quantity to be procured against the present enquiry
5. Consumption during the previous two years
6. Previous purchase rates
7. Budget provisions

Procedure for Fixation of Standard Rates

a) Items where purchase orders are available:
1. Order-wise price payable including freight and insurance
2. Escalation in price envisaged
3. Weighted average of (i) & (ii) to be taken as standard Rate.
b) Item where purchase orders are not available:
Last Purchase rate plus any escalation in price envisaged to act as standard rate.

Purchase Orders
1. Currency of Purchase Orders shall normally be current for a period of SIX months
2. The Currency of P.O. can be renewed for a Period of TWELVE months beyond the date
first prescribed

262
.

3. Extension of P.O. may be placed within six months from the date of original P.O. not
exceeding once Subject to the condition that the order does not exceed the original
quantity, Price should not have been fallen during the period.
4. Can accept excess supplies up to TEN percent of the quantity on all Purchase orders
5. Acceptance of increase in prices: Can accept increase in prices on account of statutory
variations in duties/taxes and freight and increase in Insurance rate etc.
6. May impose Penalty at ½ % per week or part there of subject to a maximum of TEN
percent.

PHYSICAL INVENTRY OF STORES

The purpose of physical verification of stores annually and at periodical intervals is:
1. to ascertain the quantity and quality of materials held in stock
2. to check the correctness of store accounts
3. to detect losses arising from Fraud, Theft, Negligence or for any other causes
4. To eliminate all obsolete and unserviceable materials.

ANNUAL INVENTRY OF STORES

1. Annual Inventory of materials and equipments held in stock at Stores shall be taken in the
Month of January of every year.
2. The Annual Inventory work shall be done from 1st to 31st January of every year.
3. During Annual Inventory the Stores transaction shall be suspended.
4. Annual Inventory shall be done by the officer not below the rank of Asst. Executive
Engineer at the presence of Store Keeper
4. Following Statements shall be prepared by the Store Counting Officer;
a) Materials found Excess
b) Materials found Short
c) Materials proposed for set off
d) Un operated materials for more than year
e) Obsolete /scrap Materials
5. The Statements shall be submitted to Divisional Officer by 15 th February
6. The divisional Officer shall submit the Statements to Circle Office before 28 th February
7. The Superintending Engineer shall pass the Final Order before 15th of March on Store
Inventory.

DISPOSAL OF STORES
1. Sale of Stores: Sale of materials to Contractors and to the employees may be authorized
by the CEE at ledger rate plus 15% or at last auction rate whichever is higher.
Whenever materials are sold, an invoice for the materials sold should be prepared and signed
by the Store keeper duly indicating the authority and cash receipt number and date.

263
.

BILLS

Suppliers Bills – Furnishing of Materials Acknowledgement Statement.

1. The suppliers‟ bills should not be sent to store officers/store keepers for furnishing the
stock certificate
2. The store keepers, immediately after the preparation of receipt vouchers, shall prepare
the MAS and send them to Divisional Office.

STOCK CERTIFICATE
Store keepers/Asst. Store keepers Value of the materials is Rs.1000/- and
below and to be countersigned by
the Store Officers
Store Officers and Store keepers Value of the materials, is above
Rs.1000/- and below Rs.20000/-
Divisional Officers, Store officers and Value of Materials sis Rs.20000/- and
Store keepers/Asst. Store keepers above
2. Surplus Stores: Surplus shall be classified in to (1) Serviceable (2) un –serviceable.
3. A report regarding unserviceable materials shall be submitted to avoid unnecessary cost
of storage.

DISPOSAL BY AUCTION

Action shall be taken for disposal by Auction of surplus, obsolete and scrap materials by
notifying in the following news papers limiting to one insertion:
Kannada Prabha, Deccan Herald, Economic Times, Financial Express, The Hindu and Indian
Express.
Advertisement shall be inserted only when amount expected to be realised by sale in public
Auction is more than Rs.2500/-

Tender-Cum-Public Auction
Tender cum Public Auction shall be followed in the Central Stores for the disposal of following
items:
Scrap Aluminum, Scrap Copper, Scrap Iron and Steel, Automotive Vehicles, Under Ground
Cables, Transformers, Transformer Coils, Laminations and Transformer Containers, Materials
in good condition but declared as obsolete with an estimated market value of Rs.5000/- and
above, Released Transformer Oil.

LOSS ON STORES

In all cases of Loss of Stores due to theft, fraud, negligence, fire, damages due to accident,
weather conditions or other unusual causes including theft of wire from distribution lines, the
divisional officers should submit a report to Zonal Chief Engineers.

264
.

WRITE OFF OF LOSS OF STORES

1. The proposals for write of loss of stores including articles of tools and plant, should be sent
by the Divisional Officers to SEEs
2. The Chief Engineer and SEEs are empowered to order for the Write off of loss of stores upto
the monetary limits specified in Manual of Delegation of powers subject to verification by
AO/DCA and after proper enquiry.
3. List of all cases of Write off shall be sent to KPTCL with a copy to Chief Controller of
Accounts.

BILLS FOR THE SUPPLY OF DIESEL/PETROL/OIL

1. The Supplier will prefer his bills, in duplicate, at regular intervals duly supported by
the acknowledged copies of the coupon to the store officer / Store keeper
2. After cross verification of the bill with reference to the indent and coupon, the store
keeper will record the details in the relevant fuel bill control register.
3. The Division office will verify the bills with indents, coupons, and PO and pass the bill
for payment.

CORPORATION VEHICLES

1. Corporation owns vehicles for transportation of men and materials.

2. Proper Maintenance, efficient Operation reduction in running costs are significant.
3. History Book and Log book for each Vehicle is to be maintained.

• Purchase of Vehicle requires Corporation Sanction

• Drivers of Vehicles should possess valid Driving licence

• Fees for renewal of Driving Licence will be met out of Corporation funds

• The driver SHOULD NOT drive the vehicle under the influence of Liquor

• The Driver should not carry un authorized persons/materials

• Before taking the Vehicle to Road driver should check condition of Vehicle and to report
immediately any defect noticed
• While driving the vehicle, the driver should carry with him, Driving Licence, Vehicle
R.C., Insurance, Fitness certificate, Tax Card, men carrying permit and log book.
• Cleaner should assist the Driver
• Whenever the vehicle is garaged for repairs the services of Drivers and Cleaners shall
be best utilized.

Drivers and Cleaners

Drivers are of THREE categories

Driver Special Grade To drive heavy duty vehicles of 20 tons capacity and above
Driver Grade I To drive heavy/Light duty vehicles of 10 tons capacity and

265
.

above but below 20 tons capacity

Driver Grade II To drive light duty vehicle

SECURITY DEPOSITS

Category of Driver Amount of Security Deposit No. of installments

Driver Special Grade 500.00 9
Driver Grade I 400.00 7
Driver Grade II (Lorry Drivers 300.00 5
Drivers of Light duty Vehicles 200.00 3
Cleaners 100.00 3

Use of vehicles

• No Vehicles shall be used without the permission of the officer to whom vehicle is
allotted
• The Vehicle should be used only in the interest of Corporation Work
• Vehicle shall not be taken beyond the jurisdiction of the officer, unless specifically
permitted
• Controlling officers may make use of the vehicles on official Tour & Inspection
• Traveling Allowance of the officers will be regulated in accordance with BESR
• Vehicle shall not be driven by un authorized Employee.
• In Urgent cases the officer/executive subordinates may drive the Vehicle with valid
driving license.

• Vehicle shall not be used for private purposes even against payment.
• Journey for attending meetings & for works in Banks connected with Corporation is
treated as usage in the interest of Corporation.
• Journey for conveyance of employees from residence for attending meeting which is
held in other places than working place is treated as in the interest of Corporation
duty.
• Journey from residence to office and office to residence are not in the interest of
Corporation duties.
• The Chairman and Functional Members Journey from residence to office and vice
versa are treated as in the interest of Corporation.

MAINTENANCE OF VEHICLE

• The AEE/JEE who is designated as “Vehicle Forman” shall be responsible for the
maintenance of the vehicles in his charge in good condition and has to arrange for
timely payment of Vehicle Tax, Insurance, Registration Fees, Fitness fee.
• Vehicle foreman has be regulate the Movement of Vehicles and when vehicle is not in
use should be parked in specified places.

266
.

LOG BOOK

• The Movement of Vehicle shall be recorded in Vehicle log book

• The entry pertaining to Journey, whether official or private should be verified by the
actual user within 24 hours & attested
• The trips of lorries, Truck-Trailers should be recorded and approximate weight &
quantity of materials loaded together with quantities of Diesel/Petrol, Oil issued
should be noted.
• Monthly extracts of log book entries should be sent to the Divisional Officer.
• The Officer incharge of the Vehicles should ensure upto-date entries in the log books.
• The Heads of offices/Controlling Officers should check the entries and rate of
Consumption of fuel.
• Loss of log book should be informed immediately to Divisional Officer.
• The Log book should be made available to the Internal Audit & Other inspecting
Officers.

HISTORY BOOKS

• History Books shall be maintained for Each Vehicle

• Following information is to be recorded in History Book

a) Specification of the Vehicle

b) Insurance & Vehicle Tax
c) Certificate of Witness & their renewals
d) Record of Docking:
i) Major Repairs
ii) Minor Repairs & Replacement of Units
e) i) Renewal of Tyres & Replacements
ii) Retreading and Repairs to Typres & Tubes
f) Servicing, Petty Repairs, Accidents
Loss of History Books is to be reported to immediate higher officer

Scrapping of Vehicles

Type of Vehicle Years Life of the Vehicle or should have run at least

Heave Vehicles: 7 2,00,000 KMs

Trucks, Truck Trailers
& Lorries

267
.

Light Vehicles 7 1,80,000 KMs

Cars, Jeeps, Van,
Station Vagons,
Trekkers etc

When Vehicle has served its life & found unfit for further use
When Vehicle gives less than FOUR KMs per Liter of Petrol/Diesel
SEE should personally inspect the Vehicle & record assessment
Scrapping of Vehicle requires approval of Corporation

Form for Scrapping of Vehicle

• Name of the Division/Circle

• Make & Type of Vehicle
• Registration No. of Vehicle, Year of Registration
• Engine Number, Chassis Number, Purchase Value
• Date or Year, the vehicle was put on Road
• Total Mileage / Meterage done by the vehicle
• How many times the Vehicle has undergone repairs
• Accidents if any
• Rate of Consumption of fuel
• Reason for scrapping
• SEE Assessment
• If the Vehicle is found to be not roadworthy, is due to
a) Normal wear and tear
b) Bad maintenance
c) Other causes to be specified
• WDV of the Vehicle

INSURANCE
• Vehicle should be insured with KGID (Motor Branch) either for comprehensive risk or
third party risk

• Prompt payment of Motor Insurance premium

• Claims in respect of any accident

VEHICLE TAXES
• Vehicle is covered by the Certificate of Registration

• Prompt Payment of Vehicle Taxes

PAYMENTS
• Divisional officers are empowered to make Payments of

268
.

a) Motor Vehicle Insurance Premium

b) Vehicle Taxes
c) Vehicle Registration Fee
d) Vehicle Fitness fee

WORKS

Classification of Works:
• Maintenance & Repair Replacements
• Capital Works – Original Works
• Construction of New Transmission lines and Sub-Stations
• Extension and Improvement
• System Improvement and Reduction of Losses

• Electrification of Villages/Hamlets/Harijan Basties, Tribal Colonies and Towns

• Energisation of I.P. sets
• Bhagya Jyothi Schemes
• Service Connection Works
• Constructions of New Buildings
• Extension Works are:
a) Extension of 11 KV to 400 KV lines
b) Extension of New lines for New connections other than Service connections

IMPROVEMENT WORKS ARE:

A) Replacement of Baliga Poles

B) Pole to Pole Improvements
C) Replacement of Transformer with higher Capacity
D) Alteration or Renovations of Stations & DTC
E) Replacement of Copper wire

SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT WORKS ARE:

A) Regrouping of transformer centers

B) Shifting of transformers to load centers
C) Inter-linking 11 KV transmission lines
D) Conversion of 4.6 KV & 13.2 KV lines
E) Installation of Capacitors
F) Drawing of New lines of Link Lines / Express feeders to shorten the route
G) Increasing the size of Conductors
H) Installation of New TC to reduce load

REVENUE EXPENDITURE WORKS ARE:

A) Replacement of Faulty Transformers

269
.

B) Replacement of damaged Insulator, Cutouts, GOS, deteriorated Service mains

C) Replacement of damaged line supporters
D) Shifting of Assets from one place to another
E) Replacement of Faulty equipments
F) Dismantling or Decommissioning of Asset
G) Repairs to electrical equipment & Buildings

EXECUTION OF WORKS

• No work shall be executed unless detailed Plan and estimate has been Sanctioned

Exception: In cases of emergency where safety of the power lines, Plant, Electrical
Machinery is suspected to be in danger and needs immediate execution of works such works
may be executed under „TENTATIVE WORK ORDER”
On completion of work estimate shall be prepared on actuals and get sanctioned by
Competent Authority within WEEK

GENERAL PRINCIPALS

1. No estimate shall be prepared without Budget grant

2. Estimates are strictly confidential
3. For preparation of estimates Schedule of Rates shall be applied
4. Important designs should be prepared in Planning & Technical Branch

PREPATION OF ESTIMATES

• Minor Capital Works - Form 34

• Major Capital Works - Form 35
• REC Works - Form 36
• Decommissioning - Form 37
• Deposit Contribution - Form 38
• Repairs & Maintenance - Form 39

Every Estimate shall accompany with

a) History: A brief review of necessity

b) Scope: Extent of Work involved
c) Specifications and Drawings
d) Cost: under Proper Head
e) Financial Provision: Budget Grant
f) Data Sheet: Materials required
g) Load Data: Capacity of Feeder TC etc.
h) Revenue: Expected revenue
i) Agreements – Deposits
j) Execution – Method of Execution

270
.

k) Establishment – RE staff or Extra staff

L) M.E. Staff – Permanent ME staff or Casual Labour required
M) Materials Position
N) Time: When work expected to be started
O) Any other relavant Information

FOR RENEWAL & REPLACEMENTS

1) Approximate period proposed for work
2) Normal guaranteed life of Material/Equipment
3) Whether materials released can be reused
4) Latest date by which work is considered necessary

ABSTRACT SHOULD CONTAIN FOLLOWING:

1) Total Grant allotted

2) Total amount of estimates already Sanctioned
3) The amount required for Work in Progress
4) Amount of Estimates that are pending sanction
5) Amount of Expenditure – up to date
6) The balance of grant available
RURAL ELECTRIFICATION SCHEMES

• Electrification of Villages, Hasmlets, Harijan Basties and Tribal Colonies

• Energisation of IP sets
• Electrification of Rural House hold
• System Improvement works
• Bhagya Jyothi Schemes with approval of State Governement

R.E. SCHEMES

For These Schemes Proposal should cover:

a) Technical feasibility
b) Economic Viability
c) Future load development
d) Approximate Cost
e) Revenue Forecast
f) Proposed category of R.D. Scheme
1. O.A. (Ordinarily Advanced) – Intensive electrification of area already electrified
2. O.B. (Ordinarily Backward) – Extensive electrification of un electrified areas.
3. S.U. (Specially Under – Developed) – Electrification of unelectrified area and Intensive
electrification of areas already electrified in Under developed area – Normally Hilly
Tribal and deserted areas.
4. S.P.A. (Special Project Agriculture – Intensive Energisation of IP sets – Jointly financed
by REC and Commercial Banks

271
.

5. H.B. (Harijan Basties) – Exclusively electrifying Harijan Basties near or around the
villages
6. S.I. (System Improvement) – Scheme for improvement in system efficiency and power
factor and reduction of line loses

CLOSURE OF THE SCHEME

1. Closure of a Scheme requires the approval of Corporation. GOK as Guarantor of the loan,
has to approve and recommend the closure of the Scheme. Finally it has to be accepted and
approved by the REC Ltd.

BHAGYA JYOTHI SCHEMES

1. To benefit the poorest of poor, residing in an electrified village the GOK has introduced
BHAGYA JYOTHI Scheme in the year 1979.

2. The object of the scheme to provide ONE BULB connection to the houses belonging to
SC/ST and weaker Sections.
3. The expenditure initially met by KPTCL, 20% of expenditure subsidised by the GOK
balance treated as loan and recovered over a period of 15 years from beneficiaries.
4. The beneficiaries are to be identified by the Zilla Parishat/Mandal Pancayaths.
5. On receipt of list of beneficiaries field officers will check up the viability in each case
6. Technical criteria: Only those houses which are with „SIXTEEN METERES‟ from the
nearest LT distribution pole considred.
7. Combined estimate for internal wiring of the house for each village, using the schedule
of rates be prepared.
8. The estimate is to be sanctioned village wise by the Divisional Officer.
9. The CEE will notify the Programme fixing the targets for the year
10. Internal wiring and Service mains work shall be carried through LEC
11. The Divisional Officers are empowered to award the work.
12. LEC execute agreement on stamp paper and Pay S.D. Rs.100/-
13. Contractor has to complete the work within TWO weeks failing which 5% penalty may
be levied.

SERVICE CONNECTIONS
1. For execution of S.C. works the estimate shall be prepared in quadruplicate under A/c
code 14.400 CWIP Service Connection
2. Copies of the sanctioned estimate are to be sent to:
1. One copy to Consumer
2. One copy to Accounts Section
3. Two copies to the O&M unit (to be returned after servicing the installation – one
for CR and one for the RR file.- C.R. to be submitted within TEN days.
3. The energy meter and aerial board and cutouts will be provided by KPTCL
4. Service Main shall be Under Ground or Overhead as and when prescribed.
5. Supervision charges as prescribed in E.S.C.

272
.

R & M WORKS & REPLACEMENTS

The Estimate in respect of replacements should be prepared for Repairs to –
1. Meters and Metering equipments
2. Transformers
3. Oil Circuit Breakers etc
The Expenditure on replacements is chargeable either to „REVENUE‟ or „CAPITAL‟ depending
upon the type of replacement.

Dismantling of Idle Power Lines & Decommissioning of Assets

1. Power & Lighting installations which are remaining idle for over six months should
generally be disconnected and the service lines should be dismantled and the
materials returned to stores.
2. A List of such installations shall be sent by divisional Officer the SEE by 1 st October
and 1st March of every year.
3. Only the cost of labour for dismantling shall be provided in the Estimate.

PLCC WORKS

1. The Estimates in respect of power line carrier communication works shall be got
prepared and sanctioned by the Zonal C.E.E.s
2. The required materials shall be drawn & installed by the staff of [Link] in co-
ordination with the Telecommunication Division
3. The responsibility for commissioning and operation of PLCC equipments lies with the
Telecommunication Divisions.

CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS

1. Civil Engineering works of Capital nature shall be taken up for execution only after
administratively approved & included in the programme of Civil Engineering work for
the year by KPTCL and the estimates are sanctioned by the competent authority.
2. The site of every building should be settled before the detailed designs and estimates
are prepared. Local Authorities must be consulted in all cases as to convenience of the
site

Repair works:
1. Repair works are of THREE kinds
a) Those which are carried out periodically and which are same quantity from time to
time
b) Which are not done as periodically but which it is convenient to carry out so far as
may be necessary.
c) Petty repairs occasioned which is necessary between the times of periodical repairs.
2. Before estimates are sanctioned it should be checked with SR of PWD of GOK
3. The Measurement of work executed by Contract Agency will be recorded by JE/AE
(Civil)

273
.

4. The AEEE Civil/Electrical can check measure the works costing not more than
Rs.2,500/-.

Sl. In respect of Percentage of the capital cost of the

No. Building

CEE SEE EEE

a) Buildings which are existing for 5% 25% 10%

more than 30 years

b) Buildings which are in 20% 10% 5%

existence for more than 20
years but upto 30 years.

c) Buildings which are in 10% 5% 3%

existence for 20 years & less

ESTIMATES
The period of currency of Estimates

[Link]. Amount of the Estimate Period of currency

i) Below Rs.10,000/- One year From the date

of Sanction
ii) From Rs.10,000/- to Two years
Rs.25,000/-

iii) From Rs,25,000/- to Three years

Rs.1,00,000/-

iv) From Rs.1,00,000/- & above To be fixed by Sanction-

ing authority

v) Repairs to Building st
Lapses on 31 March

ISSUE OF WORK ORDERS

1. Work Orders shall be issued asset-wise to facilitate control and record of expenditure and
for proper categorization of the assets. One work order should pertain to one asset only.
2. Copies of Sanctioned Estimates shall be sent to:
1) Executive subordinate entrusted with the execution of work
2. Divisional Accounts branch

274
.

3. Internal Audit
4. Technical Section

CONTRACTS
Methods of execution of works:
1. Departmentally: with KPTCL men and materials
2. Through Contract:
a) By Piece work agreement or by regular contract agreement costing Rs.20,000/- or
less
b) By Total Turn key contracts – TENDER basis
c) By Partial Turn Key contracts - TENDER basis
d) Labour Contract – by Work award
e) Schedule Contracts
Divisional Officer at their discretion may award the work on Labour Contract upto
Rs.10,000/- for each work and upto Rs.20,000/- at any point of time in Taluka Sub-division
to one Contractor. The works shall be evenly awarded as for as possible.
1. Departmental portion of Village electrification
2. Energisation of IP sets
3. Erection of Express lines
4. E & I Works – only lines not less than 1 KM

EXECUTION OF TEMPORARY WORKS

1. After receipt of sanction to TPS estimates shall be prepared & get sanctioned for both
errection and dismantling
2. The Consumer will be intimated to deposit by cash the net amount of estimate together
with ACC for the period of TPS
3. Execution of work will be taken up only after the consumer fulfills the formalities
4. Before servicing shall be ensured that the ELCB installed
5. The period of Temporary service lines to be maintained should be specified in the estimate
6. Temporary installation should not be allowed to be in service beyond the period of
sanction.

DISPOSAL OF ESTIMATES
1. Estimates after sanction by the competent authority should be returned to Divisional
Officer and endorse copy of „Internal Audit‟
2. The List of Estimates Sanctioned during the month should be prepared and sent to
Zonal CEEs before 10th of each month endorsing copies to Internal Audit
3. The following particulars furnished in the list of Sanctions to estimates:
4. i) Appropriation of Grant
ii) Reference to Administrative sanction
iii) The amount provided for individual works
iV) Provision for incomplete works of previous years

275
.

SUPPLEMENTARY ESTIMATES
• Any development of project thought necessary while a work in in progress, which is
not fairly contingent on the proper execution of the work as first sanctioned must be
covered by a supplementary estimate accompanied by a full report for additional work
or deviation from original sanctioned estimate

REVISED ESTIMATES
When it becomes apparent that the sanctioned estimate is likely to be exceeded by more than
five percent either due to the rates being found insufficient or from any cause whatever except
as mentioned in case of Supplementary Estimate shall be prepared and got it sanctioned by
the Competent authority.

COMPLETION REPORTS
a) Capital Works under:

i) Rural Electrification Schemes

ii) Service Connections
c) Power supply to IP sets –
THREE MONTHS from the date of Starting service
b) All others works – THREE MONHTS from the date of completion of work.

276
.

CHAPTER-20

ENERGY ACCOUNTING AND AUDITING IN POWER DISTRIBUTION

SYSTEMS

Introduction

Power is a critical infrastructure for the growth of Indian economy. Acceleration in the
economic growth will depend upon a financially and commercially viable power sector that is
able to attract fresh investments. However, the financial health of State Electricity Boards
(SEBs) has become a matter of grave concern considering that their losses have reached an
alarming level of Rs.32,000 crores, which is equivalent to about 1.5% of GDP. Out of total
energy generated, approximately only 55% is billed and only 41% is realized resulting in
aggregate technical and commercial losses of the order of 45- 50%.

With the large amount of electricity now being handled by the power utilities, 1 %
reduction in AT&C losses would provide substantial financial benefits to the utilities. To
realise the benefits, a systematic approach to reduce commercial and technical losses would
be necessary. The reduction of technical losses can be achieved through system improvement
and upgradation schemes to reduce overloading of lines, transformers, improvement of
voltage profile, etc. but require large capital investments. However, reduction in commercial
losses can be achieved at a much lesser cost and in a shorter time frame through
administrative and legislative action. Development of comprehensive energy accounting
system would enable quantification of losses in different segments of the system and energy
auditing would provide the means to identify the areas of leakage, wastage or inefficient use.
This would help in identifying measures suitable for reduction of T&D losses.

Accounting and Auditing in electricity sector involves evolving procedures and checks
to account for energy from generating stations down to consumer level. In the present
scenario, the focus would be from Grid sub-stations where sub-transmission systems
(66/33/11kV) take off generally as a radial system to supply power to consumers at different
voltage levels. The objective is “to prepare an energy account so as to establish the energy
input and quantum consumed by/billed to various categories of consumers”. This leads to
identification of high loss areas which in turn would help in evolving strategies and action
plans for reduction of losses. The underlying idea is to treat One Energy Unit (kWh) as a
unit of electrical money and follow and develop a system for accounting each unit similar
to that is followed in financial accounting and auditing which has established practices to
enable proper accounting of money to detect the leakages, misappropriation, fraudulent
transactions, etc and contribute in improving the financial performance of the organization. In
energy accounting system, each unit of electricity (kWh) is to be treated as a unit of electrical
money. The accounting system should ensure that the energy made available at sub-
station/11kV feeder/Distribution transformer and units utilized by consumers are checked to

277
.

see whether the difference between the two are reasonable and within permissible limits. In
addition it should ensure that all energy is billed and revenue realized in an effective manner.

Energy Accounting

Energy Accounting is conceptually simple. It involves preparation of accounts of the energy

flow to various segments and its consumption by various categories of consumers as well as
energy required for meeting the technical requirements of the system out of total available
quantum over a specified time period. This helps in accurate measurement of energy
generated, energy consumed and energy lost.

Energy Accounting Procedure

Approach

The fundamental approach to energy accounting should be bottoms-up and related to

organizational and responsibility structure of the utility. Each Junior level Engineer should be
entrusted with responsibility of covering a 11 kV feeder(s), which could be feeding a number
of consumers. He would be responsible to account for the energy received by the feeder and
billing of their connected consumers. The exercise would involve establishment of energy
measurement system and preparation of energy balance related to the different responsibility
areas in the field for billing and revenue collection.

Preparation of an effective energy account will be possible only if:

-I

simultaneously.
ystem and energy
sales.

secondaryside of distribution transformers to record load curve which facilitates assessment

of load factors and loss load factors.

The exercise would involve establishment of energy measurement system and

preparation of energy balance related to the different responsibility areas. The exercise is
highly data intensive as it involves large number of feeders at 11 kV and 0.4 kV level
connected from the different S/Ss and each serving to the large number of consumers of
various categories. Preparation of electrical network database and documentation and
consolidation of consumer details would be the first step in energy accounting. Each
consumer should be identified with the Distribution transformer through which he is fed, and
then each Distribution transformer would be identified with the feeder on which the
transformer is installed. In turn each feeder would be identified with substation from which
electric supply is received. This could be done by giving one „Code No.‟ to each consumer,

278
.

which would be his „technical address‟ on this bill. In addition, the bill should include the
identification of meter reader and applicable tariffs.

The efficacy of the data for energy accounting would largely depend on the quality of
meters employed in the system. Network metering and consumer metering system should be
reviewed and working, non working, defective, unmetered supply etc. should be documented
for taking corrective measures.

In the Sub-Transmission and Distribution systems in a responsibility area, some

feeders may cross the boundaries and feed the loads either in part or full other areas also.
Such inter area exchanges should be avoided at 11 kV level by network reconfiguration and
administrative/jurisdiction adjustments. In cases where such network restructuring is not
feasible or economical, additional energy meters could be placed at appropriate locations or
relevant data on energy transfers/billed consumption could be exchanged between the units
to avoid complication of accounting. The network within the unit at Division/Sub-
Division/feeder level may also be so reconfigured to minimise the Inter-Division/Sub-
Division/feeder exchange of energy and there is no dilution of responsibility in actual
practice.

Well defined procedures for reading of the energy meters (on 11 kV feeders) not having
data logging facilities and consumer meters would enhance the reliability and correctness of
energy accounting. To correct for non-simultaneous reading of consumer meters and billing
cycles, simple procedures should be laid down. For unmetered consumption, till such time as
100% consumer metering is in place, data derived from sample metering at selected
distribution transformers, sample survey of consumption of various categories of consumers
on a system wide basis would be required. For getting optimum results, scientific sampling
techniques are to be adopted. Size of sample, actual location where the meters are to be
installed should be based on detailed analysis of consumers profile, identification of regional
factors and other parameters, having an impact of consumption. For example in the case of
agricultural consumers the parameters would be cropping pattern, ground water profile,
irrigation practices, agro-climatic factors etc. For domestic and commercial consumers, the
parameters could be based on income levels, sanctioned/connected load etc. In the case of
street lighting, the season wise sample survey, hours of supply and number of working light
points etc., should be considered. With the analysis of data from such surveys, the energy
consumption of un-metered consumers could be worked out on a reasonable basis.
Accordingly reasonably reliable figure of energy losses for each feeder could be derived.

Even after achieving 100% metering of consumers, it would be necessary to have

metering of some selected distribution transformers, serving different categories of load to
provide a reference point for checking the energy balance. The data from consumer level
metering and sample survey data should be utilized to firm up consumption of each class of
consumer and derive validated data. The sample metering data would enable establishing
norms of consumption and investigation of out of norm consumption and causes and reasons
thereof.

279
.

The overall check would also be possible by adopting the population of each class of
consumer and applying the sample data for estimation of consumption to validate T&D
losses.
The energy accounting would require constant review and modification to bring it to a
stage and level where in a reasonably true picture emerges. Considering the volume of data
and nature of job, it would be necessary to computerise the energy accounting system to
generate Management Information System (MIS) reports for different level of management.
This would enable taking remedial measures to improve billing. In medium & long term it
would facilitate to take system improvement measures.

Computerised billing software placed at Division/sub-division level should be designed

to capture the concept of tracking the consumer to the electrical network and meter reader.
MIS reports of each feeder could be generated through suitable Financial Energy Management
System software package developed to meet specific needs of the circle.

Some of the important features of software could be as under:

Consumer General Ledger)

(Rs/kwh) for each category and feeder as a whole

This would enable feeder wise monitoring of activities and assessment of achievements vis-à-
vis targets for loss reduction and revenue realisation.

The energy accounting is not a one-time exercise but is to be done on a continuous

basis. This would be effective for identification of strategies to reduce the losses in short and
long term and also contain them at reasonable levels. The financial turn around of the utilities
can be achieved through a well-developed energy accounting and audit system with
accountability at all levels. Organisation structure of the utility and accounting system has to
be developed in an integrated manner to take up this activity effectively.

Energy Audit

Energy Audit is the technique to establish the current status of energy efficiency of a system.
It involves identifying energy losses, quantifying them, segregating the losses into technical
and commercial losses, estimating energy conservation potential and proposing visible and
economically attractive solutions. The ultimate end result of such an exercise is to improve

system performance, increase its efficiency and introduce design changes leading to
renovation, modernisation and upgradation. The energy accounting gives the overall picture of
energy availability and its use. The energy audit would enable analysing the data in
meaningful manner to evolve measure to introduce checks and balances in the system to

280
.

reduce leakages and losses and also to improve technical performances. Energy audit should
be carried out with the following objective:

collection.

-technical losses.

and overall energy balance in the circle.

Procedure for energy audit

In the process of supplying electricity to consumers, energy losses are occurring on

account of technical and commercial reasons. The technical losses are due to energy
dissipation in the conductors and the equipments used for transmission and distribution of
power. Commercial losses are caused due to pilferage of energy, defective meters, meter
reading errors and energy not accounted for. The energy losses are to be computed for each
element of the network on the basis of actual energy sent out and actual consumption as
recorded by the meters installed on both sides of the element. In accordance with the sample
metering arrangement given at Exhibit-I the losses in various system elements could be
worked out as per the description given in Annex – I

It may not be possible to conduct energy audit for the entire power system of a utility in one
go due to financial, organizational and logistical constraints. Hence it has to be conducted in
stages. A compact area of the power system would have to be identified and energy audit
studies taken up. It is very difficult to get a very accurate picture due to the following reasons:

at consumer installations the meters are of Class 2 accuracy.

consumers are taken in a staggered manner.

e not taken due to locked premises/ defective
meters.

Proper and accurate meters, meter reading, meter testing & calibration, billing and collection
systems are essential for effective and accurate energy accounting.

281
.

Proposed Test Schedule for meters

Single Phase LT meters Once in 5 years after installation

LT three phase meters (CT operated ) Once in a year to be checked since
20 kVA to 100 kVA these are installed for high value
consumers
Other LT metering systems Once in two years after installation
EHT /HT meters
- Below 5 MVA- Once in a year
- 5 to 10 MVA – Once in six months
- above 10 MVA – Once in a quarter

The testing schedule for HT consumers should cover the ent ire Metering System including
CT‟s, PT‟s and Pilot Wire. Detailed ratio Test ing of CT, PT and control Pilot/ wires is to be
done. Testing through mobile vans/mobile cubicles through secondary injections kit and
phantom loading may also be carried out by Measurement Unit.

Functional Requirement for Meters for Energy Accounting and Audit

The Meters for Energy Accounting and Audit are termed as System meters which basically
are meters at S/s, outgoing feeders, distribution transformers etc. The role of meters for
energy accounting and audit i.e. system meters is to arrive at operating & performance
parameters, energy accounting and energy audit. System meters are generally not used for
measuring energy for commercial purposes, and hence need not cater to any tariff structure.

Role of system meters is served by having time of day logging features to enable the following

(i) Time of day wise energy accounting

(ii) Time of day wise load flow studies
(iii) Time of day wise voltage profiles
(iv) Computation of supply availability duration
(v) Computation of supply interruptions

Data from system meters are used to derive,

(i) Ampacity loading of individual line sections

(ii) Voltage profile of busses
(iii) Supply availability duration, No. of interruptions
(iv) Energy sent out (for feeder meters), Operating parameters (like peak/base demand,
diversity factor at substations, load curves, load duration curves, reactive
deficit/surplus etc.)
(v) Technical loss in different line sections (from load flow studies using the meter data)
(vi) Energy mismatch at different busbars

282
.

(vii) Energy accounting for different administrative areas within a utility

(viii) Contingency analysis (capability to cater to loads in event of line tripping)

(a) Data logging features needed for system meters (Feeder meters and S/s meters), to obtain
the above information are interval wise logging of the following data.

(i) Energy (kWh)3 phase

(ii) kW3 phase (at peak kVA of interval)
(iii) kVAr3 phase(at peak kVA of interval)
(iv) Voltage3 phase-average(at peak kVA of interval)
(v) Power down time (in minutes during the interval)

A data logging interval of 30 minutes or 15 minutes is sufficient for system meters. The
emphasis is to have all system meters of the same type, i.e. logging the same set of
parameters, so that the data can be grouped/summated & and less on the interval duration.

In addition to above time-of-day logging, the meters should have (i) a cumulative energy
register (ii) cumulative count of load interruptions (with interruptions measured as current less
than a threshold value)

(b) Data logging features needed for DT meters are an interval-wise logging of the following
data.
(a) Energy (kWh)3 phase
(b) kWR phase (at peak kVA of interval)
(c) kWY phase (at peak kVA of interval)
(d) kWB phase (at peak kVA of interval)
(e) kVArR phase (at peak kVA of interval)
(f) kVArY phase (at peak kVA of interval)
(g) kVArB phase (at peak kVA of interval)
(h) VoltageR-N (at peak kVA of interval)
(i) VoltageY-N (at peak kVA of interval)
(j) VoltageB-N (at peak kVA of interval)
(k) Power down time (in minutes during the interval)

The suitable interval here is 30 or 15 minutes.

The emphasis here is more on having all system meters of the same type, and less on the
interval duration. In addition to above time-of-day logging, the meters should have a
cumulative energy register

283
.

Segregation of losses into technical and non technical losses

The losses determined through energy accounting are compared with the losses estimated
through network simulation studies. Load flow studies for the distribution system can be
carried out utilising the data from 11 kV feeder‟s meter and field data of distribution
transformer loading (through tong testers) and energy losses may be worked by applying
load and loss load factors suitably. With availability of distribution system analysis software,
load flow studies can be carried out for different loading conditions during the energy
accounting period for more reliable results. Estimation of losses in LT network may be done
initially for sample network emanating from representative distribution transformers covering
different category of consumers and load density. With full computerisation of database it
would be feasible to cover the whole LT system as per needs. The difference of energy input
measured at feeder end and the recorded consumption, is the total loss. The difference of
total loss and the loss obtained from simulation studies (technical loss) is an indication of the
non- technical loss in each distribution feeder. This accounting and analysis would enable
segregation of technical and non-technical losses in the system and draw up strategies for
achieving results in both the fronts.

Identification of elements with high technical losses

The technical losses computed for each element of the network from load flow studies are to
be compared with the reasonable level of losses for that element. The reasonable level of
losses in various segments of the system as set out by the Committee of experts/Central
Electricity Authority in the “Guidelines for Development of Sub-transmission and Distribution
system” for conditions prevailing in the country are as under:

ZONE SYSTEM ELEMENTS POWER LOSS (%)

A Step-up transformer & EHV transmission 0.50% to 1.00%
system
B Transformation to intermediatevoltage level, 1.50% to 3.00%
transmission system & step-down to
subtransmission voltage level
C Sub-transmission system and step-down to 2.25% to 4.50%
distribution voltage level
D Distribution lines and serviceconnections 4.00% to 7.00%
Total losses 8.25 % to 15.50%

These losses depend on pattern and nature of demand, load density and the capability and
configuration of system, equipment used and vary for various system elements. However,
system where total percentage loss lie beyond these values should become a matter of
serious concern and further study and analysis should be carried out. Targets for reduction of
technical/non-technical losses should accordingly be fixed, measures identified and action
taken to accomplish the same within the given time period.

284
.

Proper energy accounting and auditing would facilitate in creation of a data base to act as
input for following upgradation/ improvements to the distribution system:

Load Management.
Details of power factor, active and reactive power flows and suitable location for react
power injection in the system.
Assessment of diversity in the system
Optimum utilisation of equipment and services.
Improved voltage profile in the system.
Details of category-wise consumption of loads and proper forecast of demand.
Better system augmentation and expansion planning.

Scope for Improvement of efficiency in consumption/Agricultural Sector

There exists an enormous scope for technological improvements and energy savings in all
energy consuming sectors and this is vindicated by the fact that the energy intensity of India
is many times higher than that in developed countries. India‟s energy intensit y per unit of
GDP is 3.7 times higher than that of Japan and 1.5 times that of USA, indicating a very high
wastage Therefore, efficiency in consumption of energy becomes very important. There is
huge scope for energy saving in industrial, commercial, domestic and agricultural sectors.
Efficient use of energy provides the least cost and most environment friendly option for
capacity creation in the shortest possible time. One of the sectors viz agriculture is being
taken as an [Link] per studies conducted by various organizations the operating
efficiencies are much less than what can be achieved.

Achievable efficiency versus operating efficiency

Achievable Efficiency Average actual

efficiency in field
Pump 70% 30% to 35%
Motor 88% 70% to 75%
Pump set as a whole 60% 27%
with piping

Coordinated programmes for improvement of pumpsets in the country are required to be put
into place to tap the huge potential for energy savings. The agricultural consumers may not be
ready to put in money for improvement of the pumpsets. However the utilities would benefit
by subsidizing the programme for rectification of pumpsets due to the reductions in capacity
additions/ procurement of additional power for meeting the inefficiencies in the pumpsets.

Profit Center

In the competitive market environment of today business cannot survive unless there is total
accountability and associated responsibility and authority. Distribution sector also needs to
be treated as a business entity if financial viability is to be achieved. The heads of the

285
.

business units should be empowered to act and be held accountable for their actions &
performance. Such a concept would be achievable if each electrical unit is declared as a
profit center with its own accounting system. The performance parameters as well as
benchmarks can be set for improvement. This would also bring in the sense of ownership
and competition, which are essential ingredients for success of a business.

There is a need for declaration of every unit as a profit center and establishing base line
parameters as well as bench marks for measuring improvements consequent upon the
commercial, administrative and technical interventions. The operating expenses of the unit,
which contribute towards the delivery cost of energy to the customer, can also be monitored
more closely as a profit center concept and measures may be initiated for reduction of the
same.

The segregation of business units of utilities should be done on business accounting basis
and financial practices may be adopted with clear principle on following lines:

The above segregation may be done as a separate profit centre of as a Stand alone Business
Unit (SBU) or as fully owned subsidiary of utility and this may be accomplished in steps with
following to be achieved immediately:

reserve etc.
ice could be worked out
for division, sub-division up to the feeder level.

In the next stage, the separate unit must formulate itself as a complete business unit and
should have at least following information

ng of all assets and meters.

286
.

Difference between energy accounting and energy audit (this can also be used for
the purpose of assessment also if desired)

Energy Accounting Energy Audit

Basic definition
Importance
Procedure (key steps)
Necessary conditions
Precautions

Overcoming the Obstacles to Energy Accounting

Problem Solutions
Lack of meters. Present to the company the business case
(economic study) that it the company will
loose less money when meters are
installed. Acknowledge that collections
will not be 100%. Even with less than
100% collections the business case is
probably positive.
Lack of manpower Make the business case for more staff.
Lack of computers This business case is easy, since the cost
of computers is low, especially when
compared to the lost revenue.
Employees take bribes or extort money
from customers 1. Pay them a compensation package
(salary, bonus incentives, retirement,
medical and dental plans, optic plans,
education support, etc.) that puts them in
the third quartile of the industry and the
public.

2. Then discipline them. Discharge those

that are found and proven to be corrupt;
adhere to the companies disciplinary
procedures.

3. Then, civilly, and in some cases

criminally, prosecute the special cases.

287
.

Time parallax in data collection.

same time, on the same day. Create meter

reading routes that are based on feeders,
not geography.

function in the meter on the DT to time

slice the energy flow into the feeder to
coincide with the day of the route meter
reading.

Conclusion

Accounting and Audit form the basis for detail and complete evaluation of the system which
is need of the hour. The T&D losses for the country as a whole are reported to be about 34%
as per data received from the utilities. However, most of the utilities after restructuring are
reporting losses in the range of 35- 55% and the actual losses in the country are still a matter
of conjecture in the absence of adequate metering at various voltage levels. Considering this
trend, the T&D losses for the country as a whole could be around 45-50% and there is a
potential for reduction of losses by 30-35 %. This reduction could be achieved by reduction in
both technical and commercial losses. The benefit to the utility in terms of reduction in
capacity addit ions will, however, largely be through reduction of technical losses and to
some extent through commercial losses as commercial losses contain some element of
wastage of electricity. Commercial losses are generally considered as a financial loss but not
an economic loss. However whenever there is an element of free electricity, wasteful use
creeps in. The reduction of these wastages would also lead to reduction in capacity additions
required.

The adoption of proper energy accounting and audit would ultimately facilitate increased
revenue realisation for the energy supplied to the consumers, identification of areas and
causes of high energy losses and cutting down on its own expenses on account of the
operational inefficiencies. It also helps the utility in bringing accountability and efficiency in
its working. This would enable improving the financial health of the utility and would
contribute substantially towards overall development of the power sector and improving
financial health of the utilities.

288
.

Annex-I
SAMPLE FORMAT FOR COMPUTATION OF LOSSES FOR SYSTEM ELEMENTS

Sl. No. System elements Losses (MU) Losses as % of

energy available
in the system
220 kV Line M 7–M9
220 kV / 132 kV transformation M 9 – M 10
132 kV Line M 11 – M 12
132 / 33 kV Transformation M 12 – M 15
33 kV Line M 16 – M 17
33 / 11 kV Transformation M 17 – M 21 – M 22
11 kV Line & Distribution M 21 – M 23 – M 24
Transformers*
LV Lines $ M 25 – 21 – M 22

Note* The description given refers to the method of calculation of losses in respect of an
individual 11 kV feeder and should include the reading of meters on the distribution
transformers as well.

$ for a typical LV feeder.

Refer Exhibit – I for location of meters (M1, M2……………..)

289
.

CHAPTER-21

POWER PURCHASE

1. COMMENCEMENT OF POWER PURCHASE ACTIVITIES

 As per provisions of Electricity Act 2003, KPTCL is barred from power trading activities
w.e.f 10.6.2005
 The same is entrusted to ESCOMs who are the successor entities of KPTCL and
stepped into the contracts under Statutory Transfer Scheme

2. GOK ALLOCATION FOR PURCHASE OF POWER

 GOK is giving the share of allocation for procurement of power by each ESCOM from
time to time. The latest GOK order is 23.4.2012
 BESCOM share of allocation is as below
Long term contracts:
Sharavathy generating stations 16.97%
Other Hydel station of KPCL 41.58%
All other stations 49.62%
Short term/Medium term contracts: 70.62%

3. CAPACITY AND RATE PER UNIT DETAILS

I. State owned Generating Stations:-
KPCL Hydel:-
[Link]. 100% MW [Link] Rs/unit
1 Sharavathy valley project 219.8 207 0.21
2 Bhandra project 39.2 19 1.91
3 Kalindai Valley Project 955 474 0.26
4 Varahi Valley project 230 114 0.43
5 Ghataprabha powe house 32 16 0.77
6 Kadra project 150 74 1.11
7 Kodasalli dam 120 60 0.87
8 Gerusoppa Tailroe project 240 119 1.83
9 Almatti 180 89 1.95
10 Mini Hydel Projects 5 5 1.16
11 Shivanasamudram 42 21 0.74
12 Shimshapura 17.2 9 0.43
13 Minirabad 28 14 0.70
14 MGHE – Jog 139 16 0.98
Sub Total 2397.2 1290

290
.

I Central Generating 100% MW [Link]

Station:- Rs/unit

1) NTPC RSTPS 1 & 2 417 207 1.95

2) NTPC Stage III 108 54 2.82
3) NTPC Talcher 320 159 2.99
4) NTPC Simhadri 202 100 3.76
Sub total 1047 520
5) NCL Stage 1 & 2 342 170 2.55
6) NLC Expn-1 115 57 3.23
Sub total 457 227
7) Madras Atomic power station 27 13 2.09
8) Kaiga 1 to 4 579 287 3.38
Sub total 606 300
Total 2110 1047

II Major IPPs:- 100% MW [Link]

Rs/unit
1) Upupi Power corporation Ltd 1080 536 3.13
Unit 1 & 2
2) Tata power Company Ltd 80.61 40 12.21
Total 1160.61 576

III Minor IPPs:- 100% MW [Link]

Rs/unit
1) Co-generation 26 26.00 3.85
2) Biomass 29.5 29.50 5.12
3) Mini Hydel 145.85 145.85 3.11
4) Wind mill 1091.65 1091.65 3.55
Total 1293 1293

291
.

IV Medium term/short 100% MW [Link]

term contract:- Rs/unit

1) M/s JSW 500 353.10 4.26

2) M/s NETS 100 71 4.03(Including
[Link])
150 106 4.20(Including
[Link])
3) M/s BMM ISPAT Ltd 30 21 4.10
4) GUVNL 500 353.10 4.35(Including
[Link])
Sub Total 1280 904.20
Grand Total 10576.81 6396.00

4. POWER PURCHASE DETAILS IN PREVIOUS YEARS

As per audited accounts for FY 12, the power purchase cost is as follows.

Source Approved by the com Actuals

mission
Units (MU) Total Cost Units (MU) Total Cost
(Rs/Cr) (Rs/Cr)
KPCL Hydel 5552.51 258.64 5852.13 258.29
KPCL Thermal 6755.03 2504.75 6977.41 2491.29
CGS 5282.05 1527.36 5570.96 1653.75
Major IPP 2749.01 1361.89 1761.50 968.89
NCE 2768.15 978.00 31849.45 1117.59
Others 134.97 29.65 17.27 0.88
Short term 3343.99 1518.40 3165.33 1499.40
Purchases under UI & others 73.71 9.88 70.04 13.17

292
.

Purchases to meet the deficit 30.23 12.09 295.84 158.29

(Sec11)
Transmission, SLDC & other C - 751.99 0 763.35
harges
Energy Balancing charges - (-)1242.22 (-)431.61
Total 26689.64 8952.66 25657.71 8493.29

5. PAYABLES/RECEIVABLES BY BESCOM ON ACCOUNT OF ENERGY BALANCING

AND SHARE DIFFERNCE IN SHORT TERM PROCUREMENT

1. Energy Balancing:-

 GOK is approving percentage of share for energy to be procured from each Generators.
Accordingly the power purchase from each source is billed paid and accounted.
 The energy required is drawn at Inter face points
 The energy purchase should tally with the energy drawn at IF point plus approved
transmission loss.
 This was being worked out by PCKL earlier.
 Now SLDC collect all the details about energy purchased energy drawn at IF points,
inter ESCOM energy exchanges and wheeled energy from all ESCOMs and energy is
balanced.
 On account of energy balancing BESCOM has to Pay/Receive following amounts.

Period MESCOM GESCOM HESCOM CESC Total

2005-06 - (-) 2.99 7.97 4.88 9.86
2006-07 - 71.66 125.19 57.38 254.23
2007-08 - 144.75 114.91 16.79 276.45
2008-09 (-) 1.69 - (-) 6.38 (-) 8.92 (-) 16.99
2009-10 (-) 2.36 - (-) 31.89 (-) 42.82 (-) 77.07
2010-11 (-) 118.60 (-) 121.76 - (-) 10.33 (-) 250.69
2011-12 - 54.76 298.54 63.39 416.69
Total (-) 122.65 146.42 508.34 80.37 612.48

2. Allocation Difference inrespect of short term purchases:-

 BESCOM had entered into contracts on short term and medium term basis at share of
allocation approved by PCKL. Subsequently GOK/KERC had approved the share as
70.62%.
 The difference in share of allocation receivable by BESCOM from other ESCOMs is as
below

293
.

(Amount in Rs/Crores)
Period MESCOM GESCOM HESCOM CESCOM Total
2011-12 - - 241.89 32.21 274.10
2012-13 49.93 7.02 92.98 44.40 194.33
(upto
Oct.12)
Total 49.93 7.02 334.87 76.61 468.43
DO letters and letters are addressed to ESCOMs, PCKL and GOK frequently for
releasing payments.

6. PLANNING FOR REDUCTION IN POWER PURCHASE COST:-

 An amount of more than Rs 1081/- Crore has to be received from other ESCOMs on
account of energy balancing and share difference.
 The power purchase cost from past six months is as below.

Month Energy in Amount in PP Cost

Mu Cr. Rs./Unit
Apri.-12 2305.43 850.05 3.69
May-12 2445.54 929.39 3.80
June-12 2447.47 912.46 3.73
July-12 2457.98 909.10 3.71
Aug.12 2361.58 870.61 3.69
Sept.12 2153.03 793.85 3.68
Oct.12 2522.85 949.36 3.76

 Upto July-12, the power purchase cost is more than Rs 900/- Crore. During Sept-12
DO letters were addressed to SLDC/PCKL for non scheduling power from M/s Tata
Power Company Ltd and to schedule only85% of minimum off take inrespect of short
term power purchase.

294

Common questions